Home

MAPublisher 8.0 User Guide

1. MAPublisher 8 introduces the MAP Web Author tool that exports Adobe Illustrator documents with GIS data to interactive Flash maps fully completed with callout bubbles rollovers layer control pan and zoom controls and with all the underlying GIS attributes intact As with the other MAPublisher functions MAP Web Author is a completely built in to Adobe Illustrator Therefore users are not required to have Adobe Flash installed to benefit from this tool An interactive Web map is exported without any additional sg patna coding or software requirements immediately after the map z document is created with MAPublisher All the GIS attribute information can be embedded in callout bubbles The resulting Flash map offers controls for the layers visibility Additionally specific feature point line and area can be identified from the attribute information when users type a keyword in a search box Users with advanced knowledge in HTML syntax will be able to embed the created Flash map objects to any Web page F ae OE Py Sr Topics covered in this section are i MAP Web Author Panel Web Tag Dialog Export to Web MAP Web Author Workflow Chapter 15 MAP Web Author 135 MAP Web Author Panel Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP Web Author or MAP Toolbar MAP Web Author Panel Specify Source Media Folder Specify the directory path to the media files that might get inserted
2. Avenza SY Sel Evid Sh 0 amp Mey Lis Microsoft Windows Quality Matters Mac OS eri ine Me oe i a TE ig User Guide Avenza MAPublisher 8 User Guide Copyright 2000 2008 Avenza Systems Inc All rights reserved MAPublisher 8 for Adobe Illustrator User Guide for Windows and Macintosh Avenza MAPublisher and When Map Quality Matters are registered trademarks of Avenza Systems Inc Adobe Illustrator Adobe Acrobat and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Inc or its subsidiaries and may be registered in certain jurisdictions All other software product names and brands including trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners This manual and the software described in it are furnished under license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license The content of this manual is furnished for informational use onlly is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Avenza Systems Inc or its related companies or successors Avenza Systems Inc assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors omissions or inaccuracies that may appear in this book Except as permitted by such license no part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical recording or otherwise without prior written appr
3. O Join Points Join Lines MAPUBLISHER LEGENDS North Arrow i Ei HEH A J bu SaS Scale Bar Feature Text e Make Index Grids Graticules Chapter 1 Getting Started 21 MAPublisher Toolbar MAPUBLISHER IMAGING Export Image a Register Image MAPUBLISHER PANELS j T E B MAP Attributes EA 5 K v 7 p MAP Web Author MAP GPS Panel o MAP Location Tool MAP Stylesheets MAP Selection Stats MAP Views MAP Selection Filter MAP Point Plotter 22 Chapter 1 Getting Started MAPublisher Toolbar Preparing the Workspace Before you can start using MAPublisher you must first set up your Adobe Illustrator document It is at this point that you define your page size and units set your print orientation and generally prepare your Adobe Illustrator workspace Establish the desired page size and orientation before importing map data as MAPublisher will establish georeferencing based on the current page However editing page dimensions after import will maintain correct georeferencing based on the new page dimensions SETTING UP YOUR DOCUMENT 1 Create a new Adobe Illustrator document by selecting File gt New or Select File gt Document Setup if you already have a blank document open The Adobe Illustrator Document Setup dialog box appears 2 Select the size to use for your page Letter 8 5 x 11 is the default size You may wish to change the orientation to landscape for some files For e
4. Shift drag Labels placed using current Adobe Illustrator Type and MAPublisher settings and leader line created on drag E Line labels are placed horizontally Leader line connects text to line feature Al Area labels are placed horizontally Leader line connects text to line feature Point labels are placed horizontally Leader line connects text to line feature gt drag Labels placed using current Adobe Illustrator Type and MAPublisher settings L Line labels are assigned angle of line at click point Al Area labels are placed horizontally Point labels are placed horizontally NOTE To create custom leader lines use a graphic style Create or load a graphic style and select it in the Graphic Styles panel while using the MAP Tagger Tool function Chapter 10 Labeling Functions 107 MAP Tagger Tool Making Selections MAPublisher contains tools for selecting data graphically and by attribute values The MAP Selection Filters tool provides functionality to create edit and save multiple selection criteria These selections can be applied on any MAP Layer and are saved inside the document The MAP Selection Stats tool can be used for quickly selecting all features contained in a MAP Layer for viewing how many objects are selected at a given time to save a selection and to reverse selections The topics covered in this section are as follows MAP Selection Filters MAP Selection Stats Chapter 1
5. S57 FORMAT 000 S57format is intended for the exchange of digital hydrographic data between national hydrographic offices and for its distribution to manufacturers mariners and other data users It is used for the supply of ENC cells Electronic Navigational Charts to ECDIS Electronic Chart Display and Information System The format is public developed and maintained by the IHO International Hydrographic Office CHRIS working committee Committee on Hydrographic Requirements for Information Systems The objects spatial geometry can be of Point Line or Area geometry while object descriptions are categorized in object classes organized in specific attributes schemas For a full format description please visit http www iho shom fr PUBLICATIONS IHO_Download htm S 57 Appendix A in particular An online object catalog is also available on www s 57 com An S57 base file has the extension 000 while the update files have extensions like 001 002 and so on It can also be accompanied by other files 000 main file 001 update file 1 002 update file 2 00n update file n files TXT and files JPG ancillary text and picture files indicated in attribute definition Update files contains only the changed new deleted modified objects and are only used as a complement of a 000 file Only the 000 file is required for the import into MAPublisher The update files will be applied at conversion when present However text and
6. Jylland dr a or Sj lland a a or 2 Bornholm p ug or 3 National ay J or 4 DOUBLE STEREOGRAPHIC The Double Stereographic projection consists of two mappings First the ellipsoidal data is mapped to a conformal sphere Then a second conformal mapping is done of the spherical data to the plane This projection is used in New Brunswick Canada When Double Stereographic is selected in the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box you will need to enter the following parameters e False Northing and False Easting e Scale Reduction Factor at the Center of the Projection e Longitude of the Center of the Projection e Latitude of the Center of the Projection ECKERT The Eckert projection is a pseudocylindrical projection that is neither conformal nor equal area This projection was presented by Max Eckert in 1906 and is generally used for novelty maps of the world showing a straight line graticule Meridians in this projection are represented by equally spaced converging straight lines broken at the equator The central meridian is half as long as the Equator Parallels are represented by equally spaced straight parallel lines that are perpendicular to the central meridian Poles are represented by lines half as long as the Equator This projection is symmetrical about the central meridian or the Equator Scale is true along latitudes 47 10 N and S and constant along any given latitude or meridian A2 26 Append
7. Parameter Value 165 11 206 Datum Shift Editor Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems The Geodetic Datasource A2 11 Ellipsoids For Ellipsoids you must enter the parameters for the Semi Major Axis and Semi Minor Axis often noted as a and b respectively define the linear units the axes are specified in by selecting a predefined unit in the appropriate fields The Inverse Flattening often noted as 1 f will automatically calculate in the field below Alternately you can make the Inverse Flattening definitive by enabling the check box at the bottom You can then manually enter the Inverse Flattening rather than the Semi Minor Axis parameter amp Ellipsoid Editor Identification Definition Semi Major Axis Value 6378137 Units Meter Semi Minor Axis Value 6356752 31424518 Units Meter Inverse Flattening Value 298 257223563 Inverse Flattening Definitive Ellipsoid Editor Envelopes The use of an envelope is not required but very much recommended to indicate the geographical extents where a given coordinate system is applicable To define Envelopes you must select whether or not there are extents points and if so what point style they are in and what the values of the minimum and maximum points are o Envelope Editor Identification Definition Specify Extents Points Point Style Geodetic Point 2d in Degree m Minimum Point Long
8. Scale Bar Filter gt MAP Legend gt Scale Bar or MAP Toolbar Hiii Object gt Edit Scale Bar Scale Bar Preview Panel Displays a preview of the generated E scale bar __ _e OEEO Select Style Use the Previous lel SSeS 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 Kilometers Cancel and Next buttons along Units Select the desired with the map units to be used in the 0 400 800 1200 1600 Miles Scale Bar Preview Panel to selected scale bar select the desired scale bar Advanced toggle Click to show TT ES aba or hide the scale bar options lai tide Interval Specify the length of in the lower section First Bar nord bay re H in the selected Horizontal lines Select the Interval 500 400 i i f Labeled intervals E h desired number of horizontal Units oma B Mile Z abeled in ervals nter t e lines to be included in the gt number of interval which will scale bar Used with certain a Advanced comprise each bar scale bar styles only Intervals to subdivide Enter the Number of labeled intervals 5 4 Sub intervals Select the x number of scale bar intervals number of sub intervals for Number of horizontal lines 0 7110 to be subdivided each subdivided scale bar Number of intervals to subdivide 0 H 0 HH interval gt Add interval left of zero Check this box to have an Text Style Select the Adobe interval placed on the scale Illustrator Character Style to bar to th
9. The Export Image filter provides the functionality to export raster images with various georeferenced formats Georeferencing information for such images are usually stored in a separate text file except GeoTIFF where the image and its associated reference file have the same file name but a different file extension Clarevitle 109 eas The reference file formats that can be read by Register Image or written to by Export Image are World tfw Image Report irp MapInfo TAB tab ListGeo lgo Geol IFF tif a single file containing both the image and its reference data Topics covered in this section are Register Image Export Image Chapter 12 Working With Images 115 Register Image Filter gt MAP Images gt Register lmage or MAP Toolbar EN Tie Points Change the tie point of the image by clicking another corner of the graphic Placement X Y Specify the coordinates in map units of the selected corner of the raster image Upper Left Placement n Eee a Load File Image Sizet Specify the size of each pixel in the selected map unit updates the Effective Map Size Load File This button will allow you to choose a file containing the Image Size 854 by 957 pixels Regi eoreference information for the Note Register Image now supports non 1Pixel x 0 012773 deg g square pixels 4 selected raster image The information Y 0 012773 deg from
10. When European Stereographic is selected in the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box you will need to enter the following parameters e False Northing and False Easting e Latitude of the Center of the Projection e Longitude of the Center of the Projection e Scale Reduction Factor at the Center of the Projection A2 30 Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems MAPublisher Supported Projections FULLER DYMAXION R Buckminster Fuller Dymaxion Projection is a method of projecting the spherical Earth onto a twenty sided polyhedron known as an icosahedron This icosahedron is then unfolded in such a way that the major land masses will appear whole without the map borders breaking them apart More information may be found at the Buckminster Fuller Institute www bf org The Fuller projection has no parameters NOTE Only a spherical form of this projection is used The semi major axis of the ellipsoid sphere is used for forward and inverse projection from grid to geodetic coordinates within the system wherein this projection is incorporated For more information about the map and the work of Buckminster Fuller visit the Buckminster Fuller Institute at www bfi org The Fuller Projection Map design is a trademark of the Buckminster Fuller Institute 1938 1967 1992 All rights reserved www bf org GALL STEREOGRAPHIC The Gall Stereographic projection is a cylindrical perspective projection that is neither conformal nor equal area
11. criteria to the current selection s vais Get Subset of Current Selection Makes a selection within the Remove from Current Selection Removes the current selection highlighted criteria from the current selection New Edit Selection Filter Edit Selection Filter Name Assign or edit the name of the selection filter Provinces with density greater than 10 Expression Enter the expression Density gt 10 mm canca directly into the entry field or click wW The expression is valid the Browse button to access the Edit Expression function see chapter 5 Edit Expression Opens the Expression Builder for editing the assigned expression Expression Validity Indicates if the expression is valid or invalid If invalid additional information is reported FUNCTIONALITY MAPublisher Selection Filters allow you to build edit and apply multiple selection criterias based on the attributes and properties contained in MAP Layers Selection criterias are created in an expression builder Selection filters can be applied to any MAP layer and are saved in the document so that they can be edited or applied later CREATING A SELECTION FILTER The MAP Selection Filters panel is opened by going to Window gt MAPublisher Panels gt MAP Selection Filters or clicking the MAPublisher toolbar button F This panel will contain a list of all the selection filters in the current document Create a new MAP Selection Filte
12. will hold the buffered objects FUNCTIONALITY The MAPublisher Buffer Lines filter creates buffer Area objects around the line work This can be useful if you are attempting to calculate distances on each side of a line An example where you would use this tool could be in the planning of new roads where the actual width of the highway is a major consideration PREREQUISITES Your MAP Layer must be a L Line layer to use Buffer Lines Before using this filter you must create an A Area layer in your Adobe Illustrator Layers panel Create a new layer and then drag this to the MAP View which holds line work you wish to buffer remembering to set the feature type to Area To use this tool select the line s you wish to buffer and then go to Filter gt MAP Lines gt Buffer Lines or use the MAPublisher toolbar button se USING BUFFER LINES You can choose to buffer lines by entering a value or by selecting an attribute column that contains buffer values The buffering value specified designates the total width of the new area object For example a value of 10 map units would create a buffer of 5 map units on either side of the selected line This works on individual lines or a selected set of lines The buffer width will be calculated and created using the units of measurement set in the dialog box 1 Set the unit to use for the buffer value from the Units drop down list 2 Then choose which option to use for the buffer values
13. Browse Opens a Data Source browser to enable the selection of an export directory Character Encoding Assign a codec if the attribute information held in the selected layer or MAP View uses a double byte character set Export visible attributes only Check this option to export only the attributes that are currently visible in the MAP Attributes panel MicroStation Settings C Keep format extension Coordinate Units Master UOR Area Fills Allow area fills Area Fills Controls whether or not fill linkages will be written out for ellipses shapes and solids Coordinate Units Specifies how feature coordinates will be interpreted and converted Master Sub or Units of Resolution KML Settings General C Keep format extension C Do not export attributes Google Maps compatible Export visible attributes only Do not export attributes Check this option for export to KML to be used in Google Maps Google Maps does not support KML files with attribute values FUNCTIONALITY MAPublisher supports the export of single MAP Layers or whole MAP Views to various GIS formats maintaining all georeferencing and attribute information The following export formats are supported CAD dxf dwg Delimited Text Data csv tsv txt ESRI Interchange File e00 ESRI Arclnfo Generate gen ESRI Shapefile shp GML Simple Features 3 1 1 gml xsd KML kml MapInfo MIF
14. I I I I Line Label Settings A g Follow Don t Follow Line Select whether text Label Type 9 Folow line create text on a path Don t follow line create point sext should follow paths or be placed at a point Line Labels fom starts Auto O Feed near the selected line Distance from start Controls where the text is Reverse nght todeft paths fio upside down text a ci Line Smoothing Enabled Offset Smoothed Line Flip upside down labels By default this is located along the line always enabled and will automatically wi j i Label Poston C Baseine O Oexender _ g Oc f Auto ipa ape sete dae dl aera fz E than ine j ains orient labels correctly Disabling this straight lines and find the smoothest portion E Adu oer feature will not flip label closest to the midpoint for curved lines lAimh padite that tien bs sahna ok Fixed will allow for precise placement of Line Smoothing Offset Line Check to smooth text along a line C Reduce horizontal scaling to a minimum of the generated text path Then specify an offset distance for the text path from the original Adjust label if larger than line Specify rules for the scaling of text if the text will not fit onto the text path in its entirety Click the Up or Down buttons to adjust Set all labels to same minimum size If at least the order in which the rules will be C Set ol lobus to tre some miriam fort see one label has been reduced in
15. If you cannot register your purchased license directly from the application due to Firewall limitations then go to www avenza com register or email activation avenza com or phone and provide the Machine ID displayed in the Finish screen We will then send you an email with a zipped license file attachment You must unzip this attachment and save the lic file to the appropriate folder RETRIEVE YOUR MAPUBLISHER LICENSE If you have inadvertently deleted your license file from your hard drive you can click the Retrieve button of the MAPublisher Welcome Screen or MAPublisher License Management dialog box This will download the license file from our server If you cannot retrieve your MAPublisher license directly from the application due to Firewall limitations then go to www avenza com register or email activation avenza com or phone and provide the Machine ID displayed in the Finish screen We will then send you an email with a zipped license file attachment You must unzip this attachment and save the lic file to the appropriate folder The license file is located in the following directories Windows XP C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Avenza MAPublisher 8 Windows Vista C ProgramData Avenza MAPublisher 8 Mac OS X Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 MAPublisher Plug In Alternatively users may right click on a row in the License Management dialog box started from the menu Help gt MAPublisher Licensing
16. LANDSAT The generic name for a series of Earth resource scanning satellites launched by the United States of America Latitude Angular distance expressed in degrees and minutes along a meridian north or south of the equator Lat Long Latitude Longitude Unprojected A5 6 Appendix 5 Glossary H L Layer A designated level in artwork used for storing organizing and editing graphic or mapping data Legend The section of the map that explains the meaning of the symbols used to depict graphic or geographic elements Legend element A legend key combined with its associated text Legend key The graphic symbol used to illustrate attributes in a legend Longitude The angular distance east or west from a standard meridian to another meridian on the Earth s surface expressed in degrees and minutes Line One of the basic geographical elements defined by at least two pairs of X Y coordinates usually too narrow to be an area See also arc path and vector Listgeo A free utility for examining GeoTIFF header information It can be used to dump the contents of the GeoTIFF header in human readable form Linear scale The relation between a distance on a map and the corresponding distance on the Earth Scale varies from place to place on every map The degree of variation depends on the projection used in making the map Lossless Lossy Lossless techniques compress image data without removing detai lossy techniques compress image
17. The Join Points filter allows a group of point symbols to be joined to form a line based upon sorting criteria which exist in the attribute structure of the point layer For example it may be desirable to join points that were originally generated by a GPS device in order to create line elements connecting these points When the Join Points filter is run a new layer is created containing a line linking each set of common points with the generated layer containing the same common attribute column that was used to group the points together PREREQUISITES Join Points can only function on Point layers and can be used on both currently selected point symbols or all the point symbols on a specified layer There must be at least two attribute columns on the specified point layer in order to use Join Points To open the dialog box go to Filter gt MAP Lines gt Join Points or MAPublisher toolbar button i USING JOIN POINTS From the Input Layer drop down list select the Point layer containing the points you wish to join Then specify if you wish to join All Points or just the Selected Points on this layer by selecting the appropriate option Specify a name for the Output Layer that this function will generate By default the program will generate a Line layer To generate an A Area layer by linking the line end to the start check the Close paths option In the Group By Column drop down list select the attribute column containing t
18. 12 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide MAPublisher Unicode Support Mac OS X Unicode Support mporting Attribute Column Name Attri File Directory V ESRI Inter change File Data Format Delimited Text ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTES ESRI Arcinfo Generate ATTRIBUTES GML Simple Features MapInfo MID MIF MapInfo TAB E MicroStation om ATTRIBUTES 57 ASCII TEXT FOR ATTR VALUES Sbeis ual Re bute Value FORMAT HAS NO FORMAT HAS NO FORMAT HAS NO Re s FORMAT HAS NO FORMAT USES SIMPLE IBUTE NAMES AND MOST Windows Unicode Support Working with Images Filename Register Image File Directory Register Image Data Format moran I Ie de File Directory Export Image Mac OS X Unicode Support Exporting Filename Export Image Attribute Value Attribute Column Name 7 Data Format Delimited Text CAD DWG FORMAT HAS NO SHEHA ATTRIBUTES EA FORMAT HAS NO ATTRIBUTES ESRI Inter change File ESRI Arcinfo Generate ESRI Shapefile GML Simple Features MapInfo MID MIF MapInfo TAB MicroStation FORMAT HAS NO Design ATTRIBUTES V When using system encoding on Windows XP for example using the default Japanese encoding on Japanese Windows XP When using non system encoding on Windows XP for example using Japanese encoding on English Windows XP Al 13 Appen
19. 52207 Top Right Adjust X and Y values Top Right for the upper right of the grid extents X 1033095 25846 Fi 2077770 65357 Labeling options Start alpha numeric index at Edit the first Start alpha index at value used for cell labels rt alpha index a Do not use characters Enter alpha Start numeric index at characters to omit from cell Do not use characters references Reference label order Choose to make Reference label order Center Labels alpha numeric or numeric alpha Chapter 13 Grids and Indexes 125 Grids and Graticules GENERATING AND EDITING THE GRID When all the options have been set click OK to create the grid The grid will be plotted on the legend layer using the entered parameters Use the bounding box of the generated grid View gt Show Bounding Box to resize if required Resizing grids horizontally or vertically will add or remove component cells in the grid After transforming a MAP View containing a grid the grid will be transformed and rescaled within its current bounds the physical extents of the grid on the page is not edited In this scenario you should use the bounding box to resize the grid to the new bounds If you wish to change any parameter without generating a new grid simply select the grid and access the Object gt Edit Grid Edit Graticules menu item This will re open the Grids and Graticules function and the current parameters of the grid will be available f
20. 615 Booth Street Ottawa Ontario K1A OE9 ED50 TO ED87 NORTH SEA The ED50 to ED87 North Sea Transformation consists of 4th order reversible polynomial that is used to convert coordinates between the ED50 and ED87 datums This formula was published in a 1991 note created by the Norwegian Mapping Authority Statens Kartverk entitled Om Transformasjon mellom Geodetiske Datum i Norge The ED50ToED87NorthSea transformation method is hard coded and does not require any parameters FOUR PARAMETER METHOD Based on the Helmert family of transformations a Four parameter transformation is similar to a Seven parameter transformation except it does not include rotations Parameters needed to define a four parameter transformation are Parameter Often Noted as GEOCENTRIC TRANSFORMATIONS A three parameter translation between two geocentric coordinate systems This is a non simplified Molodensky transformation There are three steps that are performed by this transformation First the input point is represented as a Cartesian point in three dimensions on the input datum The coordinates of this point are then translated using the dx dy and dz parameters Finally the translated point is represented converted to a geodetic point on the output datum A2 52 Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems Datum Shifts HARN MAPublisher supports the definition of a geodetic datum based on a NGS High Accuracy Reference Network HARN The National Ge
21. Chapter 3 Importing Map Data 39 Advanced Import Changing Coordinate Systems Prior to Import If the program displays Unknown for the Coordinate System of a file you may select the row and click the Edit button to specify it by returning you to the Advanced Import Data Source dialog box It is not possible to import multiple files with a mix of unknown and known coordinate systems therefore the unknown coordinate systems will need to be specified Note that you can only import the listed files in a single coordinate system even though they may comprise of several coordinate systems Therefore the Destination MAP View section holds the details of which coordinate system the listed files will be imported in The destination coordinate system the file s will be imported into will be displayed in the panel in this section and will show the Name of the coordinate system its Map and Page Anchors Scale and Angle for the selected file These settings will be discussed more in chapter 5 MAP Attributes Destination MAP view You have three choices when deciding the destination coordinate system for the imported files 1 You can choose to import all of the listed files in the coordinate system and parameters that exists in one of the listed files Click New based on and then select one of the files in the coordinate system you require If you have multiple files in the File List you can check the Auto scale option to ensure that when the data is imp
22. Column Visibility Click the Show Hide Columns button or Right click Windows or Ctrl click Mac on a column in the dialog box to edit the column visibility either toggling visibility for individual columns or for all columns It is also possible to edit the visibility of attribute columns with the Edit Schema tool page 66 Zoom To and Highlight Feature To zoom into a specific feature in the attribute table select a single attribute and click the Zoom to Feature button This will automatically fit this feature to your screen and highlight it allowing you to examine this feature closer or to simply locate it on your map To highlight a specific feature on your page maintaining the current zoom level click one attribute of that feature Property Attributes The attribute table can also be configured to display property attributes for your datasets These attributes describe the current assignment of graphical properties such as the stroke weight style rotation and scale etc that is currently associated with the data These fields are editable and provide the ability to modify a map objects graphical properties directly within the context of the MAP Attributes panel itself To edit a property attribute for a particular map object you may either double click within the appropriate property cell and directly enter a value or choose from an available drop down list depending on the property type you are editing Once these changes have been en
23. DXF is a CAD data file format developed by Autodesk as their solution for enabling data interoperability between AutoCAD and other programs The Dwg format is used for storing two and three dimensional design data and is the internal format for the AutoCAD Computer Aided Design package DWG is also the common name for AutoCAD proprietary DWG technology developed by Autodesk for their AutoCAD package Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions dwg dxf Aggregate No Automated Translation Yes Circles Yes User Defined Attributes Yes Circular Arc Yes Coordinate System Support No Elliptical Arc Yes Generic Colour Support Yes Ellipses Yes Spatial Index Never Polygon Yes Schema Required Yes Donut Polygon Yes 3D Support Yes Point Yes Line Yes Text Yes Supported Versions Windows Releases vrs R12 to 2007 Mac OS X Releases vrs R12 to 2007 Prior to the import process additional Settings can be made which will affect how the selected file will import The following parameters can be applied to the import e Group Entities Group entities by Layer Name or Geometry e Hatches Check this box if you want MAPublisher to read your hatch patterns upon import e White Lines and Fills Enabling the Import as is option will instruct MAPublisher to import the data true to the original colour settings contained in the file Check the Change white lines and fills to black box to import black lines instead of the files native white
24. Enter the name of the output layer This new layer will Close Segment Gaps contain the newly joined lines Proximity Assign a proximity value in the current unit This value Close Segment Gaps If two line segments are separated by determines how close together in a distance less than the Proximity selecting this option map units the lines must be in order will create a line segment that connects the two lines to be joined otherwise a compound path is created FUNCTIONALITY The Join Lines filter allows a group of linear features to be joined based on a common value within an attribute column For example it may be desirable to join all segments of a particular street by the common attribute of street name in order to create a single line element representing that street When the Join Lines filter is run a new layer is created containing the joined lines in order to avoid deleting other attributes within the original street layer The new MAP Layer contains the joined lines with an attribute column representing the joined column Join Lines can be very useful for reducing the size of a data file by joining related lines and thus reducing the number of segments and associated data present in the file It is also very useful to run Join Lines prior to labelling with Feature Text Label in order to reduce the occurrence of duplicate labels see chapter 10 Labelling Functions PREREQUISITES This tool can be executed on selections
25. For more information on Unicode visit http www unicode org The following tables display Unicode UTF8 support in MAPublisher for GIS data formats that are Unicode UTF8 compliant Unicode support for importing and exporting data is different so for each platform two tables have been created For each data format there are four areas where Unicode character encoding can be used 1 File Directory when Unicode encoding is used in the path to where the file is located 2 Filename when Unicode encoding is used in the filename 3 Attribute column name when Unicode encoding is used in a column name for attributes 4 Attribute value when an attribute value contains Unicode encoding Windows Unicode Support mporting Windows Unicode Support Exporting File Attribute Attribute File Attribute Attribute Data Format Column Data Format Column Directory Value Directory Value Name Name Delimited Delimited Text Text FORMAT HAS NO FORMAT HAS NO ATTRIBUTES ESRI Inter ESRI Inter change File change File ESRI Arcinfo FORMAT HAS NO ESRI Arcinfo Generate ATTRIBUTES Generate ESRI ESRI Shapefile Shapefile GML Simple GML Simple Features Features MapInfo MapInfo MIF MID MIF MID MicroStation FORMAT HAS NO MicroStation FORMAT HAS NO Design ATTRIBUTES Design ATTRIBUTES ce pp Po FORMAT USES SIMPLE oon y ASCII TEXT FOR ATTRIBUTE NAMES AND MOST VALUES FORMAT HAS NO ATTRIBUTES FORMAT HAS NO FORMAT HAS NO A1
26. J Sheets lal of Ready l NUM A The MAP Location Tool can be used to generate the X and Y coordinate values suitable for building ASCII Point Files See chapter 4 for more information Al 32 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide General Tips and Hints JOINING SDTS TABLES The following information should be used in conjunction with the MAPublisher Join a Table function When working with United States Geological Survey SDTS files it is necessary to join tables frequently in order to obtain the map attribute table you require to make the map you want This is due to the fact that SDTS data is constructed such that the primary vector data is held separately from the various attribute tables that one might want to use for a particular mapping purpose The attribute table that comes as part of the vector file usually contains a unique identifier RCID for each map element that is used to join it with the other data tables For example a particular vector file containing the geography of rivers would contain a data column called RCID Various data tables containing information such as vegetation fish counts or flow rates might be available each also with an RCID column The desired tables are then joined to the initial map attribute table by RCID value using the techniques described in the previous pages To find the SDTS tables to join with the vector map file look for the files which have names that start with the same character stri
27. Select a distance off the TA abet eee at E E A EEN O ER EE the Character Style to use for the Axis Labels Select a distance off the grid to place the labels eee ene coms Line Stylet Place off line Select the Character Style to use for the Line Awes shie Pma Character Ste sa Label Direction Click to reverse the Piace labels off cel br Got grid to place the labels direction that labels increment eee ar ewes Character Eik y Pisce l be of ire ri p Cell Labels Solid graphic shows SPEM i Append units to labels Choose to labels will be generated t J JES nh include labels i e degree symbols Click a cell label to toggle all ht for Line Labels labels ON or OFF oan Ta aaas Centera jga le Units Set the units for Measured Flip Label Axes Click to flip which Grid dimensions if appropriate axis will be labelled alpha and Labels Values Select the type which numerically of labels to display distances t If the Center Axes and Line style lists do not contain a recently created character style simply return to the Character Style panel double click this style and click OK in the Character Style Options dialog box This forces Adobe Illustrator to re load the list of character styles measured from the lower left corner of the grid or actual projected coordinates Eastings Northings LJ Index Grid Settings H naex H Number of Columns and Rows
28. U S Department of Commerce 1968 These projections should only be used for data that has been computed using this method For all other state plane calculations use Exact Methods The parameters for these coordinate systems are defined in Publication 62 4 For further information contact the U S Department of Commerce The Mercator27 projection does not require any parameters TWO POINT FIT The Two Point Fit Projection is used when a local grid needs to be converted to another coordinate system From two known points with both easting northing and lat long values for each point the remainder of the grid values can be derived and used for coordinate conversion purposes When Two Point Fit is selected in the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box you will need to enter the following parameters e False Northing Northing and False Easting of the first point e Northing and False Easting of the second point e Latitude and Longitude of the first point e Latitude and Longitude of the second point What happens is that MAPublisher takes two points i e a line from one coordinate system lat long for example and THE SAME two points from a second coordinate system e g local survey coordinates and matches them You must have TWO points that you know what the coordinates are in BOTH systems Example Situation For example A surveyor ties into two benchmarks BM1 45N 84W and BM2 45 00 01N 84W She starts at BM1 and calls it 10000
29. VDOP n a F Altitude Displays the current altitude Position n a Plot by Time Plots points at a specified in metres above mean sea level time interval which are reflected in the D Lat Long Point Plot Settings dialog box Position Displays the current position Map Units Meter of the GPS device in either Lat Plot by Distance Plots points at a specified Long or UTM coordinate systems distance interval which are reflected in depending on the option selected Lat Long or Map Units Meter Indicates Dilution of Precision Displays the the Point Plot Settings dialog box if Lat Long or projected coordinates Positional PDOP Horizontal HDOP are used for the display of the and Vertical VDOP values received Start End Route Creates a path using the Position data from the GPS device selected Graphic Style using all valid GPS information received FUNCTIONALITY MAP GPS will collect interpret and apply styles to points and lines from information received from a supported GPS device within an Adobe Illustrator document based on user settings Several plotting options are available for use in MAP GPS For plotting points users can decide whether to plot single points using the Manual Plot option to plot points based on a specific time interval or to plot points based on a set distance interval For plotting lines the Start Route feature may be used to create a line feature containing all valid information received from the GPS
30. W wW Coordinate Format This drop down list allows the format of the data to be set on import e g Decimal Degrees Packed DMS see page 77 Use first line as a header If the first line of the text file you are Group Entities By Group entities by layer name or geometry Hatches Check this box if you want MAPublisher to read your hatch pattern on import White Lines and Fills Choosing the Import as is option will instruct MAPublisher to import the data true to the original colour settings contained in the file Choose the Change white lines and fills to black option to import black lines instead of the files native white lines Choose the Create black background option to incorporate a layer containing a black background to mimic the AutoCAD environment AutoCAD DXF DWG Settings Settings Group Entities By layer By geometry Hatches Read hatches White Lines and Fills Import as is Change white lines and fills to black Create black background importing contains column headings check this box Pen and Brush Patterns Enable this box to view the pen and brush pattern values in the imported attribute table MapInfo TAB and MIF MID Settings Settings Pen and Brush Patterns K C Import as Visible Attributes ESRI Interchange File Settings Enable Specify if you require the creation of a layer holding the registration control points If you enable the
31. When MAPublisher does this it is in a sense compressing its more precise numbers into Adobe Illustrator less precise numbers and this is where the truncation may occur An easier way to visualize this is to think of a pad of grid paper If this paper was the artboard Adobe Illustrator would only be able to place points where two grid lines meet but MAPublisher could put points anywhere on the page However since Adobe Illustrator is ultimately where the information is plotted when a MAPublisher point is plotted on the page it would get rounded to the nearest grid line intersection point Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Al 19 Frequently Asked Questions lam receiving an Error loading plug ins when I start Adobe Illustrator What should I do Search for and delete any copies of a file named Adobefnt05 Ist If that does not work search for and delete any copies of a file whose name starts with Adobefnt and has a st extension The Adobefnt Ist files are cached descriptions of the font environment They can be rebuilt when needed so it is safe to delete them Why do some art objects fail to display completely Sometimes drawing with Adobe Illustrator shape creation tools results in the object not being displayed completely by Adobe Illustrator The object s geometry is complete because if you set the View to outline View gt Outline as opposed to Preview you can see that the object is there in its entirety you can also
32. When the Buffer Lines filter is run with the Attribute Value option checked an area width is calculated based on the value s related to the selected object s in the attribute table The area will then be constructed based on the line s attribute value When the filter based is run based on a Static Value an area object is created by the specified value 3 Choose the A Area layer to place the buffer s then click OK to generate the areas In Adobe Illustrator CS4 Buffer Lines is found in the Object gt Filters gt MAP Lines menu 86 Chapter 8 Line Functions Buffer Lines Flip Lines Filter gt MAP Lines gt Flip Lines or MAP Toolbar FUNCTIONALITY The MAPublisher Flip Lines filter reverses the endpoints of a line or an area open or closed path Adobe Illustrator Brushes and Type on a Path tools are designed to position patterns and text depending on the direction of the endpoints Two consequences of this are e Cases occur when labels are placed upside down and backward when using the MAPublisher labelling tools MAP Tagger tool and Feature Text Label see chapter 10 Labelling Functions e When applying graphic styles with a brush pattern to paths manually or using MAPublisher MAP Stylesheets sometimes patterns are not applied at the right side of the line or in the expected orientation In order for the labels or patterns to be consistent for a group of lines flipping some of the lines may be necessary Lines
33. associated with the Shapefile map There is one record in the dBASE table for each feature in the map file To ensure successful import select the tab component in the MAPublisher importers MicroStation Design dgn Import and Export MicroStation Design files dgn are the native files created by Bentley Systems Inc and formerly Intergraph MicroStation product Design Files consist of a header followed by a series of elements The header contains global information including the transformation equation from design units to user coordinates as well as the dimension of the elements in the file Each element contains standard display information such as its colour level class and style as well as a number of attributes specific to its element type During the import process MAPublisher will reproduce dgn levels as distinct Adobe Illustrator layers Therefore a typical single import will produce one layer for each Level that exists in the MicroStation Design File MAPublisher supports the import of MicroStation J version 7 and V8 files Files are exported to DGN from MAPublisher as MicroStation J files Prior to import set the colour mode of the Adobe Illustrator document to the same scheme used in the colour table of the original file i e RGB or CMYK to ensure that the colours are interpreted correctly upon import The hierarchy of layers in multi feature imports is by feature type in the following order text layers then po
34. click a inoen es CONTAINS the link display unique values to display Bg Seung E a eral FES California all the attribute values of the BL ancar M Colorado iaai selected attribute column Functions List of functions for use in the expression if required FUNCTIONALITY The MAPublisher Edit Expression tool provides for the entry and edit of expressions for use in the generation of new attribute values and properties to make selections or to apply styles Expressions can be entered using the keyboard and or by selecting from listed column names operators and functions Edit Expression provides functionality for a number of tools Edit Schema page 66 To create or edit an expression for the generation of values in an attribute or column MAP Attributes panel gt Edit Schema gt Derive value from expression gt Browse Apply Expression page 74 To apply an expression to an attribute or property column for selected art only MAP Attributes panel gt Apply Expression gt Browse New Edit Selection Filter chapter 11 To create or edit expression criteria for use in selecting map data MAP Selection Filters panel gt New Edit Selection Filter gt Browse MAP Stylesheet Editor chapter 9 To create or edit an expression for use in styling map data MAP Stylesheets panel gt Edit MAP Stylesheet gt Advanced Expression gt Browse ENTERING EXPRESSIONS Expression can be built using the keyboard and or b
35. co N lt o Ww wz m N 12345 6 7 8 9 1011 121314 15 1617 1819 20 21 22 2324 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 5354 55 56 57 5859 60 Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems UTM Map Zones a a ata i a A2 57 Appendix 3 MAPublisher 8 How To s For Legacy Users Legend Functionality in MAP Stylesheets A number of functions have been redesigned in MAPublisher 8 Users of MAPublisher 6 or earlier should consult the following pages for information on how to perform common legacy MAPublisher tasks in MAPublisher 8 BUILDING COLOUR RAMPS TO CREATE STYLES You can enhance the look of your maps by using colour ramps rather than random colours for your area and line styles A possible use for this would be in the creation of relief maps Determine the number of new graduated styles you wish to create Create two rectangles with the Rectangle Tool aligned vertically one at the top of the page the other at the base Colour the first top and last bottom elements with two end colours for the ramp Choose Object gt Blend gt Blend Options Choose Specified Steps from the list Enter the value you determined in the first step minus two Click OK Select the two rectangles Choose Object gt Blend gt Make The legend elements will be blended between the two end colours 7 Choose Object gt Expand then choose Object gt Ungroup This ungroups t
36. e Latitude of the Center of the Projection e Scale Reduction Factor at the Center of the Projection SWISS OBLIQUE MERCATOR The Swiss Oblique Mercator projection is a particular case of an Oblique Mercator projection which in turn differs from the Mercator and Transverse Mercator projections in that the central line with true scale is neither the equator as in the Mercator nor a meridian as in the Transverse Mercator and is chosen to suit the region to be mapped In the Swiss Oblique Mercator this line has an azimuth of 90 degrees and contains the centre of the projection The SwissObliqueMercator projection has no parameters TILTED PERSPECTIVE The Tilted Perspective projection represents a view of the Earth from space in which the view is from anywhere other than a point precisely facing the center of the Earth This projection is therefore used to generate pictoral views of the Earth resembling those seen from space It is a modified azimuthal projection that is neither conformal nor equal area The central meridian and a particular parallel if shown are straight lines Other meridians and parallels are usually arcs of circles or ellipses but some may be parabolas or hyperbolas If the point of perspective is above the sphere less than one hemisphere may be shown The TiltedPerspective projection has the following parameters e Azimuth e Latitude of Origin e Tilt e False Northing e Longitude of Origin e False Easting A2 44
37. gt Edit Scale Bar menu item PREREQUISITES To accurately create a scale bar your MAP View must contain accurate georeferencing information and the coordinate system must be projected i e not in degrees The MAP Layer on which you intend to create your scale bar must be a selected active and unlocked W Legend layer If you require a custom character style to be used for the labels of the Scale Bar it is also advisable to establish this style Window gt Type gt Character Styles before opening this dialog box The Scale Bar dialog box is accessed by clicking the menu Filter gt MAP Legend gt Scale Bar or MAPublisher toolbar button Esl In Adobe Illustrator CS4 Scale Bar is found in the Object gt Filters gt MAP Legend menu 130 Chapter 14 Scale Bars and North Arrows Scale Bar ADDING A SCALE BAR Standard Options Use the Previous and Next buttons to select the scale bar design you require Note that certain scale bar designs contain two bars and when such a design is selected the Second Bar column of options will be enabled In the Units drop down list specify the units that you wish the scale bar interval s to be based on The default units are that of the current MAP View In the Interval text box s specify a real world distance that each interval of the scale bar will represent This figure will be in the unit you specified in the Units list NOTE A scale bar cannot be created on a MAP View that c
38. negative values or greater than zero to select positive values Then go to Filter gt Flip Lines e AreaDirection property value see chapter 5 for converting areas at a time Select the area to edit and then choose the alternate value for AreaDirection in the MAP Attributes panel A1 18 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Frequently Asked Questions LABELLING ISSUES I am having trouble with the MAP Tagger tool Where am going wrong This can happen either when the layer or object to be labelled is not available for editing Check to make sure that the desired layer is available for editing the features in question are not locked and you have a Text layer in your document to use to output the text to In addition if there is no fill to an area or polygon object the label tool much like the Adobe Illustrator selection tool can only find the paths defining the unfilled area Therefore in such cases it cannot find the unfilled area and thus cannot label the unfilled area PROJECTION ISSUES How do I know what coordinate system my files are in In MAPublisher the importers will automatically determine the coordinate system of the chosen files if this information is included in the file header or is located in an associated file e g prj If MAPublisher returns a message of lt No Coordinate System Specified gt for the Projection you should first ask your data provider to provide you with this information Also there are
39. 1 Contents yii What s New in MAPublisher 8 MAP Web Author Use the new MAP Web Author tool to create interactive Flash maps for Web based content complete with rollovers pop ups and layer control A number of options are available to design your Web tags e Include Images and set their size e Use MAP Attributes to automatically populate the text field e Type and style custom text Insert hyper links Users can design templates and tag multiple data layers at the time During the export process the user can customize the outline of Web tags and see a preview of the final product MAP Vector Crop Tool With MAPublisher 8 new Vector Crop tool users only need to draw a box around an area of interest and all geometry outside the frame is cropped out while preserving attributes and styles MAPublisher Toolbar MAPublisher now has its own customizable toolbar Buttons for importing all MAPublisher filters and toggle buttons for MAPublisher panels can be found on this dockable toolbar Adobe Illustrator CS3 and CS4 only New MAP Point Plotter Dialog Box The MAP Point Plotter dialog box has been redesigned for the release of MAPublisher 8 The point style is now selected from a pop up dialog box which contains a larger preview of all the styles present in the document including their full name By default the point s position is plotted using the same coordinate system as the current MAP layer but users can now elect to
40. 10 coordinate systems used select Recent Saat Sans i Cope Proce ag Tim E Sard E iira Aricia Arche isi rae ups Spee E hae th denice rer fer Crirdnca Daw Anos eer Paria Toii Comer Eyad EAn e i este Pee hammer kiat Bed ier iran pops Serer fore Dylindroel Caas Anna Eee td oer Dairis Core Dairiuni Cri Dh See oe Hae Pura diol Marth Mile iratai oberehe eh i Search Specify a text string n MDT DAN Grid hy F REDT DAR Grd higth LrepecSes dete Rigi mpe bed on to search the database for _ Gutdate Tagracar ae eee oe coordinate systems Results um Srail snask jka ws us i are displayed in the Search category Matching MAP View Automatically opens if there is already a coordinate system in your document which matches the incoming data Matching MAP View Found Your data matches one or more MAP Views found in the document Please select a destination MAP view OK Add to Add the incoming data file to a matching MAP View m Destination MAP View Add to world C Resize MAP View to fit Resize MAP View to fit Check this box to rescale the matching data so that both the selected layer and the incoming data fit inside the page extents Fit to page based on new MAP View 32 Chapter 3 Importing Map Data Simple Import Settings Opens a Settings dialog box if the file format requires the input o
41. 10000 Northing Easting and traverses to BM2 and gets some N E value You now have two points BM1 and BM2 that have Lat Long coordinates and Local coordinates That is you now have the endpoints and orientation of a common line in two coordinate systems You need to define a new coordinate system using those two points as the references Any scaling rotation etc issues are taken care of because you have just linked two points i e defined a line length and orientation in space that are common to both coordinate systems Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems A2 47 MAPublisher Supported Projections UNIVERSAL TRANSVERSE MERCATOR The Universal Transverse Mercator UTM projection class is an extension of the Transverse Mercator projection class that allows all UTM zones in a given horizontal datum to be represented by a single Geodetic Datasource object The UniversalTransverseMercator projection has the following parameters all of which are optional e Current zone number e Currently in northern hemisphere is_north e Automatically set zone autoset The actual Transverse Mercator parameter values to use when converting between geodetic and projected coordinate are determined from the values of the zone and is_north parameters If the autoset parameter is set to 1 then the zone and is_north parameters will be automatically recomputed each time a conversion from geodetic coordinates is performed based on the input geodetic coor
42. Arcs lines Points Polygons and Text Prior to the import process an additional Setting can be made e Ticpoints layer This option enables you to include an additional layer which will hold the registration points for the imported data The default is to set to Yes ESRI ARCINFO GENERATE GEN ESRI simple ASCII storage and interchange format There are three different types of gen files each with of its own syntax one for points one for lines and one for text geometries This is the format exported by Arclnfo generate command The gen files are use by Arclnfo to transfer coverages to other mapping systems Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions gen Aggregate No Automated Translation Yes Circles No User Defined Attributes No Circular Arc No Coordinate System Support No Elliptical Arc No Generic Colour Support No Ellipses No Spatial Index Never Polygon No Schema Required Yes Donut Polygon No Geometry Type Attribute arcgen_geometry Point Yes Line Yes Text Yes Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Al 3 MAPublisher Import Formats ESRI SHAPEFILE SHP The ESRI Shapefile is a geospatial vector data format for geographic information systems software It is developed and regulated by ESRI as a mostly open specification for data interoperability among ESRI and other software products A Shapefile is a digital vector storage format for storing geometric location and associated attribute information This for
43. Canada land Flash Viewer Settings Users can setup the following parameters for the Flash Viewer how the Flash map will be displayed when opened in the Web browser The parameters that can be setup are e Size of the display window width and height it cannot be larger than the Adobe Illustrator document e Initial position of the Flash map of the display pan X and pan Y shift initial Zoom e Display of the navigation buttons or not Users can also make some more advanced changes to the default display settings such as e Viewer style enable only some of the navigation buttons change the zoom and pan factors change the button positions e Popup style change the rounding of the callout bubble arrow style change the drop shadow settings and position e Line style change the color and thickness of line marking clicked and hovered objects e Search box style enable or display of the search box change the default position change the color and thickness of the line marking the objects found by the search Execute Web Export Once all the settings are entered the user launches the actual export to Flash by clicking the OK button The export summary is displayed in the Web Export Log The export creates a set of indispensable default files together with the files specific to the map The specific files are e map afm or map afm compressed when the compress option is checked e MAPublisherSWF swf e map swf plus map_L1
44. Definition and Relationships with Local Geodetic Systems The main advantage of the DMA Multiple Regression Equations method lies in the modeling of distortions for datums that cover continental sized land areas This achieves a better fit in geodetic applications than the Molodensky method NOTE The DMA Multiple Regression Equations method is an application of the theory of least squares The coefficients for the mathematical regression equations are determined by fitting a polynomial to predicted shifts in a local area If the DMA Multiple Regression Equations method is applied outside of the local area for which the coefficients of the equations are determined the results may be unpredictable NADCON METHOD The NGS NADCON method transforms coordinate values between the North American Datum of 1927 NAD 27 and the North American Datum of 1983 NAD 83 The NGS NADCON method provides a transformation that is accurate to within 0 15 0 5 metres Please refer to NOAA Technical Memorandum NOS NGS 50 NADCON The Application of Minimum Curvature Derived Surfaces in the Transformation of Positional Data from the North American Datum of 1927 to the North American Datum of 1983 The NGS NADCON method applies a simple interpolation algorithm using a gridded set of standard datum shifts as parameters The shift values for a geographic area are stored in a set of grid files one representing latitude shifts named with the extension las and one repres
45. Dialog is started when clicking the Add or Modify button This option is enabled when one single object is selected or several objects from a same layer are selected See next page for details When several objects are selected the Multiple button is enabled to allow Web tagging on several objects at once A click Multiple starts the Multiple Web Tag Dialog which is similar to the Web Tag Dialog the only difference is that editions are applied to all selected objects at once Objects that are tagged with the multiple mode may be modified individually at a later stage using the Modify button Web Selection Select all the objects with Web tags All Web Art button or all objects on the current layer Web Art on Layer The navigation buttons may be use to highlight objects consecutively Create a template The Template button opens a dialog box to create a template that is then accessible from the Web Tag Dialog see next page By default the template is set per layer to show the list of all attributes as e Attribute1 Name Attribute Value e Attribute 2 Name Attribute2 Value e etc Template for Restaurants OK Click OK to save the template for lt b gt Address lt b gt Address lt br gt further use lt b gt Zip_Code lt b gt Yazip_Code mbr Cancel Click cancel to reverse to the lt b gt Phone_Number lt b gt Phone_Number lt br gt last saved template lt b gt WebSite lt b gt SWebSite lt br gt
46. Displays the directory path for the export of the currently selected layer or MAP View You can also manually type in the dataset location EXPORT SETTINGS Keep format extension Check this option to export layers with their feature extension _area _line _point or _text which may have been appended to layer names during import AutoCAD Settings General C Keep format extension Release R12 R2000 R13 R2004 R14 R2007 Release Version Specify the AutoCAD version number you wish to export to MIF MID Settings General C Keep format extension Export visible attributes only Delimiter Comma default Semicolon Delimiter Set the fields delimiters to either comma or semicolon 54 Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing Export Character encoding System General Keep format extension C Export visible attributes only Delimited XY Text Data Settings m C Keep format extension Export visible attributes only Indude header Include header Add the column headers at the first line of the exported text file E00 Settings o Export visible attributes only Cancel Keep format extension E00 Compression Level None Partial Full 00 Compression Level Set the compression of the exported E00 file default is None Settings Opens a Settings dialog box for the input of extra parameters see below
47. Export Folder D Flash_CanadaMap m Layer List of Web Tags Export Attributes V Major city names 0 No Z Major cities eeen 0 No C Canada land 0 No C background 0 Select the layers whose visibility can be toggled in the viewer Select All Deselect All Enable Layer Visibility Toggle Layer Control Built in Flash datagrid v The built in layer control is simple to use whereas the external jewascript file with checkbones allows more control over formatting Flash Viewer Settings Width 500px Pan X 0px 2 Initial Zoom 100 Height 500 px a Pan Y 0 px ee Enable Navigation Compress Metadata File map afm recommended Pan X and Pan Y choose the initial pan shift applied when the Flash map is opened Initial Zoom set the zoom level when the Flash map is initially opened Advanced Settings Web Export Dialog L _ ___ SES Basic Settings Advanced Settings Name Value Viewer Style Search Box Style il A OK Click the button to launch the export to Flash Cancel Click the button to return to the MAP Web Author panel number of Web tags callout bubble created per layer Export Attributes Indicates layers for which MAP Attributes are exported when used in Web of Web Tags Indicates the tags Layer Control Select the type of layer control to be inserted in the Flash map Build in F
48. Expression Validity icon will report if the expression entered is valid Otherwise it will report and include additional warning notes Alternatively click the Browse button to enter and edit expressions via the Edit Expression dialog box This function is useful for example to populate the column values based on the contents of other columns and or mathematical formulas The following are some examples of basic expressions which can be assigned to columns in Edit Schema Ontario applied to column NAME Result All items are assigned the value Ontario in the NAME column MAP Area 01 applied to column Style Result All area items are assigned the value MAP Area 01 in the Style column and are assigned the Graphic Style MAP Area 01 on the page 45 applied to column Rotation Result All point items are assigned the value 45 in the Rotation column and are rotated to 45 on the page NOTE String values are case sensitive and must be entered in quotes Adding Deleting and Re Ordering Columns Stipulations regarding the display order of attribute columns in the MAP Attributes panel can be set by reordering the existing list according to your preferences Any column may be promoted in the list attribute table by selecting it in the list and clicking the Up and Down buttons to move it up or down within the list Columns will display in the MAP Attributes panel according to the display or
49. Hints Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems Overview PROJECTIONS OVERVIEW Map Projections are attempts to show the surface of the Earth or parts of it on a flat surface Some distortions of conformality distance direction scale and area always result from this process Certain projections minimize distortions in some of these aspects at the expense of maximizing errors in others whereas others only moderately distort all of these properties e Conformality The scale at any point on the map is the same in all directions Meridians lines of longitude and parallels lines of latitude intersect at right angles Projections with these properties are Conformal e Distance A map has an Equidistant projection when it portrays equal distances from the centre of the projection to any other place on the map e Direction A map preserves direction when azimuths angles from a point on a line to another point are portrayed correctly in all directions Projections with these properties are Azimuthal e Scale The relationship between a distance portrayed on a map and the same distance on the Earth e Area When a map portrays areas over the entire map so that all mapped areas have the same proportional relationship to the areas of the world they represent the projection used is an Equal Area projection PROJECTION CATEGORIES Cylindrical Projection The result of projecting a spherical surface onto a cylinder In a typical cylindrical pr
50. MAP Layers into the default MAP View entitled Non MAP layers and all georeferencing and attribute information will be removed Note that this function must only be used as a final step What causes missing features when exporting MAPublisher layers If you are using an pre existing Adobe Illustrator file not created with MAPublisher you must correctly assign MAPublisher status to your layers and data Only one feature type per layer is supported The feature type icon next to your MAP Layer in the MAP Views panel is indicative of the features on that layer and is the feature type which will be applied if the layer is exported For example if you have Point symbols on a Line layer they will not be recognized as being MAPublisher objects and will be dropped in the export process Why is MAPublisher exporting the Area values as negatives When exporting Area layers to GIS formats polygon outlines must have a positive Area value whereas holes held inside compound paths or complex shapes must have a negative Area value If you have values for polygons in the Area property column of your MAP Attribute table which contradict these guidelines you can use the following tools to convert the MAPublisher area calculation from a negative to a positive value or vice versa e Flip Lines tool see chapter 8 for converting multiple areas e Create a Selection Filter see chapter 11 to select all elements that have an Area of less than zero to select
51. Number of Columns and Rows Specify eColumns 10 the number of columns and rows oe which will comprise the grid sr Display Options Style MAP Grid Style v e Style Select a style for the grid lines Graticule Settings Latitude Pass through latitude Specify a line of f latitude that must be included this can Meneo Interval 2 oe Latitude Intervals Specify the interval for each be any meridian within the data extents Longitude line of latitude Pass through longitude Specify a line of E through 0 Interval 2 e Longitude Intervals Specify the interval for longitude that must be included this can S7 8Y Options i each line of longitude be any meridian within the data extents Style MAP Grid Style Is Style Select a style for the graticules Vertices E _ Vertices Use the slider to increase or Don t label Checking any of these boxes Don t label _ First row will not label a specific column or row decrease the number of nodes which will be used in the construction of the graticules use a higher number if graticules will be curved C First column C Last row C Last column In Adobe Illustrator CS4 Grids and Graticules is found in the Object gt Filters gt MAP Legend menu 122 Chapter 13 Grids and Indexes Grids and Graticules Measured Grid Settings Cell Size P Width 100000 n C Fixed Number of Cells Fixed Number of Cells Check this box to Cell
52. Returns true is the source string ends with the suffix string Based on a conditional statement Searches the source string using wildcards Strings converted to lower case String values as numbers Base to the power of an exponent Strings converted to capital case Converts values from degrees to radians Searches the source string using a regular expression Rounded to specified decimals of precision The sine of an angle Square root of a value Returns true if the source string starts with the prefix string Tangent of an angle Strings converted to upper case Chapter 5 MAP Attributes 69 Edit Expression Confirmation When you have finalized your expression and it has been validated click OK The expression is inserted into the expression field of the appropriate tool The Edit Expression tool can be re opened if further edits are required ew NOTE String values are case sensitive and must be entered in double quotes Example Basic Expressions APPLY EXPRESSION Ontario applied to column NAME Result All selected items are assigned the value Ontario in the NAME column MAP Area 01 applied to column Style Result All selected area items are assigned the value MAP Area 01 in the Style column and are assigned the Graphic Style MAP Area 01 on the page 45 applied to Rotation Result All selected point items are assigned the value 45 in the Rotation column and are ro
53. Search Geodetic E E Projected coordinate system options Antarctica Arctic Asia Europe Example Systems NOT FOR USE North America 4 Oceania Other Outdated Deprecated South America UTM World Datum Shifts Ellipsoids Envelopes Horizontal Datums Linear Units Prime Meridians F To define or edit Coordinate Systems you must select an Envelope defining the appropriate area of use If you are unsure of the appropriate envelope you can leave it set to the default World envelope The Point Style is how you will select the style of linear units for your system For most systems you will want to select Projected point in appropriate units Then select the Geodetic model that using the appropriate datum for your system When you select the appropriate Projection for your system the parameters needed to define the system will appear in the table below Enter the needed parameters and define the units each parameter is specified in Geodetic Coordinate System Editor Identification Definition Envelope World by country Point Style geographic 3D Datum WGS 1984 Vertical Reference Geodetic Coordinate System Editor Projected Coordinate System Editor Identification Definition f Envelope sphere 168 W to 162 W by country aa Point Style Projected Point in Meters Geodetic WGS 84 m a Projection Transverse M
54. Source Media Folder is C Work Flash_Project lmages then the path Mylmage Mylmage1 jpg must be typed in the Web Tag Dialog or in the MAP Attributes panel when using attributes b Creating callout bubbles Using the Web Tag Dialog described page 139 insert the information relative to the callout bubbles title images text contents etc When MAP Attributes have been prepared for some layers users may first select all objects in one layer and choose the Multiple tagging mode Use the Preview to check the aspect of the callout bubble prior to the export process When tagging multiple objects use the buttons Next Previous to display the bubble created for each individual objects 4 EXPORT FLASH DOCUMENTS The settings entered in the Web Export Dialog are determined by the desired aspect of the Web map See details in page 143 We recommend users to tryout the different configurations Here are some simple examples oy Ol Nikon ay names F Map med F Cada pe Simple MAP No layer control no navigation Basic Settings No Search box Advanced Settings Default Style Map Built in layer control and navigation button added through the Basic Settings only No Advanced Settings required Customized Style Map External layer control and navigation button added through the Basic Settings Removed zoom buttons and changed callout bubble style through Advanced Settings 5 VIEWING THE FLASH MAP WITH A WEB BROWSER To
55. Try closing Adobe Illustrator and deleting your Adobe Illustrator preferences file A1 20 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Frequently Asked Questions GIS Backgrounder WHAT IS GIS A Geographic Information System GIS captures stores checks analyzes and displays georeferenced data about the Earth A GIS uses a database management system DBMS to store and link data that relates to the same geographic area This facilitates the following types of queries e What if e What is it e Where is it e What spatial patterns exist e What has changed since FEATURES OF AGIS Analytical Tool GIS systems are used by all levels of governments academia and business for such diverse purposes as monitoring environmental changes sales planning census reporting municipal zoning land records mineral resource management and mapping telecommunications and cable television utilities In short a GIS serves many needs and can be thought of as an analytical tool since it can be used to determine spatial relationships between geographic areas A GIS contains a database linking spatial data with geographic information and lets you associate information with map features and to create new relationships based on those associations Areas An area is a closed bounded object which encompasses a homogeneous area e g a park Attributes Attributes store descriptive information and are stored as sets of characters including n
56. Use roaming license L Don t show again Duration of borrow MAPublisher welcome screen MAPublisher License Management ACTIVATING AN EVALUATION VERSION OF MAPUBLISHER 1 After installation of MAPublisher 8 click the Evaluate button of the MAPublisher Welcome Screen or MAPublisher License Management dialog box Fill the form If you cannot activate the evaluation license directly from the application due to Firewall limitations then go to www avenza com register or email activation avenza com or phone and provide the Machine ID displayed in the MAPublisher License Management dialog box An email with a zipped license file attachment will be sent to you You must unzip this attachment and save the lic file to the appropriate folder 16 Chapter 1 Getting Started MAPublisher License Management 2 When you are ready to purchase the software you can open the MAPublisher License Management dialog box from Adobe Illustrator Help menu at MAPublisher Licensing gt License Management click Register button and follow the instructions in the next paragraph REGISTER A PURCHASED COPY OF MAPUBLISHER 1 To activate MAPublisher 8 you must enter the Serial Number which was provided when you purchased the product 2 After installation of MAPublisher 8 click the Register button of the MAPublisher Welcome Screen or MAPublisher License Management dialog box You will be prompted to enter the serial number then fill out the form
57. Width Height Specify the dimensions Enforce a set himber al counmns and of each cell comprising the grid in the Height 100000 ideas li rows in the grid current map units l Positioning Preset Origin Choose this option to select e Preset Origin Grid Passes Through Point e _ Grid passes through point Choose this a preset X and Y origin OOo option to select specific coordinates o00 X 0 m for the X and Y origin OO m Display Options Style Select a style for the grid lines Style MAP Grid Style i FUNCTIONALITY The Grids and Graticules tool will generate fully editable grid lines based on a number of user defined settings There are three grid types available Selecting Graticules allows you to plot grid lines at specific lines of latitude and longitude which will be automatically curved if applicable Choosing an Index Grid allows you to specify the number of cells that you wish to divide the current grid extents into Choosing a Measured Grid also allows you to place grid lines but with advanced control over placement size alignment and labels using projected coordinates A number of labelling options exist for each type of grid allowing grid lines and grid cells to be labelled if required Any form of grid plotted with this tool can be subsequently resized using the bounding box of the grid and any parameter can be specifically edited via the Object gt Edit Grid Edit Graticules
58. a certain coordinate system click the Info button Format Specific Settings Certain file formats will offer additional configuration parameters which can be accessed by clicking the Settings button These file formats are ESRI Interchange File CAD DWG DXF MicroStation DGN MapInfo MIF MID MapInfo TAB KML and Delimited Text Data Select your file s first If the format accepts additional settings the Settings button will be enabled Study the Import Settings guide page 33 for an overview of the meanings of these options MicroStation Design file import is not supported under Mac PPC Rosetta operating system t Additional Settings are mandatory only for importing Delimited Text Data Delimited Text Data Settings MAPublisher also allows for the import of delimited text files as point data provided they contain coordinate values Delimited text import allows the user to import many different formats including Decimal Degrees DMS Degrees Minutes Degrees MinutesSeconds Delimited DMS and Packed DMS MAPublisher supports the import of delimited text files that contain any of the following delimiters between data values comma return end of line and tab To import delimited text data you must choose the Columns to use for your X and Y coordinates from the two drop down lists Note that only numerical columns will be listed to ease the process of determining the columns to use If the first line of the text file you are importing co
59. a different point symbol while plotting by distance they may do so by simply selecting new parameters Changes will be reflected in the next point to be plotted Plot By Change in Speed The Plot by Change in Speed auxillary settings will plot a point each time a change in speed is detected as specified by the threshold set in the Point Plot Settings Change in speed points are plotted in addition to the points plotted while completing one of the standard plot options Plot by Time Plot By Distance or Route To use this setting a user must first enable it by selecting the Enable this Auxillary GPS Plot Type from the bottom of the MAP GPS Point Plot Settings panel The optional settings for Scale Every and Plot Symbol must then also be specified The Every setting has an additional option which allows specification of the speed units Either km h knots or mi h may be used When plotting begins a new layer is automatically be created specifically for the change in speed points This layer will be automatically named based on the name of the current layer upon which the main plotting operation is being conducted with the phrase change_in_speed prefixed to it For example if the main plotting is in progress on a layer called ABCD the layer created for the change in speed plots will be named change_in_speed_ ABCD Plot By Change in Heading The Plot by Change in Heading auxillary settings will plot a point each time a change in heading is detected as
60. amp Replace tool allows for the searching and or replacing of attribute values and properties contained in the MAP Attributes panel Note only values in visible columns can be found and or replaced USING FIND amp REPLACE Access the tool by clicking the Find amp Replace button or menu item in the MAP Attributes panel Find Only To use Find amp Replace to easily find values click the Find tab to enter your search criteria Find criteria can be typed directly into the Find what entry field previous criteria can be selected from the list A search may be performed on all attributes by default or only on specific columns contained within the MAP Attributes panel by enabling the Just option and choosing a column from the list Criteria may be further refined by enabling the Case sensitive and Match whole word only options Once the search string has been entered click the Find Next button in order to perform the search Search results can be seen in the MAP Attributes panel the column header and row number containing the first matching record will be displayed in bold text At this point you may progress searching for individual records by clicking again the Find Next button Find amp Replace To replace records selected through the Find operation click the Replace tab Find amp Replace criteria can be typed directly into the Find what and Replace with entry fields previous criteria can be selected from the lists A find and rep
61. as a base or reference for other quantities DEM Digital Elevation Model A digital elevation model is a digital file consisting of terrain elevations for ground positions at regularly spaced horizontal intervals Digital elevation models are typically used to represent terrain relief A DEM can be represented as a raster a grid of squares or as a triangular irregular network Demographics Any information relative to people in an area of interest statistics of birth death population etc Developable surface A developable surface is a simple geometric form capable of being flattened without stretching Many map projections can then be grouped by a particular developable surface cylinder cone or plane DGN Native file format of MicroStation from Bentley Systems Inc Digital The ability to represent data in discrete units or digits Digital Line Graph USGS standard output file format These files can be in either Optional opt do or SDTS ddf form Appendix 5 Glossary A5 3 C D Douglas Peucker Line Simplification Algorithm A method of simplifying line data by removing unnecessary vertices Drag To hold down the mouse button while you move the mouse cursor on the screen Drag and drop The action of clicking on objects such as icons or files and dragging them to a different location or space DTP Desktop Publishing DWG AutoCAD Drawing file DXF AutoCAD Drawing Exchange Format Element A fundamental
62. be easily determined Record the location of this point in real world coordinates on a piece of paper 3 Locate the same tie in point on the Adobe Illustrator document page and determine its X Y coordinates in page units Record this number as well using Window gt Info 4 You should now have the location of your tie in point in both map and page units e g 79 5 43 5 in Lat Long is located at 4cm 2cm in the document 5 Open the MAP Views panel navigate to the Options section and select New MAP View Enter a name for the MAP View Set the Scale to the proper scale of the map i e a set distance in document units divided by a set distance in ground units Click the Specify button Choose a projection which matches that of your vector data and click OK Click OK in the MAP View Editor to apply the information to the new MAP View In the MAP Views panel navigate to the Options pullout and then click Specify Anchors 0 Set the Map Anchors to the value of the tie in location in map units using the values determined in step 3 e g 79 5 43 5 11 Set the Page Anchors to the value of the tie in location in Page Units using the values determined in step 4 e g 4 2 Then click OK 12 If you have not previously done so ensure that each layer in your Adobe Illustrator file contains only one feature type Point Area Line Text Legend 13 In the MAP Views panel drag each of the layers which contain your data in to your new MAP Vie
63. can be created for reference purposes or to follow designated lines such as latitude and longitude and can also be labelled for indexing When a labelled grid has EPA k been established MAPublisher is able to generate index files i ECE K containing the location of text objects in MAP Layers A OR s i o Topics covered in this section t f n n po a Grid and Graticules a i Make Index y A Chapter 13 Grids and Indexes 121 Grids and Graticules Filter gt MAP Legend gt Grids and Graticules or MAP Toolbar EEE Object gt Edit Grid Edit Graticules Grids and Graticules i rn a a oor ern ens A a Eee Ee Advanced To access the Advanced Grid Graticule Selection Click the Ei i dialog box page 125 enabling appropriate button to select the merai i a ai to m SA options grid type required and to assign w i ia or your grid or graticules i l divined SPNG SEE DAOU I See Settings panels below r b Note Measured Grids can only be Grataks i created on MAP Views in projected I Te Se pa wrang OAREN Measured Grid i mans Ot idk Center Stylet Select the Character ese Style to use for the Center Labels Axes Stylet Place off grid cell Select Axis Labels Solid graphic denote an T enabled labelling option Click an axis label to toggle all labels on that axis ON or OFF Line Labels Solid graphic shows labels will be generated Click the line label to toggle it ON or OFF Labels
64. can be flipped on L Line layers and Area layers In order to use this filter select the lines to be flipped and then go to Filter gt MAP Lines gt Flip Lines or use the MAPublisher toolbar button ge NOTES e When exporting Area layers to GIS formats polygon outlines must have a positive Area value in the MAP Attributes panel If some values in the Area column are negative and AreaDirection is equal to Counter Clockwise Flip Lines can then be used to reverse the AreaDirection and convert the Area to a positive value s For compound paths the AreaDirection property is equal to Indeterminate therefore compound paths cannot be flipped e The MAPublisher MAP Tagger tool or Feature Text Label have an option to enable Flip upside down labels to create text in a consistent orientation without requiring the use of the Flip Lines function see chapter 10 for details In Adobe Illustrator CS4 Flip Lines is found in the Object gt Filters gt MAP Lines menu Chapter 8 Line Functions 87 Flip Lines J oin Lines Filter gt MAP Lines gt Join Lines or MAP Toolbar a Join on Attribute Select the column TRENES you wish to base the join on All lines within the selected proximity Join on attribute ROUTE with matching column values will be joined Destination Layer ROADS line_joined Proximity Units Select a map or page unit to be used for proximity values Proximity 0 500000 Meter Destination Layer
65. click the Browse button to name the export file and then choose the file format from the Format drop down list ADDITIONAL NOTES Valid Area Direction Area Layer Exports When exporting Area layers to GIS formats polygon outlines must have a positive Area value whereas holes held inside compound paths or complex shapes must have a negative Area value If you have values for polygons in the Area property column of your MAP Attribute table which contradict these guidelines you can use the following tools to convert the MAPublisher area calculation from a negative to a positive value or vice versa Flip Lines tool chapter 8 for convert multiple areas e Create a Selection Filter chapter 11 to select all elements that have an Area of less than zero to select negative values or greater than zero to select positive values Then start the Flip Lines function e AreaDirection property value page 60 for convert areas one by one e Select the area to edit and then choose the alternate value for AreaDirection in the MAP Attributes panel TEXT Property Text Exports It is not possible to export values in the Text property column An alternative is to create a new string attribute column and assign it an expression of Text See Edit Schema page 66 Add Edit Geodetic Datasource Please see appendix A2 for further information on how to edit the geodetic datasource 56 Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing Export MAP Loca
66. connected to the Internet in order to set these permissions To finally view the exported map browse to the Flash export folder as specified in the Web Export Dialog and open the file MAPublisherSWF html in your favorite Web browser Users should be reminded to check that the latest Flash Player version has been installed download from Adobe Web site An outdated viewer might cause images not to be displayed gif format in particular 146 Chapter 15 MAP Web Author Export to Web MAP Web Author Workflow MAPublisher 8 is installed with tutorial materials It is recommended that users go through the exercises described in them in order to get more familiarity with the tools The tutorial materials have an exercise dedicated to the new MAP Web Author panel Users can also refer to this chapter that presents a general workflow to be used for guidance 1 MAP COMPILATION WITH ADOBE ILLUSTRATOR MAPUBLISHER 8 Users must create their map document using the traditional MAPublisher 8 and Adobe Illustrator tools If the only purpose of the map is to create a Flash map consider at this stage the document size parameter as this determines the size of map extents in the Web browser 2 PREPARING FOR MAP WEB AUTHOR a Creating a working directory Create a folder in your computer This folder is to store all the components for the Web Flash map and the exported Flash files b Preparing images for the callouts Images that will be used in the W
67. font size implemented in the labelling process due to the implementation of rules then ALL text items will be reduced to that font size in Feature Text Label only Label Position Choose how the text will be placed on the generated text path Area Label Settings ey Placement Accuracy Low faster C High slower Area Labels ie C Labels curve vat lines of lettuce v Adjust labed ifl Gini area Labels curve with lines of latitude ERAN For projected layers choose this option to A E Reduce font exe to a mnwmum of Eoi Placement Accuracy If you require area labels generate curved text on latitude lines ha to be placed with high precision in the T Reduce horinental scaling to a mnumum of i centre of area objects choose High To Adjust label if larger than line Specify rules PC rae eae quickly generate labels choose Low for the scaling of text if the text will not fit inside the area object in its entirety Click the Up or Down buttons to adjust the order in which the rules will be Set all labels to same minimum size If at least implemented in the labelling process one label has been reduced in font size due to the implementation of rules then ALL text items will be reduced to that font Bn marae cone sn rabies size Feature Text Label only Point Label Settings Point Labels Label Position Label Position Choose the position of E nan the label relative to the point symbol Lower Righ
68. for successful import with MAPublisher 26 Chapter 2 Map Data File Formats Import and Export Supported Data Formats GML Simple Features 2 0 Import and Export The Geographic Markup Language GML was designed as a geographic interface language for the Geo Web It is currently in draft as an ISO standard ISO 19136 The goal of the format is to provide users with a set of abstract base objects that can be built into working real world dataset It uses as XML base to store geometry and feature information that can easily be transported across the Internet The GML Simple Feature Profile was created by the Open Geospatial Consortium OGC as a restricted but useful subset of the GML specification It provides a reduced geometry and metadata profile that can be shared across many GIS tasks This simple feature model can be used as a base to generate local application profiles for a specific work area Since the GML models base abstract classes these application profiles schemas are required for accessing and processing any GML datasets GML data has a gml extension and requires a attributes schema file xsd Some GML files may have their xsd file referenced to a URL path we recommend to copy the xsd files locally to avoid error messages upon import when no internet connection is available Users have two options to store their gml and xsd files they can be both located in a same directory or the xsd files can be kept in the MAPublish
69. for topographic mapping of some countries When Bonne is selected in the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box you will need to enter the following parameters e False Northing and False Easting e Latitude of Standard Parallel e Longitude of the Central Meridian CASSINI The Cassini projection is a cylindrical projection It is neither equal area or conformal The central meridian each meridian 90 degrees from the central meridian and the Equator are straight lines Other meridians and parallels are complex curves Scale is true along the central meridian and along lines perpendicular to the central meridian Scale is nearly constant but not true along lines parallel to the central meridian The Cassini projection has been used for topographic mapping in England and currently in a few other countries When Cassini is selected in the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box you will need to enter the following parameters e False Northing and False Easting e Longitude of the Central Meridian Latitude of True Scale A2 24 Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems MAPublisher Supported Projections CRASTER PARABOLIC The Craster Parabolic projection is a pseudocylindrical equal area projection used for thematic world maps in textbooks It was originally presented by John Evelyn Edmund Craster in 1929 It was further developed by Charles H Deetz and O S Adams in 1934 The central meridian is a straight line half as long as the Equator Other
70. for use in Area and Line Stylesheets Similarly you can navigate to Window gt Symbol Libraries gt Other Library and load MAP_PointSymbols ai Then shift select these symbols and drag them into the Symbols panel for use in Point Stylesheets NOTE An Adobe Illustrator file will save all the symbols graphic styles and character styles created Create a master file with all your symbols graphic styles and character styles for easy reference when adding these elements for MAP Stylesheet creation Creating a New Stylesheet To create new MAP Stylesheets you must first select New MAP Stylesheet under the Options menu or click the New button at the base of the panel This will open the New Stylesheet function where you are required to specify the name and feature type for the new MAP Stylesheet Clicking OK will place the new stylesheet in the panel and assign it with the appropriate icon It is possible to now drag single or multiple MAP Layers with a matching feature type into this stylesheet If your data is held across a number of layers all of these layers can be placed inside the same stylesheet Note that they do not need to contain the same attribute structures As long as they are all of a matching feature type they can be placed inside one MAP Stylesheet Deleting and Duplicating Stylesheets You can create as many MAP Stylesheets as you wish within a document Note that in the MAP Stylesheets panel options menu there are function
71. form automatically A5 10 Appendix 5 Glossary R S Schema In MAPublisher 7 the term schema is used to define the structure and makeup of the map attributes table SDTS Spatial Data Transfer Standard a standardized format used by the USGS for transferring Earth referenced spatial data between dissimilar computer systems that includes support for the inclusion of spatial data attribute georeferencing data quality report data dictionary and other supporting meta data within a single file transfer format SEA Self Extracting Archive a file compression format for reducing the size of large files for archival or transfers Shapefile The shapefile format is a public format that is the native file format for ESRI ArcView product This format can be used to export data with attributes from both Arclnfo and ArcView From Arclnfo the command at the ARC level to create a shape file is arcshape Sliver A gap formed when two lines which should be contiguous are slightly separated in a graphical representation or map Spaghetti data Vector data composed of line segments which are not topologically structured or organized into objects and which may not even be geometrically clean Spaghetti data can be useful however if all that is required is a visual image or plot of a map and no spatial analysis is to be performed Spatial Of space a two or three dimensional position in space Spatial data Any information about the location and
72. format developed by Adobe for use across Macintosh Windows DOS and UNIX platforms Based on the PostScript Level 2 language PDF supports both raster and vector graphics TIF TIFF GEOTIFF Tagged Image File Format TIFF or TIF is a common raster graphic file format that can be imported by Adobe Illustrator Many raster geographic images from GIS systems are stored in this format which can be imported by Adobe Illustrator and registered by the MAPublisher Register Image filter A GeoTIFF is a TIFF file with embedded geographic information identifying its position and scale in world coordinates OTHERS Please refer to the Adobe Illustrator User Guide for other graphics file formats supported by Adobe Illustrator Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Al 1 Graphic File Formats MAPublisher Import Formats This section contains descriptions of the GIS formats supported for import by MAPublisher Here you will find an overview of the structure of each format as well as information on supported format versions and elements unique to each data type Each file format will carry a checklist covering which core elements are supported by MAPublisher during its import You can also refer to the Frequently Asked Questions section in this guide for information on any issues associated with the various file formats Also see chapter 2 on Map Data File Formats AUTOCAD DRAWING DWG AND DRAWING EXCHANGE DXF There are two formats used by AutoCAD
73. geographical unit of information such as a point line area or pixel EPS Encapsulated Post Script file format The EPS format is used to transfer PostScript language artwork between applications also see PostScript Equal areas A map projection is equal area if every part as well as the whole has the same area as the corresponding part on the Earth at the same reduced scale No flat map can be both equal area and conformal Equidistant Equidistant maps show true distances only from the center of the projection or along a special set of lines For example an Azimuthal Equidistant map centered at Washington shows the correct distance between Washington and any other point on the projection It shows the correct distance between Washington and San Diego and between Washington and Seattle But it does not show the correct distance between San Diego and Seattle No flat map can be both equidistant and equal area FAQ Frequently Asked Question Feature A set of points lines or polygons in a spatial database that represent a real world entity The terms feature and object are often used synonymously Feature code A set of characters alpha alohanumeric or numeric within the GIS which uniquely identifies a feature class or group of features File A collection of related information that can be accessed by an assigned name A5 4 Appendix 5 Glossary D F Filter See Plug in filters Folder A storage area for files within
74. in callout bubbles Remove Click this button to clear the tags of the selected objects Add Modify Click this button to open the Web Tag Dialog add or modify the tags of a single selected object Add if no tag exists Modify if a Tab already exists MAP Web Author x Da Specify Source Media Folder m Tag an Aid Multiple Click this button to open Zoom Click this button to zoom to Web the Multiple Web Tag Dialog add or edit Muitiple emplate e tagged object existing tag for all the selected objects feu Scented at once the layer template By default the T em template lists all the attributes from the Q layer of the selected object L soo to Web Click this button to open Web Artwork 1 of 12 selected z P the Export to Web dialog box see a page 143 T Web Selection All Web Art Click this button to select e All Web Art Web Art On Layer all the artworks that have a tag in the document Web Art on Layer Click this button to select all the artworks that have a tag in the currently selected layer Previous Next Web Artwork Click the arrows to navigate from one Web tag object to another Specify Source Media Folder Specify Source Media Folder Absolute Path Select this option to set an absolute path best used when working on a single computer Browse Click this button to browse to the directory containing the me
75. in general for spatial informatics The current implementation for the EgysegesOrszagosVetulet projection does not require any user defined parameters EQUAL AREA CYLINDRICAL The Equal Area Cylindrical projection represents an orthographic projection of a sphere onto a cylinder Like other regular cylindrical projections the graticule of the normal Equal Area Cylindrical projection consists of straight equally spaced vertical meridians perpendicular to straight unequally spaced horizontal parallels To achieve equality of area the parallels are soaced form the Equator in proportion to the sine of the latitude This is the simplest equal area projection When Equal Area Cylindrical is selected in the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box you will need to enter the following parameters e False Northing and False Easting e Longitude of the Central Meridian e Latitude of the Standard Parallel Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems A2 29 MAPublisher Supported Projections EQUIDISTANT CONIC The Equidistant Conic is the simplest kind of conic projection It is the projection most likely to be found in atlases of small countries with its equally spaced straight meridians and equally spaced circular parallels When Equidistant Conic is selected in the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box you will need to enter the following parameters e False Northing and False Easting e Longitude of the Central Meridian e Latitude of the Origin
76. is a straight line 90th meridians are circular arcs and all other meridians are equally spaced elliptical arcs Parallels are unequally spaced straight lines parallel to each other Poles are shown as points This projection is used only in spherical form When Mollweide is selected in the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box you will need to enter the following parameters e Radius of the Sphere e Longitude of the Central Meridian e False Northing and False Easting NOTE Onlyaspherical form of this projection is used The radius of the sphere is used for forward and inverse projection from grid to geodetic coordinates within the system wherein this projection is incorporated You are required to specify a geodetic datum when you use this projection as part of a coordinate system in order to perform geodetic datum shifts into other coordinate systems NEW ZEALAND MAP GRID The New Zealand Map Grid NZMG is a projection that is used to convert latitudes and longitudes to easting and northing coordinates used for most mapping of New Zealand The projection is unique to New Zealand It was designed by Dr W I Reilly 1973 to minimize the scale error over the land area of the country The NewZealandMapGrid projection has the following parameters e Longitude of NZMG Origin False Easting e Latitude of NZMG Origin False Northing OBLIQUE MERCATOR AZIMUTH The Oblique Mercator projection is a cylindrical conformal map projection It is s
77. l this box to use the first line to derive T piers dea ba i column names ee selected dataset uses a double byte Destination character set Target Layer usa_area Target Layer Select the layer containing the MAP Attribute table you are going Matching Column STATE_NAME to join the source table with Destination Matching Column Select a Option column from the destination layer to match to a column in the Source Table Case sensitive If checked values from _ Case sensitive the two matching columns will be matched up case sensitively FUNCTIONALITY Join Table provides the ability to merge external data tables directly into an existing MAP Layer attribute schema in order to create a single extended attribute table Three of the most common table formats are supported DBase dbf e USGS SDTS ddf Delimited Text csv tsv txt Excel xls When exporting tables from spreadsheet applications for use with MAPublisher the preferred format to use is Delimited Text csv PREREQUISITES In order to successfully join a table into an existing attribute schema both MAP Layer and data table must share at least one common attribute column with matching values The column must be of a matching type i e String Real Integer Boolean in both the Source and the Destination table Access the Join Table tool by clicking the Join Table button Ee or options menu item in the MAP Attributes panel USING JOIN T
78. lines GRATICULES The Graticules option permits grid lines to be placed at specific degree positions and intervals Specify a line of latitude and or longitude that graticule lines must pass through Then specify the interval for each subsequent line of latitude and longitude and select a graphic style for the grid lines Use the slider to increase or decrease the number of vertices used in the graticules if required use a higher number if the graticules will be highly curved due to the current projection The graticule may have a section in one of the corners that you do not wish to label perhaps there is no data in this graticule or there is only a small portion of that graticule showing and it does not need to be labelled The don t label feature allows you to not label a specific column or row MEASURED GRIDS The Measured Grid option allows for cells to be plotted at specific sizes and position when there is a projected coordinate system in the current MAP View The extents of the grid can be modified using this option within the geographical extents of the current MAP View The width and height of each cell composing the grid should be specified in the Width and Height text boxes you can modify the map units used for these dimensions if required by making an alternate selection in the Units list A fixed number of cells for columns and rows can be enforced if required Additionally you can specify a preset X and Y origin for the grid or c
79. lt b gt Specalties lt b gt 5pecialties b lt br gt lt b gt Imagel lt j b gt lmage1 lt br gt lt b gt Image2 lt b gt Yolmage2 lt br gt lt b gt Restaurant_Name lt b gt w Restaurant Name sebr gt Default Default Click this button to reset to the default template list of all attributes Clear Click this button to clear the template entries NOTE The template is fully editable It can include attributes regular text with HTML formatting Export to Web The Export to Web button starts the Web Export Dialog described in details page 143 138 Chapter 15 MAP Web Author MAP Web Author Panel Callout Title Type here the title of the callout bubble Insert Image Select Manually to browse to the image manually Select By Attribute to type the attribute name containing the path to the image string type Image Width and Height Specify the image width and height in pixel or use original size HTML Text Editor Tools Use these tools to edit the text see page 141 HTML Supported Tags Click here to open a link to Adobe Web site with Flash documentation on HTML supported tags Web Tag Dialog Web Tag Dialog Callout Preview gt Width 290px S Callout Image Image Path No Image Specified Height 300 px Insert Image Manually By Attribute Ce lz ua 8 nero Width Height _ Auto Size Edit the callout contents Supported HTML tags
80. menu item PREREQUISITES Before using this filter you must create a Legend layer in your Adobe Illustrator layers panel Create a new layer and then drag this to the MAP View holding the features on which you wish to plot a grid remembering to set the feature type to Legend MAPublisher will use the Normal Character Style when generating grid labels If you wish to use a different text size justification font stroke colour and weight it is useful to create a new character style at this stage Window gt Type gt Character Styles A default grid line style will also be used If you wish to use an alternate style for the grid lines add the desired style to the Graphic Styles panel prior to accessing the Grids and Graticules function The MAP View must have a coordinate system assigned in order to plot a grid Graticules and Index Grids can be generated for any coordinate system Measured Grids cannot be generated for a geodetic coordinate system used in a MAP Views To access the function select the legend layer and navigate to Filter gt MAP Legend gt Grids and Graticules or BEBE MAPublisher toolbar button HH Chapter 13 Grids and Indexes 123 Grids and Graticules INDEX GRIDS The Index Grid option allows grids to be created by dividing the extents of the current MAP View into a specified number of cells Specify the number of columns and rows which will comprise the grid and select a graphic style for the grid
81. not supported Some features are available when using Adobe Illustrator CS3 and CS4 only NOTE Not all foreign language versions of Adobe Illustrator may be supported Please contact support avenza com for more information 12 Chapter 1 Getting Started System Requirements MAPublisher Compatibility Notes MAPublisher 8 is compatible with Adobe Illustrator CS2 CS3 and CS4 Please read the following important compatibility information for use when opening legacy MAPublisher and Adobe Illustrator documents BACKWARD COMPATIBILITY MAPublisher 8 documents are not backwards compatible with previous versions of MAPublisher MAPUBLISHER 5 OR EARLIER DOCUMENTS Point Data MAPublisher introduced new standards on dealing with point data in MAPublisher 6 Pre MAPublisher 6 documents will have font based points converted to symbols on opening of the document MAPUBLISHER 6 OR EARLIER DOCUMENTS Grids and Graticules Grids and Graticules were redesigned in MAPublisher 7 Please note that grids created in previous versions of MAPublisher 6 x and earlier will need to be recreated with the new tool if the generation of an index is required Legend to Stylesheet Conversion Legend functionality Assign Legend Info Draw Legend etc was ported into MAP Stylesheets in MAPublisher 7 Legend information held in legacy MAPublisher documents 6 x and earlier will be converted into stylesheets on document open Subsequently Graphic Styles fo
82. of the coordinate system if this information is not held in the data source Same as Check this option in order to assign a coordinate system that matches that of an existing MAP View Info Click this button to view the parameters of a selected coordinate system IMPORT SETTINGS Add Format ESRI Shape Encoding System ource Coordinate System Robinson Same as M Settings Dataset Jtorial Guide amp Data Tutorial Data worldeast shp f Gn Ga See page 33 for the various Import Settings dialog boxes and options OK Cancel Settings Opens Settings dialog box for file formats that requires the input of extra parameters such as for the import of DGN DXF DWG E00 GML KML MIF MID Tab and Delimited Text Data see chapter 2 Browse Opens a Data Source browser to enable the selection of files for import Character Encoding Assign a codec if the attribute information held in the selected dataset uses a double byte character set Clear Click this button to clear the existing parameters of the source coordinate system Specify Click this button to open the Specify Source Coordinate System tool see Appendix 2 enabling you to search for coordinate systems by specifying a text string Results are displayed in the Search category Chapter 3 Importing Map Data 37 Advanced Import ADVANCED IMPORT FUNCTIONALITY Advanced Import provides an alternati
83. of concentric circles spaced closer to each other near the north and south edges of the map The meridians are equally spaced and intersect the parallels at right angles The Albers Equal Area Conic projection is used for equal area maps of regions with predominant east west expanse such as the United States It is used exclusively by the USGS for sectional maps of all 50 states When Albers Equal Area is selected in the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box you will need to enter the following parameters e False Northing and False Easting e Latitude of Southern Standard Parallel e Longitude of the Central Meridian e Latitude of Northern Standard Parallel e Latitude of the Origin of the Projection AZIMUTHAL EQUAL AREA The Azimuthal Equal Area projection is an equal area projection with the azimuthal property showing true directions from the center of the projection Its scale at a given distance from the center varies less from the scale at the center than the scale of any of the other azimuthal projections When Azimuthal Equal Area is selected in the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box you will need to enter the following parameters e False Northing and False Easting e Longitude of the Center of the Projection e Latitude of the Center of the Projection AZIMUTHAL EQUAL AREA POLAR ASPECT The Azimuthal Equal Area Polar Aspect projection is an equal area projection with the azimuthal property showing true directions from the cent
84. of MAP Views in the document Combined with the new ability to zoom and pan the preview users should find it much easier to precisely position their MAP view on the canvas Enhanced MAP Attributes Interface The attribute viewer has had several enhancements added for MAPublisher 8 Several buttons have been added to provide faster access to some existing functionality the column button makes setting attribute visibility much more accessible and the Zoom to Feature button zeroes in on the current row s artwork in one click The look and feel of the panels has also been improved with new icons for existing buttons as well as new attribute type icons in the column headers Additionally the list of layers now only displays MAP layers that have selected MAP features selected Improved Simplify Line Functionality With MAPublisher 8 Simplify Lines now preserves topology when simplifying no more gaps between simplified polygons In addition a new preview option lets you see the results without leaving the dialog box it even displays simplification statistics like points removed Import Optimization The import process has been optimized improving the loading speed by up to 80 MAPublisher Panels The MAP View and MAP Stylesheets panels have been revamped for speed and stability The panels should also provide better feedback about the states of layers and MAP Views or Stylesheets One immediate effect is that large files or files with lar
85. on L Line layers To access Join Lines go to Filter gt MAP Lines gt Join Lines or use the MAPublisher toolbar button Fa USING JOIN LINES In the Join on attribute drop down list select the attribute column containing the attributes you wish to join For example to join lines based on street name you should select the column containing the street names This will result in line segments containing the same street name being joined In the Destination Layer text box you should specify a name for the new L Line layer that MAPublisher will create to hold your joined lines A Proximity value should be entered and Proximity Units assigned Units can be specified in map units or page units Entering a proximity value of zero will only join line segments that are touching If the distance between the end of a segment and the start of another is greater than the proximity value you enter these lines will not be joined If two line segments in the selection are separated by a distance less than the set proximity value check the Close Segment Gaps option to create a line segment that connects the two lines When not selected a compound path will be created When you have entered your preferences for the join click OK On the newly created Line layer view the layer s attributes in the MAP Attributes panel Note that the only attribute columns present are the default Property columns and the attribute column you specified for your join
86. or along a great circle at an oblique angle The Oblique Mercator projection is used for geographic regions that are centered along lines that are neither meridians nor parallels but that may be taken as great circle routes passing through the region such as the Alaskan panhandle In this variation of the Oblique Mercator projection two points define the central line where the cylinder touches the ellipsoid The planar points determined by this projection may be left unrectified often these are referred to as the u v coordinates in published formula or they may be rectified often these are referred to as the x y coordinates in published formula Rectification consists of rotating the coordinates by a certain angle This implementation of the Oblique Mercator projection allows for a flag to be set to determine if the points should be rectified or not By default the points will be rectified If an unrectified version of the projection is desired the Unrectified Flag parameter should be set to 1 In the case where the points are rectified the angle of rotation may be one of three values Most commonly it may be a user specified rotation or a rotation such that the y axis will be parallel to the meridian through the center of the projection the angle used in this case is often referred to in published formula as alpha Less commonly it A2 40 Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems MAPublisher Supported Projections may be a rotation
87. panel check that you have a designated MAP View with a matching coordinate system If you do not create a new MAP View see page 59 3 Select the layer in the MAP Views panel 4 Drag the layer to the MAP View containing the matching coordinate system to georeference the layer There are also a couple of additional considerations to be aware of when exporting Since the current exported vector formats are GIS formats that do not support the concept of Bezier curves you need to compensate for this If you have Bezier curves in your Adobe Illustrator file they will not be recognized in the GIS software In order for these features may be represented correctly you will need to add points to these lines in Adobe Illustrator first Simply identify and select any objects that use Bezier curves and then select Object gt Path gt Add Anchor Points Repeat this command until the line has a sufficient number of anchor points that the shape of your curves will not be lost on export Adobe Illustrator stores the origin of text that has been applied along paths differently from other text objects We have found the following steps to be the most successful way to get such Text exported to GIS files 1 Create a new Adobe Illustrator layer 2 Select any text that has been created along paths 3 Drag this text to the new Adobe Illustrator layer 4 Select Type gt Create Outlines The text will be converted to vector objects 5 Inthe MAP Views panel
88. penalty All post expiration renewals will be backdated to the actual expiry date Lapsed Subscriptions Failure to renew your MMP within 30 days from the expiry date will result in a lapsed MMP subscription Lapsed subscriptions may not be renewed and the licensee will be required to purchase support and upgrades accordingly Please direct all MMP questions and purchase inquiries to info avenza com WISHLIST As either a new or experienced MAPublisher user we value your opinions on how we can improve our product Please let us know what functions you would like to see incorporated into future upgrades of MAPublisher e email us at support avenza com Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Al 31 Technical Support Options General Tips and Hints CREATING ASCII DELIMITED POINT FILES There may be times when you wish to add a point or a series of points to your map but you do not have a GIS or ASCII file containing these points ready for import Provided you have the real world coordinates for the locations you wish to plot you can manually create a delimited ASCII file using a text editor ex Notepad BBEdit SimpleText Ultra Edit etc or a spreadsheet program ex Excel Lotus 123 etc This file can then be imported using either Simple or Advanced Import using the ASCII Point Data import format One column in the file must contain the X coordinates of the points and another must contain the Y coordinates You can add as many additi
89. plot using another coordinate system geodetic or projected Another new feature is the ability to plot centroids A point may now be plotted at the centroid of every area on a selected MAP area layer MAPublisher License Management The new MAPublisher License Management system helps users manage their licensing in a more streamlined and user friendly manner Users can now evaluate the product register retrieve their licenses and checkout a floating license all in a single dialog box Additionally MAPublisher panels are now marked with a lock icon when the software is not licensed Adobe Illustrator CS3 and CS4 only KML Export for Google Maps Google Maps does not support the KML Schema tag or any derived tag i e KML files with attributes values As such MAPublisher 8 KML export settings now includes an option to export to KML without the attributes information so that the resultant KML file is compatible with Google Maps viil What s New in MAPublisher 8 S 57 Import IHO S 57 vector format can now be imported with MAPublisher 8 Use the supplied S 57 template to automatically style the map on import Geographic Markup Language Simple Features Import and Export OGC GML Simple Features points lines and polygons version 2 0 and higher can now be imported and exported to version 3 1 1 with MAPublisher 8 Enhanced MAP Views Editor The MAP View Editor now has the ability to display both thumbnails and coloured extents
90. same criteria are met Chapter 9 MAP Stylesheets 99 MAP Stylesheet Editor Point Data Regarding the editing of Point Data you must use either MAP Stylesheets or the MAP Attributes panel to change symbology As point data is linked dynamically to the symbols which exist in the Symbols panel you cannot edit graphical properties manually Choosing Break Link to Symbol from the Symbols panel options will result in the loss of attributes for your point data NOTE MAP Stylesheet can be quickly created when using equality operators If the first rule created is Capital Y by clicking Add the next rule will be created using the next unique attribute value Capital N Creating rules like this will use the next graphic style in the Style column Symbols graphic styles and characters styles will be displayed alphabetically in the Style column Unique attribute values will be displayed alphabetically and numerically when creating expression rules Therefore when creating a map that requires a style for each unique attribute value create the first rule and click Add to auto populate the next rule 100 Chapter 9 MAP Stylesheets MAP Stylesheet Editor Labelling Functions Th aS One of the most useful features of MAPublisher is the ability to create labels for map objects using values from the MAP Attributes panel Manually entering and placing labels is not necessary provided that the labelling information is included in th
91. shape of and relationships among geographic features This includes remotely sensed data as well as map data Sphere coordinates X Y locations on the ellipsoidal Earth usually expressed in degrees and minutes Spheroid An ellipsoid of rotation that is flattened at the poles like the Earth Spline A function in MAPublisher that improves the smoothness of curved lines drops redundant points from paths and changes the anchor points on paths to direction points for further manual modifications SPOT An Earth resource satellite with high resolution sensors launched by France in January 1986 Static graphic files Unchanging and uneditable graphic files T Thematic Map A map displaying selected kinds of information relating to specific themes such as soil land use etc Theme A user defined perspective on a geographic dataset specified if applicable by a name and feature class or dataset name attributes of interest or data classification scheme Appendix 5 Glossary A5 11 S T Thiessen Polygon A polygon bounding the region closer to a point than to any adjacent point The polygons are drawn so that the lines are of equal distance between two adjacent points Thiessen polygons also known as Voronoi diagrams and Dirichlet tessellations are sometimes used as a crude form of interpolation particularly within the geosciences Thinning Reducing the number of points defining a line while preserving the essential shape of the
92. shows the globe enclosed in an apple shape This projection is used rarely for world maps The central meridian and Equator are straight lines with scale true along the equator only The Van der Grinten IV projection has the following parameters e False Northing e False Easting e Longitude of the Center of the Projection e Radius of the Sphere VERTICAL PERSPECTIVE The Vertical Perspective projection represents a view of the Earth from space in which the view is from a point precisely facing the center of the Earth This projection is therefore used to generate pictoral views of the Earth resembling those seen from space It is an azimuthal projection that is neither conformal nor equal area The central meridian and a particular parallel if shown are straight lines Other meridians and parallels are usually arcs of circles or ellipses but some may be parabolas or hyperbolas If the point of perspective is above the sphere less than one hemisphere may be shown The VerticalPerspective projection has the following parameters e Longitude of the Center of the Projection e False Northing e Latitude of the Center of the Projection e Height e False Easting NOTE Only a spherical form of this projection is used The semi major axis of the ellipsoid sphere is used for forward and inverse projection from grid to geodetic coordinates within the system wherein this projection is incorporated WINKEL I The Winkel projection is a pseudocyl
93. size of the published document Parameters Variable options or choices boundaries of operations or of an object Path A line vector defined by a series of points a string of X Y coordinates PDF Portable Document Format Developed by Adobe a PDF is a file type which can be used to cross Macintosh Windows DOS and UNIX platforms Pixel The smallest unit of information in a grid cell map or raster image Pixel scale The real world distance as represented by a single pixel in a georeferenced image Plug in filter A module supplied separately from the Adobe Illustrator program usually for creating special effects in artwork The MAPublisher application plug in filter is a module that enables the incorporation of GIS and mapping capabilities within the Adobe Illustrator graphics environment PMS Pantone Matching System Point A discrete location represented by a symbol or label usually too small to be displayed as an area or line Polygon Any area bounded by a straight or irregular closed line representing a map component or any other graphic feature Polyline A line made up of a sequence of line segments Positional accuracy The degree to which a position is measured or depicted relative to its correct position as established by either other features or by other accurate processes Postscript A page description language built into many desktop printers and virtually all high end printing systems See the Adobe I
94. specified by the threshold set in the Point Plot Settings Change in heading points are plotted in addition to the points plotted while completing one of the standard plot options Plot by Time Plot By Distance or Route To use this setting a user must first enable it by selecting the Enable this Auxillary GPS Plot Type from the bottom of the MAP GPS Point Plot Settings panel The optional settings for Scale Every and Plot Symbol must then also be specified When plotting begins a new layer will automatically be created specifically for the change in heading points This layer will be automatically named based on the name of the current layer upon which the main plotting operation is being conducted with the phrase change_in_heading_ prefixed to it For example if the main plotting is in progress ona layer called ABCD the layer created for the change in heading plots will be named change_in_heading_ ABCD 154 Chapter 16 MAP GPS MAP GPS Point Plot Settings MAP GPS Autosave Settings Accessed from the MAP GPS menu MAP GPS Autosave Settings bre Automatic Save Enable the check box Automatically Save Document every 5 minutes and set the setting to the desired time for Automatic saving to occur Cancel FUNCTIONALITY The MAP GPS Autosave Settings provide the option to have a document automatically saved each time a specified time interval has elapsed This feature allows for users to limit data loss in the instance
95. that hardware or power problems occur while collecting data PREREQUISITES The current document must have already been saved at least once to a local location on the computer If the Autosave setting is activated and the current document has not been saved then a warning will appear upon leaving the Autosave dialog box stating that this feature will not function until the document is saved and will offer the option to manually save the document at that time USING THE AUTOSAVE SETTINGS The Autosave settings may be activated by selecting the associated check box and specifying the number of minutes between autosave instances Once this has been activated and the current document has been saved automatic saves will occur each time the specified interval is reached Chapter 16 MAP GPS 155 MAP GPS Autosave Settings Edit User Attribute for Current Layer Accessed from the MAP GPS menu Current Layer Displays the currently selected layer in the Adobe Illustrator Layers panel Edit Current GPS User Attribute Curent Layer GPS Layer Create New Opens a dialog box which allows the user to create a new String attribute column on the layer Current Attribute Displays a list of string attribute columns for the Cimerk N E RP current layer Clear Value Will clear the current value Current Value Allows for input of a P entered in the Current Value text field value to be added as an attribute to the current c
96. the Lambert Conformal Conic 2 parallel projection The Belgium72 projection has the following parameters e Longitude of the Central Meridian e Latitude of Northern Standard Parallel e Latitude of the Origin of the Projection e False Easting e Latitude of Southern Standard Parallel e False Northing BIPOLAR OBLIQUE CONIC CONFORMAL This conformal projection was constructed specifically for mapping North and South America It is composed of two oblique adaptations of the Lambert Conformal Conic projection The juncture of the two conic projections consists of a great circle arc cutting through Central America from southwest to northeast There is a slight mathematical discontinuity along this arc which is resolved by an adjustment that leaves a small intermediate area slightly non conformal The Earth is treated as a sphere by this projection due to the relatively small scale of the map The Bipolar Oblique Conformal Conic projection has no parameters as the poles and parallels used by the conic projections are set to specific values BONNE The Bonne projection is psuedoconical and equal area The central meridian is a straight line Other meridians are complex curves Parallels are concentric circular arcs but the poles are points Scale is true along the central meridian and along all parallels There is no distortion along the central meridian and along the standard parallel The Bonne projection is used for atlas maps of continents and
97. the Macintosh OS the equivalent of a DOS or UNIX directory Format The way in which data is arranged for storage and for transmission between software and computers FTP File Transfer Protocol Geographic features Points lines and areas that are components of a map Geographic Imager A suite of geospatial imaging tools for Adobe Photoshop Geographic Information System GIS Any system designed for the capturing storing checking integrating analyzing and displaying of spatially referenced data about the Earth Georeference To establish the relationship between page coordinates on a planar map and known real world coordinates GeoTIFF An industry wide standard for specifying information in TIFF tags which was developed by several organizations within the GIS community GeoTIFF files are raster images that contain georeferencing information as well as image information in a single file GIR Geographic Information Retrieval GIS Geographic Information Systems GPS Global Positioning Systems Grain The frequency of vertices or points forming a line Graticule The spherical coordinate system based on lines of latitude and longitude Great Circle A circle formed on the surface of a sphere by a plane that passes through the centre of the sphere The Equator each meridian and each other full circumference of the Earth forms a great circle The arc of a great circle shows the shortest distance between points on the
98. the file will be inserted into the Constrain Proportions Check this option appropriate fields to keep the pixel proportions Constrain Proportions Effective Map Size X Yt Specify the X and Y size of the image in map units updates the Pixel Size Effective Map Size x 10 908142 deg a L_ Y 12 223761 Units Select a unit to use for the specification of georeferencing t Editing these options is not required when using the Load File function information The default selection is the current map unit FUNCTIONALITY The Register Image filter is used to accurately register raster imagery to your vector data MAPublisher determines the parameters of the raster image and the coordinate system of a selected MAP Layer in the registration process PREREQUISITES For Register Image to be functional the raster image must be in the same coordinate system as the MAP Layer you wish to register it to Check the coordinate system of your imagery with your data provider before attempting to use this filter It is possible to transform the coordinate system in MAPublisher first see the MAP View Editor in chapter 4 if you require your vector data to match your imagery Alternatively you can use Avenza s Geographic Imager for Adobe Photoshop to transform the imagery to match the coordinate system of the MAP View When you are certain that both your MAP Layer and your raster image are in matching coordinate
99. the plot options Build Route Auto Plot by Time or Auto Plot by Distance e Build Route A route will be created from the information in the log file using the selected Graphic style in the Adobe Illustrator panel e Auto Plot by Time Settings from the Point Plot settings panel will be used to interpret the log file and plot points at specified times e Auto Plot by Distance Settings from the Point Plot settings panel will be used to interpret the log file and plot points at specified distances 158 Chapter 16 MAP GPS Playback Sentence Log Appendices Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Graphic File Formats xiscdiustccaviaeddebndendaenks scan eeaweieanabwade A1 1 MAPublisher Import Formats ccc cece cece eee e eee eee ee eee eees A1 2 MAP UDIisher Unicode Support iivatwaccsnmseeudss vevdaeaiaderedwanieanas A1 12 Frequently Asked Questions ccc cece cece eee e nee eeeeeeeeeanes A1 15 GIS Backgrounder sisrrissksrnreriran ts ki nE enn EEEE basen eeneeateaes A1 21 Graphics Backgrounder oecrers seriis ieiredrr id E rone ites EENET RENN A1 23 Memory Considerations resssrrikesistirrisis itant k eri i nad eencs A1 25 SAAN P ETE TE E E E SE ETI E A E A1 27 Technical Support Options ssssssesessesessessesesseeresersesee A1 30 General Tips and Hints sa2 0 n24 406 52 naa tawKcenwe wn sanantactewaeretacans A1 32 Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems OVCIVIEW nioecete she acc eet cose E EEEE EER EE A
100. these two types of data and maintains the spatial relationships between the map features Features are portrayed on two dimensional maps as points lines and areas For example a map may contain points representing location information such as telephone poles lines representing linear features such as roads and areas representing geographic features such as lakes Points Usually represented by a symbol or label a point is a discrete location which is usually too small to be identified as an area or line e g an oil wellhead or manhole Spatial Relationships A map allows you to identify spatial relationships e g a fire tower located inside a park but it relies on you to derive this information from it Topology Topology is a mathematical process for determining spatial relationships It does this by expressing different spatial relationships as lists of features i e an area is defined by the boundary lines The primary advantage of this type of data storage is that it is more efficient and permits faster processing of larger data sets Al 22 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide GIS Backgrounder Graphics Backgrounder WHY IS THE GRAPHICS ENVIRONMENT GOOD FOR MAPPING Avenza supports the fact that performing map related graphics tasks is best done in the right environment a powerful graphics program like Adobe Illustrator This environment offers practicality freedom and easy maneuverability for fast cost efficie
101. this MAP View Select custom coordinate system an existing MAP View The Choose this option and then click the coordinate system of the selected MAP View will be Specify custom coordinate system selec Select button to specify the coordinate displayed below Coordinate system system of the named MAP View via the Select Coordinate System dialog box Same as Lower 48 see Appendix 2 Once selected the Coordinate system Robinson in METER coordinate system will be displayed below it Specify Anchors Layer Name Search and Replace Should only be accessed if you are creating anew MAP View or you are correcting inaccurate georeferencing information Layer Name Search amp Replace Caution editing anchors can damage the accuracy of your data Replace Text Replace Al Specify Anchors Find what ns K Replace with Boundary Map Anchors Map si Lok The location of X 180 the Map ate Y 90 Replace with Type in the Find what Type in the e Units variable you wish to change variable contained in the oft the aa Page Anchors Points Page Anchors the layer names to current layer names on coordinate C S The location of the which you wish to search system unit m Page Anchors in the Vs 10 units of the current document see File gt Document Setup The MAP Views panel displays a list of all the Adobe Illustrator layers in the current document and each defined con
102. three values Most commonly it may be a user specified rotation or a rotation such that the y axis will be parallel to the meridian through the center of the projection the angle used in this case is often referred to in published formula as alpha Less commonly it may be a rotation such that the y axis will be parallel to the meridian through the natural origin of the projection the angle used in this case is often referred to in published formula as gamma Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems A2 39 MAPublisher Supported Projections If the Rotation Angle parameter is a non zero number it will be used in the rectification If the Rotation Angle is zero the default behavior will be to rectify so that the y axis will be parallel to the meridian through the center of the projection If it is desired that the rectification cause the y axis to be parallel to the meridian through the natural origin of the projection the Use Gamma Flag parameter should be set to 1 By default the planer coordinates will be provided in terms of the natural origin of the projection Alternately they may be shifted based on the center of the projection If it is desired that the coordinates be shifted the Center Flag parameter should be set to 1 Note that this is only an option in the Oblique Mercator Azimuth projection and is not currently supported in the Two Point case By default the Azimuth parameter provided is assumed to be the angle at the center o
103. values are displayed in the Simple expression builder see page 76 Note the default maximum number of values which can be listed is set to 250 To increase the number of values listed in the MAP Stylesheet Editor value drop down lists please complete the following e Quit Adobe Illustrator e Open your Adobe Illustrator preferences file in a text editor The default location and name of the preferences file is Illustrator CS2 and CS3 Windows XP Documents and Settings user name Application Data Adobe Adobe Illustrator CSXX Settings AlPrefs Windows Vista Users user name AppData Roaming Adobe Adobe Illustrator CSXX Settings AlPrefs Mac OS X Users user name Library Preferences Adobe Illustrator CSXX Settings Adobe Illustrator Prefs Illustrator CS4 Windows XP Documents and Settings user name Application Data Adobe Adobe Illustrator CS4 Settings en_US AIPrefs Windows Vista Users user name AppData Roaming Adobe Adobe Illustrator CS4 Settings en_US AIPrefs Mac OS X Users user name Library Preferences Adobe Illustrator CS4 Settings en_US Adobe Illustrator Prefs Search for the text MaxValuesPref e Edit the listed value from 250 to the required value e Save the Adobe Illustrator preferences file e Re open Adobe Illustrator A3 2 Appendix 3 MAPublisher 8 How To s For Legacy Users Grid and Scalebar Operations EDITING CUSTOM ART Manually editing type position font colour etc is not possible on Grids and Scale Ba
104. x Zoombuttons zoom in out or fit to J the extents of the map view A Lal cance White rectangle Page extents Previ Salact th F Green rectangle Data extents of ee ee the currant MAP View Q options None Coloured Boxes Thumbnails Thumbnails and Boxes Crosshair Location of the current Map and Page Anchors Scale The scale of the MAP View Edit the scale manually or by using the Up and Down arrows to increase or decrease scale by 10 Click the Auto Scale button to rescale the data to fit the page extents Show Anchors Click this box to view or hide the Map Anchors and Page Anchors in the Preview Pane C Show Anchors Previews Coloured Boxes Name The editable name of the Name Lower 48 current MAP View Data Extents LL Corner Editable para ee eee Scale Ange Andie Tne fotatlonortne SAP location of the lower left corner of X 33 763672 pt z 5 z 1 20000000 000000 EK e et Se A ert a f 0 d E y using the clock hand in the the data in ment units a Es f documentunits o 10 079215 oo mmm Auto Scale i rotation control graphic Alignment Control Click the respective anchor point to set the Page Anchors to a graphically AvzOrtho1 designated location Source Coordinate System Clear Click this button to clear the existing parameters of the source _ Perform Coordinate System Transformation coordinate system Destination No Coordinate System Specifi
105. you wish to import If this drop down list is left as lt Auto detect format gt when you search for your GIS file all files will be displayed It is often easier therefore to set the Format drop down list at the required format to ease navigation When you have chosen the format click the Browse button to select your file s and then click Open only one file format can be opened from this Open dialog box Alternatively you can enter the path of the file s in the Dataset text box NOTE The import of multiple of delimited text files is not supported Character Encoding In MAPublisher 8 double byte characters are supported in attributes on import allowing such attributes to be used for labelling and export To assign a codec suitable for your selected dataset choose a value in the list box Source Coordinate System If you are aware that your selected files do not contain Coordinate System information you can either specify it within the Advanced Import Data Source dialog box or you can assign a coordinate system based on an existing MAP View in your document by using the Same As feature For an overview of Projections and Datums see appendix A2 38 Chapter 3 Importing Map Data Advanced Import Generally most users should ignore the Coordinate System section when choosing the Import files as the program will read the coordinate system automatically if the file format supports such information If you wish to view the parameters of
106. 1 Making Selections 109 MAP Selection Filters Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP Selection Filters or MAP Toolbar F MAP Selection Filters panel Not Valid Filter Icon If the expression is not valid for that particular data layer a red exclamation MAP Selection Filters x mark will be displayed New Selection Filter s 7 i Edit Selection Fiter e l Edit Selection Filter Opens the Edit Delete Selection Filter Selection Filter function below for editing the assigned expression 5 Capital Cities CAPITAL Y Population less than 1 million POP1991 lt 1000000 pe Population less than 10 per SQMI POP91_5QMI Apply as New Selection Population more than 1 million POP1991 gt 1000000 Add to Current Selection Population more than 10 per SQMI POP91_SOM Remove from Current Selection Filters List Lists the Selection criteria in the current document Valid Filter Icon When a selection filter contains an expression that is valid for the active Adobe o oe a 4 Illustrator data layer a green check mark icon will be displayed Delete Selection Filter Deletes the highlighted filter s Apply as New Selection Makes a new selection using the highlighted criteria Get Subset of Current Selection Create New Selection Filter Opens the New Selection Filter Add to Current Selection Adds the highlighted function below for the composition of an expression
107. 180th meridians of the Eckert IV projection are semicircle and all other meridians are equally spaced elliptical Arcs The parallels are unequally spaced straight lines parallel to one another and the Poles are straight lines half as long as the equator Scale is true along latitude 40 30 for the Eckert IV The EckertlV projection has the following parameters e Longitude of the Central Meridian e Latitude of Origin e Radius of the Sphere e False Northing e False Easting NOTE Ifthe spherical_radius parameter is set to a value greater than zero then it will be used as the radius of the sphere If this parameter is set to a value less than or equal to zero then the semi major radius of the ellipsoid will be used as the radius of the sphere ECKERT V The Eckert V projection is a pseudocylindrical projection that is neither conformal nor equal area This projection was presented by Max Eckert in 1906 Meridians in this projection are equally spaced sinusoids concave toward the central meridian The central meridian is a straight line half as long as the Equator Parallels are represented by equally spaced straight parallel lines that are perpendicular to the central meridian Poles are represented by lines half as long as the Equator This projection is symmetrical about the central meridian or the Equator Scale is true along latitudes 37 55 N and S and constant along any given latitude The EckertV projection has the following para
108. 1994 rads 9101 Warning Icon Indicates Add Remove Add and SS ae a incomplete parameters remove folders and fit tt 4 B Edits Add remove edit A L A au e l 1 T categories Seach information or copy objects Search Search parameters Folder Angular Units Each category can be Find in Name ixi searched by it s unique parameters e g Name EPSG Code Search Folder Projected Find in Name a Geodetic Horizontal Datum Point Style Units Projection Type Projection Name Envelope EPSG Code All At the top of the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box two paths will be listed the path to the main Geodetic Datasource file which is protected from user modification and the Custom parameter file where all of the user defined defini tions are stored On the left hand side of the dialog box objects are organized into Categories tree To explore the sub categories of a category click the plus sign Windows or arrow Macintosh to the left to see categories listed underneath To see the entries at any particular level of category click the category itself With a category selected the pane to the right will list the individual objects within the category New categories can be created by clicking the New Category button A new category will be created titled New Category Within each category you can create subcategories Only user defined categories can be deleted using the Delete Category bu
109. 2 1 Coordinate Systems Considerations cc cece eee ee ene eeeceans A2 4 The Geodetic Datasource iicqrse each esanwadeinnkaae eas eooueandneuaens A2 6 Common Coordinate Systems 26 2 saxeecccswantceeseseeeesdducesavetess A2 19 MAPublisher Supported Projections cece cece cece eee eeanes A2 21 Day SUINES ccasasesssy nnn cadens bossa clas een cosisenaarectnenensss ass A2 51 UITM MaD 7 ONES ccantxanbaneasuev wor gates noe seeeuner ER A2 57 Appendix 3 MAPublisher 8 How To s For Legacy Users Legend Functionality in MAP Stylesheets cece cence ee eeee A3 1 Grid and Scalebar Opera tOnSssise 8 dy cana dacveanesseaurseereeeevueuns A3 3 COBY and PaslO se nck nae ese cue neacpesteeideteneees cee sdeuetweerese A3 3 Legacy Text CONVEISION ncnesenesereceotnecces meus E EE EEE A3 4 Appendix 4 Helpful Styles and Symbols Files Appendix 5 Glossary Appendices 159 Contents Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Graphic File Formats Al The Adobe Illustrator native postscript file format Refer to the Adobe Illustrator User Guide for more information DOQ Digital Orthophoto Quadrangle DOQ are geographic images from the United States Geological Survey USGS and are stored in the JPG format They can be placed by Adobe Illustrator and registered by the MAPublisher Register Image filter DOQ are usually very large files 30 40 MB or more and will require extremely large amounts of RAM DRG Digital Raste
110. 65535 translates to the base 2 number 1111111111111111 Binary numbers are the fundamental basis of computing Bitmap A grid of small squares cells or pixels stored in memory and used to generate an image Boolean There are two types of values true and false True false or yes no usually represent these C CAD D Computer Aided Design and Drafting Cadastre A public register or survey that defines or re establishes boundaries of public and or private land for purposes of ownership and taxation Cartogram An abstracted or simplified map for displaying quantitative data for which the base is normally not true to scale Cartography The organization and communication of geographically related information in either graphic or digital form It can include all stages from data acquisition to presentation and use CAST Centre for Advanced Spatial Technologies at the University of Arkansas Cell The basic element of spatial information in a raster image Character encoding A character encoding consists of a codec that pairs a sequence of characters from a given set with something else such as a sequence of natural numbers octets or electrical pulses in order to facilitate the storage of text Choropleth map A systematic representation in which colour or shading is applied to areas bounded by statistical or administrative limits Clipping A graphic process of cutting lines and symbols off the edge of a display area A5 2
111. ABLE Source Table Click the Browse button to select the data table for import When the file has been selected select a common column by selecting an appropriate entry in the Matching Column drop down list In MAPublisher double byte characters are supported in attributes on import allowing such attributes to be used for labelling and export To assign a codec suitable for your selected dataset choose an appropriate entry from the Character Encoding drop down list 72 Chapter 5 MAP Attributes Join Table If the table contains column names as headers check the First line contains column names option If it does not contain headers do not check this option and each column will be assigned a default heading name Column1 Column2 etc Destination Table Choose the attribute table that you wish to join the data table to This can be achieved by choosing a MAP Layer from the Target Layer list When the destination layer has been selected select a common column by selecting an appropriate entry in the Matching Column drop down list This column must match the format and values as the column selected in the Source Table section Additional Option If the Case sensitive option is checked the column entries from the two matching columns will only be matched by case For example if you have a mixture of upper or lower case entries in the data table that is mirrored in the destination attribute table you should check this box If one of th
112. AME column are selected e g New Brunswick and Province of Newfoundland STARTSWITH NAME o Results all items that starts with the letter o Ontario are selected EDIT SCHEMA LOWER NAME applied to column name Result All items in column name are assigned the value of the column NAME in lower case e g ontario for Ontario new brunswick for New Brunswick PROPER name applied to column Proper_name Result All items in Proper_name are assigned the value of the column name in proper case or capital case e g Ontario for ontario New Brunswick for new brunswick ROUND POPULATION AREA 3 applied to column density Result All items are calculated as population divided by area rounded to three decimals Chapter 5 MAP Attributes fal Edit Expression J oin Table MAP Attributes panel gt Join Table Join Table Source Table Lists the selected external data table and its path Click the Browse button to select the data table you wish to import lavid Desktop Data uscities cs Browse Cancel Source Matching Column Select a column Matching Column STATE_NAME iv from the source table to match to a column in the destination layer First line contains column names First line contains column names Character Encoding Assign a codec if For Delimited Text type tables check Character encoding System
113. AP Stylesheet a eZ New Stylesheet Delete MAP Stylesheet Deletes the selected MAP Stylesheet New MAP Stylesheet Name e Name MAP Stylesheet 1 C or Cee Specify a name for the new MAP Feature Type Cancel Stylesheet Feature Type Specify a feature type for the stylesheet This can be Area Line Point or Text FUNCTIONALITY MAP Stylesheets allow you to quickly create and apply legends or expression rules based on MAP Attributes using symbols graphic styles and character styles that exist in the respective Adobe Illustrator panels Stylesheets are created using specific values contained in the MAP Attributes panel for the related MAP Layer assigned to the MAP Stylesheet and then stylized using Adobe Illustrator symbology graphic styles or character style MAP Stylesheets can be applied to data on both a one to one basis where specific attribute values are assigned with a specific style or symbol i e Style 1 Value A or with attribute value ranges i e Style 2 Greater than Value B and Less than Value C Stylesheet information will be saved in the Adobe Illustrator file so that the MAP Stylesheet can be quickly edited later USING THE MAP STYLESHEETS PANEL This panel is the starting point for working with MAP Stylesheets and is opened by going to Window gt MAPublisher Panels gt MAP Stylesheets or through the MAPublisher toolbar button 5 The MAP Stylesheets panel contains a list of all MAP Layers Si
114. Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems MAPublisher Supported Projections NOTE Only a spherical form of this projection is used The semi major axis of the ellipsoid sphere is used for forward and inverse projection from grid to geodetic coordinates within the system wherein this projection is incorporated TIMES The Times projection is a pseudo cylindrical projection that is neither equal area nor conformal It was first presented by John Moir in 1965 It is used to generate the world maps in The Times Atlas of the World produced by Collins Bartholomew The central meridian and Equator are depicted as straight lines All other meridians are equally spaced curves concave toward the central meridian The parallels are straight lines perpendicular to the central meridian increasing in separation away from the Equator Scale is correct along the two parallels at 45 N and S The Times projection has the following parameters e Longitude of Origin e False Easting e False Northing NOTE Only a spherical form of this projection is used The semi major axis of the ellipsoid sphere is used for forward and inverse projection from grid to geodetic coordinates within the system wherein this projection is incorporated TRANSVERSE MERCATOR GAUSS KRUGER The Transverse Mercator projection is similar to the Mercator Projection except that the axis of the projection cylinder is rotated 90 degrees from the polar axis This projection does not ha
115. Appendix 5 Glossary B C Colour Ramp A graduated range of colours between two extreme colour selections Conformal A map projection is conformal when at any point the scale is the same in every direction Therefore meridians and parallels intersect at right angles and the shapes of very small areas and angles with very short sides are preserved The size of most areas however is distorted Contour A line connecting points of equal elevation Coordinate system A graticule or a Cartesian grid in which points are located from two or three axes which intersect at a point Curvature The amount of curve in a line as defined by a series of points D Data model An abstraction of the real world which incorporates only those properties being relevant to the application at hand The data model would normally define specific groups of entities and their attributes and the relationships between these entities A data model is independent of a computer system and its associated data structures Database A collection of data organized according to a conceptual structure describing the characteristics of the data and the relationships among their corresponding entities Database management system DBMS A set of computer programs for organizing the information in a database usually containing routines for data input verification storage and retrieval Datum Any numerical or geometrical value surface line or point which may serve
116. ArA Zt wo COCO OAN AU BPWNK DOAN AUN PWNHY HK DOAN A UNBRWNY HK DMO AN AU BPWNH HK DUAN AU RWN CO Central Meridian 177W 171W 165W 159W 153W 147W 141W 135W 129W 123W 117W 111W 105W 99W 93W 87W 81W 75W 69W 63W 57W 51W 45W 39W 33W 27W 21W 15W OW 3W 3E 9E 15E 21E 27E 33E 39E 45E 51E 57E 63E 69E 75E 81E 87E 93E 99E 105E 111E 117E 123E 129E 135E 141E 147E 153E 159E 165E 171E 177E Longitude Range 180W 174W 174W 168W 168W 162W 162W 156W 156W 150W 150W 144W 144W 138W 138W 132W 132W 126W 126W 120W 120W 114W 114W 108W 108W 102W 102W 96W 96W 90W 90W 84W 84W 78W 78W 72W 72W 66W 66W 60W 60W 54W 54W 48W 48W 42W 42W 36W 36W 30W 30W 24W 24W 18W 18W 12W 12W 6W 6W 0 0 6E GE 12E 12E 18E 18E 24E 24E 30E 30E 36E 36E 42E 42E 48E 48E 54E 54E 60E 60E 66E 66E 72E 72E 78E 78E 84E 84E 90E 90E 96E 96E 102E 102E 108E 108E 114E 114E 120E 120E 126E 126E 132E 132E 138E 138E 144E 144E 150E 150E 156E 156E 162E 162E 168E 168E 174E 174E 180E UTM Map Zones gt lt o fe WO co LO Ww CO LO O O lt Ww oD Ww N WO wo oO O D a co lt E Fa a CO wv Ww a wv xE m a N 2 wv sE fe m co m m CO oD WO aP lt oD oD oD N m re oD m D N co N ya N CO N LO N zor N m N N N ppan N N o gt co ee b CO gt SFT WO b lt a e m C N u FU ye Oo
117. Axes Style For axes labels specify a distance away from the edge of the grid that the labels will be placed Choose a character style to use for the line labels 124 Chapter 13 Grids and Indexes Grids and Graticules by selecting an entry for End of Line Style to label the position of the grid or graticule in map units Select actual coordinates or distance from zero with the lower left corner being the origin For end of line labels specify a distance away from the edge of the grid that the labels will be placed and append the current units to each label ADVANCED OPTIONS Click the Advanced button to access additional grid extents and labelling options Modify the extents of the grid by entering new coordinates for the Lower Left and Top Right position of the grid in the current units It is also possible to edit the first value used for cell labels by editing the Start alpha numeric index at values Omit certain alpha characters from cell references with the Do not use characters option For example it may be useful to omit the characters I and O for indexing purposes when entering alpha characters to omit separate characters with a comma The Reference label order option can be edited to change the center labels from alpha numeric A 1 to numeric alpha 1 A or vice versa Advanced Bounding box Lower Left Adjust X and Y values Lower Left for the lower left of the grid extents Xi 47068 6336 Y 17027465
118. CMYK document will be exported as a RGB image 2 A linked image with Alpha channels may be exported in a different colour model For example a grayscale with two alphas will export as an RGB or an RGB with an alpha channel will export as CMYK 3 Linked images in CMYK mode regardless of the color mode of the document will export with an incorrect result and should therefore be avoided see chapter 12 If the image is EMBEDDED consider the following 1 The image will be exported in the colour mode of document i e an embedded grayscale image in a CMYK document will be exported as a CMYK image whereas an embedded CMYK image in an RGB document will be exported as an RGB image 2 Embedded grayscales do NOT pick up the document colour model i e an embedded grayscale image will be exported as grayscale 3 The export of embedded Bitmap images is not supported KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS This version of MAPublisher supports the use of keyboard shortcuts in order to increase the efficiency of the user and to make it easier to access commonly used dialog boxes and menus By default the Simple and Advanced Import dialog boxes can be accessed by pressing Shift Ctrl l and Alt Shift Ctrl A respectively All other MAPublisher tools can have keyboard shortcuts manually set by accessing the Adobe Illustrator Keyboard Shortcut dialog box which is located under Edit gt Keyboard Shortcuts A1 38 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide General Tips and
119. CSXX Settings Mac OS X Users user name Library Preferences Adobe Illustrator CSXX Settings Illustrator CS4 Windows XP Documents and Settings user name Application Data Adobe Adobe Illustrator CS4 Settings en_US Windows Vista Users user name AppData Roaming Adobe Adobe Illustrator CS4 Settings en_US Mac OS X Users user name Library Preferences Adobe Illustrator CS4 Settings en_US Also check under Preferences gt Plug ins amp Scratch Disks and ensure that the correct location of your plug ins folder is indicated I try to access the MAPublisher filters but always receive a message saying MAPublisher cannot obtain a license What should do 1 Check you have registered your copy of MAPublisher and received a license file MAPublisher will fail to operate until you have received a license file for activation For further details please see chapter 1 2 If you have purchased a machine specific or fixed license you must ensure the License file is located in the following directory Windows XP C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Avenza MAPublisher 8 Windows Vista C ProgramData Avenza MAPublisher 8 Mac OS X Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 MAPublisher Plug In 3 If you have a try out version of MAPublisher check that your copy has not expired To do this locate the lic file in the directory listed above Open this file in a simple text editor On the second line will be details of the expiration
120. D DDF Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions ddf Aggregate No Automated Translation Yes Circles No User Defined Attributes No Circular Arc No Coordinate System Support Yes Elliptical Arc No Generic Colour Support No Ellipses No Spatial Index Yes Polygon Yes Schema Required N A Donut Polygon Yes Transaction Support No Point Yes Geometry Type Attribute sdts_type Line Yes Text No KEYHOLE MARKUP LANGUAGE KML KML is an XML based language for managing the display of three dimensional geospatial data in the programs Google Earth Google Maps Google Mobile and WorldWind The KML file specifies a set of features for display Each feature always has a longitude and a latitude and can have other data such as tilt heading and altitude KML shares some of the same structural grammar as GML KML files are very often distributed as KMZ files which are zipped KML files with a kmz extension Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions kml kmz Aggregate Yes Automated Translation Yes Circles No User Defined Attributes Yes Circular Arc No Coordinate System Support Yes Elliptical Arc No Generic Colour Support Yes Ellipses No Spatial Index Never Polygon Yes Schema Required No Donut Polygon Yes 3D Support Yes Point Yes Line Yes Text No Prior to the import process additional Settings can be made which will affect how the selected KML file will import The following parameters can be applied to the imp
121. Documents and Settings david Desktop Data Tutorial Data usa tab C Documents and Settings david Desktop Data Tutorial Data worldeast shp asin Cerove Cea Destination MAP View New based on usa France Use existing e Auto scale C Create new m ig Coordinate System NAD27 Page Anchors 0 0 Visual Scale 1 7856651022696 491211 Map Anchors 12851181 6704 8625249 3932 Map Angle 0 File Name The directory path of the map file s to be imported File List This is a table where all files selected for import are listed Remove Removes selected files from the list Edit Allows the edit of the selected file by re opening the Simple Import Data Source function see below Details Displays details of currently selected file Coordinate System Unit Page Anchors Scale Map Anchors and Rotation Create new Allows you to import all of the files in a new coordinate system Clicking the Editor button opens the MAP View Editor see chapter 4 Advanced Import Data Source Accessed via the Add or Edit button Format Select the data type you wish to import This drop down list shows all MAPublisher supported data types Dataset Displays the directory path and filename for the currently selected file s You can also manually type in the dataset location here Source Coordinate System This section allows the manual selection
122. E distances on the map com e Required to add a scale bar s Ciona Systems Greenland e Use of a particular system within the list of projected and geodetic systems a e Maps that are part of a portfolio or Atlas have to comply to the same a system to be consistent e When a geo referenced image geotiff or world tiff is to be used together co e Sa with the data it is easier to use the same coordinate system for the vector ara data as of the raster oi e Most countries or geographic areas have published standards or usual North Dakota way for representing the land e g for road maps or meteorological maps US State Plane NAD27 In this case the user should make some test with the systems listed P US State lane NON EXACT in MAPublisher For a convenient use geodetic systems are sorted by continent gt country gt sub division state or county for example In doubt it is recommended to test different coordinate systems and visualize the results A2 4 Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems Coordinate Systems Considerations Examples of appearance of the USA depending of the chosen coordinate system Geodetic gt World gt WGS84 unprojected we hal P n Projected gt North America gt United States gt US National Atlas 4k ad tb Esi wE w m wi 7 i vaP i siyi 7 psy mh if j im ie 2 i Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems A2 5 Coordinate Systems Considerations The Geodetic Datas
123. Export Visible Attributes Check this option to export only the attributes that are currently visible in the MAP Attributes panel If this option is not checked all attribute columns including MAPublisher Property attributes will be exported Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing 55 Export KML Settings Google Maps does not support vector data containing attribute information In order to export to KML for use in that application the specific KML option do not export attributes must be checked Additional settings are not required for export to KML for use in Google Earth AutoCAD Settings When exporting to AutoCAD click the Settings button to specify the AutoCAD version Coordinate Units When exporting to Microstation click the Settings button to specify the desired unit type Area Fills When exporting area type data to the Microstation file format the user may enable disable fills Choosing a Destination Folder Most of the export formats will require the selection of a destination folder only For export to ESRI or MapInfo formats click the Browse button to specify a destination folder Click the OK button to export your MAP Layer In the case of exporting to AutoCAD format you will be required to specify a name for the exported file and select the file extension DXF or DWG to be used For MicroStation formats you will be required to specify a name for the exported file If you wish to export to either of these formats
124. Exporting a coordinate system Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems A2 17 The Geodetic Datasource IMPORTING ADDITIONAL COORDINATE SYSTEM DEFINITIONS By using the Import Coordinate System from File menu item in the MAPublisher MAP Views panel options menu additional coordinate system definitions can be imported and merged with the existing datasource information MAPublisher imports the following coordinate system file formats WKT definitions wkt MAP files map ESRI PRJ files prj and MapInfo TAB files tab E SAF bard shee Lj in Dem map daia Cobi Shape pind Damme Cages Giro Tease Lecter mpri ima OSa haier 2 werd Passe Centered ewe tetera teen Many Atrbutes orero sha NTs tes Mute orcs Riemer H MAP fies Crap ESAI PPL flee i pi bfe TAB ies ia Rec 7 A Importing an Additional Datasource NOTES e The Geodetic Datasource must be saved Save or Save As button after the import in order to be able to reuse it e New coordinate systems may also be added to the Geodetic Datasource during the map data import process when the file coordinate system is not found in the existing lists of coordinate systems it is automatically created with the proper required parameters A2 18 Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems The Geodetic Datasource Common Coordinate Systems GEODETIC A Geodetic Coordinate System is a three dimensional coordinate system defined by an ellipsoid the equatori
125. Expression Ontario applied to column NAME Result All selected items are assigned the value Ontario in the NAME column MAP Area 01 applied to column Style Result All selected area items are assigned the value MAP Area 01 in the Style column Same items are assigned the Graphic Style MAP Area 01 on the page 45 applied to Rotation Result All selected point items are assigned the value 45 in the Rotation column Items are rotated to 45 on the page Click OK to apply the expression to the selected data updating the values in the selected attribute column and transforming data as appropriate 74 Chapter 5 MAP Attributes Apply Expression AND North Sea er ah ae a lt Man hes f ea a 5 Bz NG ND Fale Londo Jo 5 va ce namel J ta eee Nantes Bay of Biscay nn A ordeak gt a f f DENMARK S Jyllandi K behha na BH leornhoinr n Golfa de Gab s A gTarabulus Banghazi ge chal Jabal ne y Str Sy w9 EA LE TS Y ri Mut idehan A Marzdgq Rs A Se F n r du Tafassasset Plotting Points The ability to place points onto a map is a fundamental part of cartography Points can represent the locations of towns and cities shops and malls airports and train stations and more MAPublisher provides the functionality to create or plot points in vector format Ther
126. F and MapInfo native formats in the same mapping file A single logical TAB file consists of a number of physical files having the following file name extensions tab The main file for a MapInfo table it is associated with the appropriate dat map id and ind files dat Tabular data for a table in MapInfo native format id An index to a Maplnfo graphical objects MAP file map Contains geographic information describing map objects ind An index to a Maplnfo tabular DAT file These extensions are added to the base name of the TAB file creating separate physical files that must all reside in the same directory You must select the tab file for import Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions tab dat id map ind Aggregate Yes Automated Translation Yes Circles Yes User Defined Attributes Yes Circular Arc Yes Coordinate System Support Yes Elliptical Arc Yes Generic Colour Support Yes Ellipses Yes Spatial Index Always Polygon Yes Schema Required Yes Donut Polygon Yes Geometry Type Attribute mapinfo_type Point Yes Line Yes Text Yes Prior to the import process additional Settings can be made which will affect how the selected file will import The following parameters can be applied to the import e Import as Visible Attributes Enable this option to view the pen and brush pattern values in the imported attribute table The MAPublisher TAB importer supports the storage of point line pol
127. High MM MAP Areao7 Density gt 20 stroke in area and line will be applied to PR stylesheets 2 Medium B MAP Area 19 Density gt 10 AND Density lt 20 100 Rule Name Editable name z of the style rule 3 Low E Map Area 31 Density gt 0 AND Density lt 5 Expression Click to edit the expression assigned Stylet List of established Graphic Styles for area to each style rule see i below and line stylesheets Character Styles text Expression Mode stylesheets or Symbols Expression Mode O Simpe Advanced Select the style of the point stylesheets display for creating expressions see below Add Remove To add a new style rule or delete the currently selected rule Simple Expression Advanced Expression To compose and edit expressions in Simple Mode To compose and edit expressions in Advanced Mode Column Lists the attribute column s of the associated Simple Expression Advanced Expression Ie See MAP Layers Density vi gt 10 Density gt 10 AND Density lt 20 m the entry field or click the Range operator Click to Wf The expression is valid Browse button to access activate the second row to the Edit Expression enable the composition of function see page 68 range expressions Comparison List of operators Value List of Equal to Greater than Less values in the Expression Validity ndicates if the expression is valid or than or equal to e
128. IMAGE With the image selected go to Filter gt MAP Images gt Export Image or click MAPublisher Toolbar button EN The Store Geography as drop down list will show the five available reference file formats A regular TIF file will be generated with a reference file carrying the extension TFW IRP TAB or LGO if you choose one of these formats If you select GeoTIFF from this drop down list only a TIF file will be produced as this will carry both the image and the georeferencing information RESULTS When you have set all of your export options click the Save As button This will allow you specify a name for the TIF file and the location where it will be saved If the format is a TIF and reference file combination the reference file will carry the same file name and will be saved to the same location as the TIF You can subsequently use this image file in imagery applications such as Avenza s Geographic Imager for Adobe Photoshop or in other Adobe Illustrator documents using MAPublisher NOTE Exporting linked images in CMYK color mode will create an incorrect result These images must either be set to a different mode or embedded prior to exporting In Adobe Illustrator CS4 Export Image is found in the Object gt Filters gt MAP Images menu 120 Chapter 12 Working With Images Export Image gt Grids and Indexes i GHU dAd n TF ARK MAPublisher contains tools to easily create map grids and map indexes Grids
129. In Adobe Illustrator CS4 Join Lines is found in the Object gt Filters gt MAP Lines menu 88 Chapter 8 Line Functions J oin Lines J oin Points Filter gt MAP Lines gt Join Points or MAP Toolbar Ei Join Points Input Layer Use this drop down list to eae aye select the Point layer containing the ever E azdec_point a symbols you wish to join Allpoints Selected points All Points Selected Points PETEN Output Layer Enter the name of the u ayer You can choose to join only those d output layer This new layer will contain points that have been selected or all E ew Layer the generated lines points on the selected MAP Layer C Close paths Close paths Check this option to Group By Group By Specify the attribute column generate an Area layer If unchecked a Column Name ry containing similar values to determine Line layer will be generated each group of points Sort By Sort By Available Columns Select an Available Columns Sort Order attribute column containing ascending eal bes a eenean Sort Order Contains a hierarchical list of values to sort by Then click the Add c3 an the columns specified to sort by button to add the column to the Sort To remove a column from the Sort gd Order c7 Order click the Remove button c8 emi c9 C11 C12 Move Up Move Down You can move ce columns up and down the c15 m Sort Order hierarchy by clicking the appropriate button FUNCTIONALITY
130. It is produced geometrically by projecting the Earth perspectively from the point on the Equator opposite a specified meridian onto a secant cylinder cutting the globe at latitudes 45 N and S It was presented by James Gall in 1855 It is sometimes known simply as the Gall projection or as Gall Stereographic projection This projection is used primarily for world maps in British atlases and some other atlases It resembles the Mercator but has less distortion of scale and area near the poles The meridians in the Gall Stereographic projection are equally spaced straight parallel lines 77 as long as the Equator Parallels are unequally spaced straight parallel lines perpendicular to meridians The poles are represented by straight lines equal in length to the Equator The projection is symmetrical about any meridian or the Equator Scale is true along latitudes 45 N and S in all directions and is constant in any given direction along any other latitude There is no distortion at latitudes 45 N and S but shape area and scale distortion increase moderately away from these latitudes and become severe at the poles The GallStereographic projection has the following parameters e Longitude of Origin e False Easting e False Northing NOTE Only a spherical form of this projection is used The semi major axis of the ellipsoid sphere is used for forward and inverse projection from grid to geodetic coordinates within the system wherein this projec
131. L files are very often distributed as KMZ files which are zipped KML files with a kmz extension KMZ files are not supported in this version of MAPublisher S 57 000 Import only S 57 is referring to the IHO International Hydrographic Office Special Publication number 57 related to the HO transfer standard for Digital Hydrographic Data Maintained by the IHO S 57 format is intended for the exchange of digital hydrographic data between national hydrographic offices and for its distribution to manufacturers mariners and other data users It is used for the supply of ENC cells Electronic Navigational Charts to ECDIS Electronic Chart Display and Information System The objects spatial geometry can be of Point Line or Area geometry while object descriptions are categorized in object classes organized in specific attributes schemas To make full use of this format refer to the online object catalog available on www s 57 com MAPublisher imports non encrypted S 57 data into MAP layers named per S 57 object acronym of type Area Line or Points All S 57 Attributes are converted into MAP Attributes An Adobe Illustrator template is supplied to automatically style the map after import The template contains a series of MAPublisher stylesheets linking S 57 imported features to nautical symbols and graphic styles libraries provided by Avenza This representation is non exhaustive and meant to assist users with limited knowledge of the S 57 f
132. LL MAPUBLISHER DOCUMENTS IN ADOBE ILLUSTRATOR 10 OR EARLIER FORMAT Legacy Text Conversion Adobe introduced new methods on dealing with text art in Adobe Illustrator CS Therefore files containing MAPublisher text objects must be converted using Adobe Illustrator and MAPublisher text conversion utilities If the Illustrator Legacy Text Conversion message appears when opening a legacy document you should click OK if the text contains attributes that need to be retained This will allow MAPublisher to use its own conversion utility to update text items maintaining the text attributes If you click Update the document will be opened however all attributes associated with this text will be lost When receiving the MAPublisher Legacy Text message choose one of the following Alltext art to convert both MAPublisher text and regular Adobe Illustrator text to the new Adobe Illustrator text format V MAPublisher text art only to convert only MAPublisher text to the new Adobe Illustrator text format X Nothing to open the file but lose attribute information associated with MAPublisher text elements Legacy Document Format MagPuiisher Adobe Illustrator 10 or earlier Open in Adobe Illustrator CS2 CS3 or CS4 Adobe Illustrator This file contains text that was created in a previous version of Illustrator This legacy text must be updated before you can edit it Choose Update to update all of the legacy text now Choose OK t
133. Layer Map View canada Source Layer Select the Area MAP Layer Source layer canada_area containing the polygons on which the Style Select the symbol to use The list centroids will be calculated Destination layer Centroid correspond to the symbols present in the Tal Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel Destination Layer Select the Point MAP Style MAPublisher Default Symbol Ed Layer where centroid symbols will be ral Scale Select the symbol scale Scale 100 Ea added FUNCTIONALITY The Plot Centroids function creates point symbols at the center of polygons This function is useful for cartographic generalization purpose e g replacing small island area by a symbol or to simply add a meaningful symbol at the center of areas For single polygons the centroid can be assimilated to the center of mass of the surface For polygons grouped into a compound path the centroid of the largest polygon is used NOTE The centroid of a Bezier polygon smoothed path may not be completely accurate because only the anchor points are used to calculate the centroid s position If necessary use the Adobe Illustrator Add Anchor Points function Object gt Path gt Add Anchor Points before running Plot Centroids on Bezier polygons PREREQUISITES The document must contain a fully georeferenced MAP View that includes a MAP layer of type Area with polygons and a MAP layer of type Point where the centroids will be added Furth
134. Lines to reduce the number of vertices in your data MAPublisherSWF html 2KB Firefox Document created afm file e Export as few attributes as possible only attributes that appear in Web E MAPublisherSWF swf 381KB Shockwave Flash Object Tags are exported List of created files Export Folder The Web Export Log information on the file size is meant to warn the users when files get very large Large files should be avoided as they may be very slow to open on a Web site Visualize Results In order to view the produced Flash map on a regular Web browser without posting the file on a server some permissions Global Security Settings must be set to allow the browser to open the file Clicking the Set Permissions button in the Web Export Log dialog box opens the Web page http www macromedia com support documentation en flashplayer help settings_manager04 htm containing the Adobe Flash Player Settings Manager PEGE GRE SRT GEE 1 Click Edit Locations amp 6 G6 amp 2 Click Add Location ic sein ei a7 aN ami 3 Click Browse For Folder or copy the full path as written in the Web Export Log ae gi dialog box and click Close aytem nl situr tF Tha m ami By fairmeick Gul f B poder lhal dome ca Aaya bik E Ab ans aba B wiy dey al The folder is added in the list of trusted location Locations can later be deleted through a similar process Ajkyi uil Mee in these biibini Fat calmne NOTE You must be
135. M system between 80 south and 80 north latitude which uses a standard scaled grid square based on a point of origin on a map projection of the surface of the Earth in an accurate and consistent manner to permit either position referencing or the computation of direction and distance between grid positions The MilitaryGridReferenceSystem projection has no parameters MILLER CYLINDRICAL Meridians and parallels are straight lines intersecting at right angles on the Miller Cylindrical projection Poles are shown as lines This projection is used only in spherical form and provides a compromise between Mercator and other cylindrical projections When Miller Cylindrical is selected in the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box you will need to enter the following parameters e Radius of the Sphere e Longitude of the Central Meridian e False Northing and False Easting NOTE Only aspherical form of this projection is used The radius of the sphere is used for forward and inverse projection from grid to geodetic coordinates within the system wherein this projection is incorporated You are required to specify a geodetic datum when you use this projection as part of a coordinate system in order to perform geodetic datum shifts into other coordinate systems A2 38 Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems MAPublisher Supported Projections MOLLWEIDE The Mollweide projection is a pseudocylindrical equal area projection The central meridian
136. MID mif mid MapInfo TAB tab Microstation Design dgn NOTE Exporting a MAP View to CAD or MicroStation format will assemble all hosted layers into a single file PREREQUISITES The Export function will export a single selected Adobe Illustrator layer contained in a MAP View or all layers contained in a specified MAP View Therefore both imported and user created MAP Views will contain MAP Layers that are suitable for export to GIS formats USING MAP EXPORT To open the export function first select the MAP Layer or MAP View you wish to export in the MAP Views panel In the panel options menu click Export lt Layer MAP View name gt Alternatively select a MAP View and click button es Co Or select a MAP Layer and click button ggg NOTE You cannot export multiple MAP Views or multiple layers that have been selected individually Only single MAP Views or single layers can be exported at one time Within the dialog box select the export Format you require and then click the Settings button Keep Format Extension The MAP Layer or MAP View you are exporting will be the default name of the exported file However the feature type text i e _area line point or _text appended to Adobe Illustrator layers by MAPublisher in the Import process will be removed during the export process unless you specify that you wish to keep this If you wish to keep the feature type text check the Keep format extension option
137. NAME ani Z Visible Size Decimals Edit the size of String a ee STNE POR type or amount of decimals of Real Select a column here to edit I POPULATION _ Read only pe i i j R z001 its properties on the right Id C Derive value from expression Default Value Assign the same value to all items in the selected column if Add Click to add a new 5 required column to the column list Visibility Choose to show or hide SEE the selected column by editing this option Remove Click to delete the selected i f col mn Derive value from expression Check this option to assign an Read only Check this option to ensure expression to the selected column Either enter the expression that values in this column can not directly into the entry field or click the Browse button to be edited access the Edit Expression function see page 68 In MAPublisher the term schema is used to define the structure and makeup of the map attributes table FUNCTIONALITY The Edit Schema function lets you edit and manage various components of your data s map attribute structure including creating editing and deleting columns setting visibility preferences and assigning expressions Any changes made to the schema will instantly be reflected in the MAP Attributes panel USING EDIT SCHEMA Select an object of the MAP Layer containing the attributes you wish to edit It gets selected in the MAP Attributes panel Access the tool by clickin
138. Northing and False Easting e Latitude of the Origin of the Projection e Longitude of the Center of the Projection e Scale Factor at the Center of the Projection LAMBERT STATE PLANE 27 The State Plane Coordinate System SPCS is not a projection rather it is a system for specifying positions of geodetic stations using plane rectangular coordinates This coordinate system that divides all fifty states of the United States Puerto Rico and the U S Virgin Islands into over 120 numbered sections referred to as zones Each zone has an assigned code number that defines the projection parameters for the region There are four possible projections for SPCS The geometric direction of each state determines the projection utilized For states that are longer in the east west direction the Lambert Conformal Conic is used States that are longer in the north south direction use the Transverse Mercator Projection The panhandle of Alaska which has the sole distinction of lying at an angle garners the use of the Oblique Mercator Projection Conversely Guam uses a Polyconic projection The formulae for these calculations are based on Publication 62 4 State Plane Coordinates by Automatic Data Processing U S Department of Commerce 1968 These projections should only be used for data that has been computed using this method For all other state plane calculations use Exact Methods The parameters for these coordinate systems are defined in Publication 62 4 For fur
139. P View Editor dialog box has an additional drop down list to select the Active Artboard When this section of the dialog has focus the Preview Pane displays the number of each artboard The current active artboard is shown in white while the others are grayed out The Data Extents LL Corners and Scale calculations are based on the Active Artboard dimensions To move the data extent green box in the Preview Pane from one artboard to another change the Active Artboard number to the artboard where the data is to be moved then click the Auto Scale button or one of the Data Extents LL Corner boxes 200m 11 16 a Cance Artboards Preview of the artboards present on the canvas S Active Artboard White background Other Arborads Grayed out T Sh 5 x evs None Active Artboard Select the number of I Sonans ape Nicas a ad the artboard to be set as Active Saeed usa Data Extents LL Corner Scale Ange Li 28581656 282838 uto Seale z 17 255025 i 0 v D 0091 2 n NOTE Adobe Illustrator CS4 allows users to move artboards However this action does not preserve the georeferencing same effect as moving arts on the active artboard Instead of moving the artboard users must do the following e Create a new artboard at the desired position on the canvas e Open the MAP View Editor and move the data from the initial artboard to the new one see explanation above Delete the initial artb
140. P View from Document Lock button Click this box to lock or unlock the Layer Layer Name Search amp Replace mirrored in the Adobe Load Geodetic Data Source Illustrator Layers panel Edit Geodetic Data Source Graticule Points A waterbackground E World_area 7 Z Non MAP layers Non MAP layers Lists the Adobe E F Color Scheme Illustrator layers that are r VA icici nace not part of a specified MAP aper View and do not contain a VA Layer 1 georeferencing information Fa PopDensity E F A Tet fne Remove GIS data Switch to Alaska Delete MAP View button ti ti Allows you to delete the currently i saci agile selected MAP View provided it Switch to World does not contain any map layers New MAP View button Allows you to create a New MAP View and specify its name and coordinate system information Switch MAP View Click this button to switch the selected layer from one MAP view to another Remove GIS data moves the selected layer to Non MAP layers section discarding the geographic information and attributes in the process Export Enables the export of the selected MAP View or MAP Layer to various GIS formats RELATED TOOLS Define Layer Automatically opens when dragging a Non MAP layer into a specified MAP View Feature Type Select the type of feature that exists on the layer being dragged This drop down list presents
141. REATING A MULTI CONDITION IF EXPRESSION In Edit Expression it is possible to assign symbology to map objects by assigning an expression to the Style column In the following example this is achieved by creating a multi condition IF statement In the following example a point layer represents cities Each point has the value Y N or C in the CAPITAL attribute column describing whether the city is a state capital Y is not a state capital N or is a country capital C There are three point symbols to assign to the type of point In this example the following expression can be assigned to the Style column of the point layer IF CAPITAL Y MAP Symbol 017 IF CAPITAL C MAP Symbol 02 MAP Symbol 03 Therefore If the capital is Y assign the symbol MAP Symbol 01 If the capital is C assign the symbol MAP Symbol 02 All other symbols assign MAP Symbol 03 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Al 37 General Tips and Hints NOTES FOR EXPORTING IMAGES If the document colour mode is CMYK exporting an embedded image may result in increased file size compared to RGB mode If the image is LINKED consider the following 1 The image will be exported in the original colour mode of the image irrespective of the current colour mode of the document i e a linked grayscale image in a CMYK document will be exported as a grayscale image whereas a linked RGB image in an
142. Space Oblique Mercator is selected in the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box you will need to enter the following parameters e False Northing and False Easting e Longitude of the Central Meridian e Semi major Axis of the Satellite Orbit e Eccentricity of the Satellite Orbit e Longitude of Perigee relative to the Ascending Node e Length of Time of the Earth s Rotation e Time of Revolution of the Satellite Inclination of the Satellite Orbit e Longitude of the Ascending Node Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems A2 43 MAPublisher Supported Projections STEREOGRAPHIC The Stereographic projection is the only known true perspective projection of any kind that is also conformal The central meridian and a particular parallel if shown are straight lines All other meridians and parallels are shown as arcs of circles When Stereographic is selected in the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box you will need to enter the following parameters e False Northing and False Easting e Longitude of the Center of the Projection e Latitude of the Center of the Projection Scale Reduction Factor at the Center of the Projection STEREOGRAPHIC 70 Stereographic 70 is a derivation of the Stereographic projection for use in Romania When Stereographic 70 is selected in the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box you will need to enter the following parameters e False Northing and False Easting e Longitude of the Center of the Projection
143. Start Route The MAP GPS Device Settings dialog box provides for the input of the specific settings for the connected GPS Device Users are required to manually select the appropriate settings prior to using MAP GPS Appropriate settings for specific devices can usually be obtained by consulting the device s user manual or by contacting the manufacturer Port Name Select the proper serial port for your GPS device Baud Rate Select the baud rate for your GPS device Data Bits Select the data bits for your GPS device Parity Select the proper parity for your GPS device Stop Bits Select the proper Stop Bits for your GPS device Flow Control Select the proper flow control for your GPS device Test this Configuration Select button to ensure all the specified features are inputted correctly before continuing 152 Chapter 16 MAP GPS MAP GPS Panel Menu Stop Bits Flow control Software XOn XOff Test this Configuration MAP GPS Point Plot Settings Accessed from the MAP GPS menu Type Select the type of Plot you would like to apply the setting to Either Manual Plot Plot By Time Plot MAP GPS Point Plot Settings x iN by Distance Plot by Change in Speed or Plot By Change in i Heading may be used Type Plot by Time E Scale Sets the size of the chosen symbol prior to or __ __ Sgal during plotting if required 100 1 Every second s Every Sets the intervals at which p
144. States NAD27 was based on the Clarke Ellipsoid of 1866 which was developed from ground survey in Europe and North America in the 19th Century The centre point for NAD27 is Meades Ranch in Kansas USA e NAD83 During the 1970 s and 1980 s satellites were able to measure the ellipsoid flattening more accurately the World Geodetic System ellipsoid of 1984 or WGS84 and a new datum was developed from these measurements called the North American Datum of 1983 The Global Positioning System is based on WGS84 The centre point for NAD83 is the centre of the Earth s mass and uses the GRS80 spheroid which factors in the Earth s equatorial bulge Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems A2 3 Overview Coordinate Systems Considerations In the MAPublisher application the coordinate system option must be entered at two levels coordinate system of the source data when importing GIS data and coordinate system of the final map SOURCE DATA COORDINATE SYSTEM The Source coordinate system is usually detected when the coordinate system information is available with the GIS data being imported and when supported in the native GIS format such as Shapefile e00 However in some cases this information is not imported because it is not supported in the original GIS format e g DWG DXF or when using a non referenced Adobe Illustrator files In that case the coordinate system must be specified by the user It generally can be found from an attac
145. The scale controls the size of the point symbol to be plotted With a scale of 100 percent selected the point is plotted at the original size of the symbol The second option is the Plot Symbol which determines which symbol is plotted Plot By Time The Plot By Time setting options control how points will be plotted when using the Plot By Time feature from the main MAP GPS panel Three separate settings can be adjusted Scale Every and Plot symbol The Every setting is used to specify the time interval between plots For instance if the Every setting is set to 5 seconds a new point is plotted every five seconds These settings may be changed while plotting is occurring If the user wishes to increase or decrease the scale or change to a different point symbol while plotting by time they may do so by setting new parameters Changes will be reflected in the next point to be plotted Chapter 16 MAP GPS 153 MAP GPS Point Plot Settings Plot By Distance The Plot by Distance setting options control how points will be plotted when using the Plot by Distance feature from the main MAP GPS panel Three separate settings can be adjusted Scale Every and Plot symbol The Every setting is used to specify the distance interval between plots For example if the Every setting is set to 5 metres a point will be plotted every five metres These settings may be changed while plotting is occurring If the user wishes to increase decrease the scale or change to
146. V8 Prior to the import process additional Settings can be made which will affect how the selected file will import The following parameters can be applied to the import Note versions V7 and V8 and supported for import e Group Elements Choose how you want to group the elements of the file on import If you group the elements by level it may result in a large number of output files By Level is the default e Coordinate Units Choose Master Sub or UOR as the coordinate units of the features Master is the default e White Lines and Fills Enabling the Import as is option will instruct MAPublisher to import the data true to the Original colour settings contained in the file Check the Change white lines and fills to black box to import black lines instead of the files native white lines Check the Create black background option to incorporate a layer containing a black background to mimic the AutoCAD environment e Other Check Drop complex chains if you want each component of a complex chain to be returned as its own feature otherwise all elements of the complex chain will be merged into a single linear feature TIGER LINE RT1 BW1 Topologically Integrated Geographic Encoding and Referencing TIGER TIGER is the United States Census Bureau format for its digital database of geographic features TIGER includes both land attributes such as roads buildings rivers and lakes as well as areas such as counties ZIP codes census trac
147. _tic_point layer won t be created TIC Points Layer Ignore TIC layer MicroStation Design Settings Group Elements Choose how you want to group the elements If you group the elements by level it may result in a large number of output files Coordinate Units Specifies how feature coordinates will be interpreted and converted White Lines and Fills Choosing the Import as is option will instruct MAPublisher to import the data true to the original colour settings contained in the file Choose the Change white lines and fills to black option to import black lines instead of the files native white lines Choose the Create black background option to incorporate a layer containing a black background to mimic the MicroStation environment MicroStation Design file import is not supported under Mac PPC Rosetta Settings Group Elements By level By geometry Coordinate Units Master UOR hite Lines and Fills Import as is Change white lines and fills to black Create black background Other C Drop complex chains Complex Strings Check the Drop box if you want each component of a complex chain to be returned as its own feature Otherwise all elements of the complex chain will be merged into a single linear feature Allow Random Colour Mode display in the MAP Attributes description column will show Checking this box allows Adobe Illustrator to generate random colo
148. a Chapter 2 Map Data File Formats 29 Import and Export Supported Data Formats USGS Digital Line Graph dlg opt Import only The United States Geological Survey DLG file structure is designed to accommodate categories of spatial data represented on a conventional line map Node point line and area data types are accepted The attribute coding scheme is designed to accommodate basic cartographic data categories such as hypsography hydrography or political and cultural features as well as additional thematic data categories USGS Spatial Data Transfer Standard SDTS catd ddf Import only Digital cartographic products of the USGS are available in the Spatial Data Transfer Standard format and are generally distributed over the Internet as a means of promoting the standard For SDTS import select the catd file xxxxcatd ddf which is the index file that contains a description of the other files in the SDTS transfer Individual DDF files cannot be imported Generally all SDTS downloads will contain the CATD file DATA CONSIDERATIONS When obtaining GIS data for use with MAPublisher whether from an online source commercial vendor government office or from an internal source within your organization there are a number of important considerations to keep in mind First and foremost you should always endeavour to obtain data in one of the formats supported by the MAPublisher Importers see above In cases where the file format
149. a choice of Area Line Point Text or Legend layer types Undefined Layer You must specify a feature type for layer Text Base Attribute Schema on Check this option Advanced if you wish to copy the attribute schema from an existing MAP Layer Select the MAP Layer name in the drop down list to copy it s attribute schema C Base attribute schema on A Hawaii_area 44 Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing MAP Views Panel Feature type AJ Area v Cancel Apply to all New MAP View Allows you to create a new MAP View and specify its name and coordinate information Duplicate MAP View Will create a duplicate of the currently selected MAP View Edit MAP View Allows you to edit the name and coordinate system of the currently selected MAP View Delete MAP View Allows you to delete the currently selected MAP View provided it does not contain any Adobe Illlustrator layers Source Coordinate System Allows you to specify the coordinate system of the currently selected MAP View Specify Anchors For manually establishing the tie in point between Map and Page Anchors should only be used for new MAP Views or for the correction of georeferencing errors Import Coordinate System From File Imports a coordinate system from different file types including WKT definitions wkt MAP files map ESRI projection files prj MapInfo TAB files tab Export Coordinate System to Fi
150. a couple of strong hints that may indicate that a file is in lat long Both ArcView and Maplnfo tend to store files in lat long for rapid reprojection This is why most files derived from such sources are stored in lat long A good test to see if a file is in lat long is to look at the Map Anchor values in the MAP View Editor or in the MAP Location Tool Typical Lat Long values will be X between 180 and 180 and Y between 90 and 90 OTHER ISSUES How accurate is MAPublisher georeferencing At this point in time we are restricted to 32 bit storage for numbers which allows for seven digits of precision The 32 bit storage restriction is controlled by the graphics environment software and not the MAPublisher software We have asked for this storage restriction to be increased to 64 bit without success We can and do all our internal calculations in 64 bit for accuracy but the results still must be stored as 32 bit MAPublisher values are roughly 4 3 billion times more precise than Adobe Illustrator Adobe Illustrator is fundamentally an art program The numbers used for its vertex data are more than sufficient to provide precision enough such that the human eye cannot tell the difference even at its highest zoom level Unfortunately MAPublisher must translate its coordinates into Adobe Illustrator when placing them on the artboard We do this using mathematical calculations based upon the parameters you provide e g map and page anchors scale etc
151. ace area labels with a high degree of precision or lower degree of precision by choosing the appropriate Placement Accuracy option If the Labels curve with lines of latitude option is selected MAPublisher creates a path that conforms to local line of latitude and place the text along it If this option is not selected the labels are placed horizontally This option is enabled only for MAP Views set with a projected coordinate system Labels can be modified if they exceed the size of the area in the current default font size First select the Adjust label if larger than area option to activate the label rules Rules are executed by MAPublisher in a hierarchical order and can be reordered by clicking the rule and then the Up or Down button 104 Chapter 10 Labeling Functions Feature Text Label Checking the Reduce font size option will allow you to reduce the size of the font to a specified minimum size in points Checking Reduce horizontal scaling will allow text to be scaled down horizontally by the fraction specified Checking the Wrap Labels that are longer than area option will enter a carriage return at the nearest space in the text NOTE The Wrap Labels that are longer than area option is not available if the Labels curve with lines of latitude option is checked Feature Text Label also provides an additional option which is not available with the MAP Tagger tool If any of the labels have been adjusted in size due to the deploymen
152. al plane of the ellipsoidal and a plane defined along the polar axis a meridional plane Coordinates in a Geodetic Coordinate System are given by a geodetic latitude the angle between the normal to the ellipsoid at a location and the equatorial plane a geodetic longitude the angle between the meridional reference plane and a meridional plane containing the normal to the ellipsoid at a location and a geodetic height the perpendicular distance of a location from the ellipsoid A geodetic datum is the only required defining parameter for a Geodetic Coordinate System in MAPublisher A geodetic datum defines constants that relate a Geodetic Coordinate System to the physical Earth the dimensions of the reference ellipsoid the location of the origin of the system and the orientation of the system A geodetic coordinate is specified in MAPublisher by latitude longitude and ellipsoidal height values Any angular unit defined within MAPublisher may be used to specify latitude and longitude coordinates The ellipsoidal height of a location is defined as the elevation of the location above the geoid essentially a modeled surface representing mean sea level and the separation of the geoid surface from the ellipsoidal surface MAPublisher assumes a value of 0 0 if the ellipsoidal height of a location is unknown Any distance unit defined within MAPublisher may be used to specify ellipsoidal height values UNIVERSAL TRANSVERSE MERCATOR The Univers
153. al Transverse Mercator UTM Coordinate System is an international plane coordinate system developed by the U S Army It extends around the globe from 84 degrees north to 80 degrees south The world is divided into 60 zones in the Northern Hemisphere and 60 corresponding zones in the southern hemisphere Each zone covers six degrees of longitude Each zone extends three degrees eastward and three degrees westward from its central meridian Zones are numbered west to east from the 180 degree meridian The geodetic datum and the UTM zone are required parameters for the UTM Coordinate System supported in MAPublisher A UTM coordinate is specified in MAPublisher by northing and easting values The metre is the standard unit in the UTM coordinate system Any distance unit defined within MAPublisher may be used to specify UTM coordinates Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems A2 19 Common Coordinate Systems US STATE PLANE There are two State Plane Coordinate Systems defined in the United States one based on the North American Datum of 1927 and the other based on the North American Datum of 1983 Each of the State Plane Coordinate Systems divides the United States into over 130 sections each with its own projection surface and grid network With the exception of very narrow states such as Delaware New Jersey and New Hampshire most states divide into two to ten zones Zones extending primarily in an east west direction are based on the La
154. an one million in the POPULATION column are assigned the selected style NOTE String values are case sensitive and must be entered between double quotes 98 Chapter 9 MAP Stylesheets MAP Stylesheet Editor Assigning a Scale The Scale default is 100 Editing the scale will alter the symbol size points or stroke weight areas and lines Building the Stylesheet For subsequent style rules proceed in the same manner Click Add and then specify a Name Style Expression and Scale You can click Apply at any time to preview the results at any stage of building a stylesheet and also return to edit settings you have made for individual style rules In order to delete a style rule from the list click anywhere in its row and click the Remove button Click OK to exit the dialog box and to assign the MAP Stylesheet to the associated MAP Layers IMPORTANT NOTES Expression Modes The Expression Mode determines which type of expression panel you get when editing a style rule s expression The expression mode will be remembered from the last session If the Expression Mode is set to Advanced the expression panel will always be the Advanced Expression panel irrespective of the expression being edited If the Expression Mode is set to Simple the expression panel will be the Simple Expression panel unless the expression to be edited is not a simple expression A Simple Expression is one that is either empty or includes only one att
155. and S The McBrydeThomasFlatPolarQuartic projection has the following parameters e Longitude of Origin e False Easting e False Northing NOTE Only a spherical form of this projection is used The semi major axis of the ellipsoid sphere is used for forward and inverse projection from grid to geodetic coordinates within the system wherein this projection is incorporated Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems A2 37 MAPublisher Supported Projections MERCATOR The Mercator projection is a cylindrical conformal map projection in which meridians and parallels are straight lines that cross at 90 degree angles Angular relationships are preserved To preserve conformity parallels are placed increasingly farther apart with increasing distance from the equator This results in extreme distortion at high latitudes Scale is true along the equator or along two parallels equidistant from the equator Despite its drawbacks the Mercator projection is quite useful for navigation because rhumb lines which show constant direction are straight The Mercator projection is also appropriate for conformal maps of equatorial regions When Mercator is selected in the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box you will need to enter the following parameters e False Northing and False Easting e Longitude of the Central Meridian e Latitude of True Scale MILITARY GRID REFERENCE SYSTEM The Military Grid Reference System projection is an extension of the UT
156. and Tabular databases http libinfo uark edu gis us asp Directions Magazine Data Center Directions magazine is an internet centred publication that provides news analysis commentary product information and free map data http www directionsmag com files EROS Data Center The Eros Data Center will be providing FTP access to a variety of USGS digital data sets http edcwww cr usgs gov Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Al 27 Online Links Geocommunity and GIS Data Depot The GeoCommunity and GIS Data Depot are an excellent sources of free GIS data geographic software including data viewers translators and compression utilities and industry news This site also has several GlS related discussion forums The data found on this site covers most areas of the world http www geocomm com Geoconnections Geoconnexions This site from Canada Ministry of Natural Resources offers many links to GIS data and other informational resources http www cgdi gc ca Geography Network The Geography Network is an online resource for finding and sharing world wide geographic content including maps and data from many of the world s leading providers http www geographynetwork com Geogratis Geogratis is a Natural Resources Canada site offering maps satellite imagery and tabular data http geogratis cgdi gc ca GlSuser GlSuser com was launched in February 2004 Their goal is to provide the geospatial techn
157. any features that are both saved and selected USING THE MAP SELECTION STATS PANEL Open the MAP Selection Stats panel by going to Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP Selection Stats or clicking the MAPublisher toolbar button jg Layer Statistics On initial opening this panel will display the total number of Map features that exist on the current MAP Layer as well as how many are currently selected As only one feature type is supported per MAP Layer this dialog box will only display the current feature type Only MAPublisher objects will be displayed in the MAP Selection Stats panel Objects that are in Non MAP layers in the MAP Views panel will not be recognized in this panel Selecting objects manually or via a MAP Selection Filter will update the left hand field in this panel The right hand field will display the total number of map features that exist on the current MAP Layer All or Reverse The dialog box offers a quick way to select all map features on the current layer Simply click the A All button to select all the Map features on the current layer Clicking the R Reverse button will reverse the current selection i e all the features that were selected will be deselected and the features that were deselected will be selected Saving Selections The Save button will save the current selection to memory allowing you to retrieve your selection again later Only one selection can be saved and it is limited to the curre
158. arameters to transform coordinates from one Datum to another Ellipsoids An Ellipsoid gives a horizontal datum its size and shape An ellipsoid does not have an origin and cannot be used as a base model for coordinates on its own e Envelopes Defines a geographic area of use for a particular object e Horizontal Datums A horizontal datum more commonly referred to as just datum is the base model maps are built on All coordinate systems must have a datum associated with them to be related to any other map Without a known datum coordinates are meaningless e Linear Units Units for measuring straight line cartesian distances e Prime Meridians The prime meridian represents the line of longitude that is designated as 0 degrees All other lines of longitude are expressed by the angle by which they deviate from the prime meridian Together with the equator of an ellipsoid the prime meridian defines the origin of a geodetic coordinate system A prime meridian is defined by the angle that separates it from the Greenwich meridian Users have the possibility to define new coordinate systems make copy and modify existing objects The custom objects are stored in a separate xml file saved by the user Users can also re organize the Geodetic Datasource default and custom parameters into categories and sub folders These changes are saved to a view file xvw The view file may be deleted to reset the Geodetic Datasource Editor to its defau
159. ata on the page via the assignment of a rotation value Note that property attributes are dynamic Changes made to them in the map attribute table are reflected immediately in the graphical properties and on screen display of the data to which they are linked Expressions can be generated and applied to data based on the values found in an existing attribute column providing a one step process to transform a vast number of different objects in a single operation APPLYING EXPRESSIONS Ensure the data required for the application of the expression is selected and that layer is selected in the MAP Attributes panel Then access the tool by clicking the Apply Expression button or menu item in the same panel First specify a column from the Apply to list to specify which attribute column the expression will be applied to The columns listed here are representative of the attribute structure unique to the data layer currently displayed in the attribute table as well as the standard MAPublisher property attributes To assign an expression to a column enter a valid expression in the Expression text box The Expression Validity icon will report if the expression entered is valid Otherwise it will report and include additional warning notes Alternatively click the Browse button to enter and edit expressions via the Edit Expression tool page 46 The following are some examples of basic expressions which can be assigned to selected data with Apply
160. ation of the Shapefile this will automatically be read by MAPublisher on import If your Shapefile folder does not contain a prj file you will be required to specify the coordinate system in order to fully utilize MAPublisher Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions shp shx dbf prj Aggregate Yes Automated Translation Yes Circles No User Defined Attributes Yes Circular Arc No Coordinate System Support Yes if have prj Elliptical Arc No Generic Colour Support No Ellipses No 3D Support Yes Polygon Yes Schema Required Yes Donut Polygon Yes Transaction Support No Point Yes Geometry Type Attribute SHAPE_GEOMETRY Line Yes Text No Al 4 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide MAPublisher Import Formats MAPINFO INTERCHANGE MIF MID MIF is a published ASCII storage format used by the Maplnfo It is used as a file format for map and database exporting importing in MapInfo software products The MapInfo Reference Manual describes the MIF format and all constants it uses for colour style symbol and fill patterns MapInfo Interchange Format Files are often called MIF or MIF MID files A single logical MIF file consists of two physical files having the following file name extensions mif Geometric data mid Attributes for the geometric data These extensions are added to the base name of the MIF file creating separate physical files that must all reside in the same directory You must select the mi
161. ator As such you will typically find that curved sections of GIS data will be composed of a series of small line segments rather than an actual curve This is also how such features will first appear in Adobe Illustrator when imported with MAPublisher The Adobe Illustrator Object gt Path gt Simplify filter can be used to convert this type of feature into a Bezier curve see chapter 8 If Bezier curves are exported from Adobe Illustrator using any of the MAPublisher Export filters they will be converted to link and node topology i e the end points of the curve will simply be joined as straight lines It is therefore necessary to create additional points to curves to retain their true shape This can be done globally by using the Adobe Illustrator Add Anchor Points function via Object gt Path gt Add Anchor Points This version of MAPublisher supports Bezier curve features during the following operations e Scale and Projection transformations via the MAP View Editor e Area and length calculations A1 36 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide General Tips and Hints CREATING SYMBOLS FOR USE IN POINT STYLESHEETS A MAPublisher Symbol Library and a National Parks Symbol Library are supplied in the Helpful Styles amp Symbols folder on the MAPublisher CD You may also find that a search on the internet may be useful for finding additional libraries If you are required to create new symbols the steps below will help you to quickly create
162. b Author MAP Web Author Panel 0 cece cece eeeeeees Web Tag Dialog sats ware ctendadwetanpiennareaa ee tee Export tO WED miwsancasaieauwisesedeewecerssseraesaats MAP Web Author Workflow cece cence ee ees 8l ilteeupesdsceuacnnce Ri 82 OPE EEE 83 85 MERE PPE RS EER REN EAUO HA 86 E E E E 87 PPPE ETREOT EErEE PEITIS 88 MEE E E E 89 RERNE DERES EURE sane oe 91 115 116 120 121 122 127 129 130 133 Chapter 16 Appendices MAP GPS 149 MAP GOPS Panel annie thoeann eienn AEE EE ARAE ETER EAEEREN 150 MAP GPS Panel MENU 4 53 lt oene eens xcasseawedacpetmedses Gee sene sade eoreodesaes 152 MAP GPS Point PIOP SCLEINGS g ncyeccannsevenneeencndoesanepsecnaseeseensa4 153 MAP GPS Autosave Settings 12500002sdedieuecdescceous te uderowcdsicedusesass 155 Edit User Attribute for Current Layer ccc cc cece een eee e eee eeees 156 Record Sentence Log accatenueuscaesagnsuersayawcenesicncesseseerccseseus ars 157 Playpack Sentence LOU y aces ve nntecenareur sean REENE EEE TEENE EEEE 158 159 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide cece cece cette eee eeeees A1 1 Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems 0 cece cece e eee eenees A2 1 Appendix 3 MAPublisher 8 How To s For Legacy Users 0eeeeeeees A3 1 Appendix 4 Helpful Styles and Symbols Files ccc cece eee eeees A4 1 Appendit 5 GIOSSAN Vs ony occas aese ae er gneetrssyaaeersctcigessteworacersres ss A5
163. be Illustrator on the new computer and start the menu Help gt MAPublisher Licensing gt License Management 4 Note the machine ID that will be displayed and email that 12 digit string along with your MAPublisher 8 serialnumber to activation avenza com and indicate that you wish to move the license to a new computer Why does the activation wizard repeatedly open when I have a valid license installed If the activation wizard repeatedly prompts you to activate MAPublisher but you have already have a valid licence file from a previous activation installed then you should follow the procedure below 1 Exit Adobe Illustrator 2 Locate your Adobe Illustrator preferences file typically named Alprefs Windows Adobe Ilustrator Prefs Mac 3 Once the file is located delete the file and restart Adobe Illustrator This should resolve the problem NOTE This applies to both floating and stand alone license users MEMORY AND SPEED ISSUES Why do I need so much more memory RAM than I do with my GIS The graphics software environment of Adobe Illustrator loads the entire file into memory rather than just reading it from disk thus more memory is required MAPublisher builds a mini GIS application inside Adobe Illustrator so that it can geo code information and attach data to objects This also has some overhead When you are importing a lot of files with MAPublisher into Adobe Illustrator you ll notice that the amount of available memory will decreas
164. bile phone blue tooth wireless or GPS systems Laptop users with a docking station must activate MAPublisher in the undocked state After the installation of MAPublisher 8 launch the version s of Adobe Illustrator you installed it to The MAPublisher Welcome Screen will appear automatically This screen gives four licensing options Evaluate Register Retrieve and Floating NOTE If you wish to continue to use Adobe Illustrator without MAPublisher you can cancel this dialog box and activate MAPublisher license later by navigating to the Help menu in Adobe Illustrator and then to MAPublisher Licensing gt License Management MAPublisher panels are marked with a lock icon when the software is not licensed Adobe Illustrator CS3 and CS4 only Welcome to MAPublisher Close AFT i MAPublisher s so When Map Quality Matters ce Er ee 3 PHILLIES ISLAM Feature Version Type Status User Serial Number t r 4 so z iy oe Jason Anderson David Andrec Tara Dennis Dimo Dinev MAPublisher GPS Unknown None Unlicensed igs Garvan Keeley Michael Law V ronique Lutes J gat MAPublisher Labeling Pro 1 0 Unknown None Unlicensed Avenza Michael Marsella Stephen Maxwell Andrew Patterson SYSTEMS INC liya Vareev Kimiko Watanabe Michael Yakubovsky amp Peter Zhang WwwwW avenza com Avenza Support 1 416 487 6442 Avenza Sales 1 416 487 5116 Checkout Machine ID 001676badbce License status Unlicensed
165. box at Help gt MAPublisher Licensing gt License Management This releases the license so other users can now use it The link to the server is set for once The next time you start the application you just need to the click the Checkout button on the MAPublisher Welcome Screen or License Management dialog box 18 Chapter 1 Getting Started MAPublisher License Management The MAPublisher Importers can be found under the File menu and by using the The MAPublisher Tools MAPublisher tools can be found in a number of locations in Adobe Illustrator MAPublisher Edit MAP Object function can be found under the Object menu keyboard shortcuts and toolbar File Object New Ctrl N T f New from Template Shift Ctrl N PASEN Open Ctrl 0 Arrange Open Recent Files gt Browse Alt Ctl O Group Chrl HG Import Map Data F Simple Shift Ctrl 1 ae he R Advanced Alt Shift Ctri A Device Central L Lack Close Ctrl w alar Save Ctrl 5 Save As Shift Ctrl S Hide Save a Copy Alt Ctrl S ane Save as Template Check In Expand Save for Web amp Devices Alt Shift Ctrl S Flatten Transparent Revert F12 P Pen Place Slice Save for Microsoft Office Export Path Scripts gt Blend Document Setup Alt Ctrl P Clipping Mask Document Color Mode gt File Info Alt Shift Ctrl 1 Compound Path Print Ctrl P Graph Ctri Q Exit Window New Wi
166. button and enter a column name into the open dialog box When a new attribute column is created its type will be automatically set to string When the dialog box closes and plotting begins the attribute value will be added to the layer each time a point is plotted NOTE If the Edit User Attribute For Current Layer dialog box is opened while plotting is in progress the plotting will be paused This allows the necessary changes to be made Upon closing the dialog box all the points which would have been plotted will be plotted and will reflect the changes just made 156 Chapter 16 MAP GPS Edit User Attribute for Current Layer Record Sentence Log Accessed from the MAP GPS menu Browse Allows the user to navigate to a location to save the log MAP GPS Log File Settings Log File Allows the user to specify to a location to record the log Append Will add new information at the end of the file if it already Log File Browse contains log information Append vemte Overwrite Will overwrite information in the specified file if it contains any FUNCTIONALITY The Record Sentence Log feature allows for all information gathered from the GPS to be saved to a text file This information can be used for back up or debugging purposes or imported at a later time into a new document In addition to being able to record to the file the user is given the options of adding to an existing file or overwriting any information whi
167. by a newer version that uses an order 13 polynomial to further adjust the results achieved using this projection The DanishSystem34 projection has the following parameters e Region Region is used to indicate which part of Denmark the projection is being applied to The valid region values are as follows Jylland j oe or Sj lland m sy or 2 Bornholm p ug or 3 National aig Aje or 4 Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems MAPublisher Supported Projections A2 25 DANISH SYSTEM 34 1999 1999 variation using order 13 polynomial This projection is a variation of the Transverse Mercator projection used in Denmark The projection consists of a base UTM zones 32 and 33 calculation which is then adjusted by an order 11 polynomial and then further adjusted by an order 13 polynomial Note that a previous version of this projection was used up until 1999 based solely on the order 11 polynomial This newer version is a further refinement of those results using the additional order 13 polynomial The polynomials used in the Danish System 34 projection were developed by K Poder and K Engsager of Kort and Matrikelstyrelsen The polynomial coefficients can be obtained by contacting Kort and Matrikelstyrelsen The DanishSystem34_99 projection has the following parameters e Region Region is used to indicate which part of Denmark the projection is being applied to The valid region values are as follows
168. cal equal to comparator l Logical not equal to comparator Expression Components Logical less than comparator Logical greater than comparator Mathematical addition operator Mathematical subtraction operator Mathematical division operator Mathematical multiplication operator Items in the Objects list fall into three categories Information on a selected item is displayed in the Description panel Double click to insert an object at the current cursor position Available objects are as follows lt MAP Layer gt List of property columns see page 37 List of attribute columns Constants true Boolean true value false Boolean false value Layer may vary depending on tool For Edit Schema Apply Expression and New Edit Selection Filter the current layer is displayed In the MAP Stylesheet Editor all layers hosted by the stylesheet are displayed Unique values contained in each attribute column can be viewed in the Description panel Descriptions and examples have been provided for each function and parameter in the Description panel Functions ABS ACOS ASIN ATAN CONTAINS COS DEGREES ENDSWITH IF LIKE LOWER NUMBER POW PROPER RADIANS REGEX ROUND SIN SQRT STARTSWITH TAN UPPER Absolute value of anumber Inverse of the cosine of an angle Arcsine of an angle Arctangent of an angle True if source string contains search string Cosine of an angle Converts values from radians to degrees
169. cave toward the central meridian The parallels are equally spaced straight parallel lines perpendicular to the central meridian The poles are represented by lines The length of the poles and of the central meridian will depend on the choice of the latitude of true scale Scale is true along the north and south latitudes specified by the latitude of true scale but the projection is generally distorted The Winkel II projection has the following parameters e Longitude of the Center of the Projection False Easting e Latitude of True Scale False Northing NOTE Only a spherical form of this projection is used The semi major axis of the ellipsoid sphere is used for forward and inverse projection from grid to geodetic coordinates within the system wherein this projection is incorporated WINKEL TRIPEL The Winkel Tripel projection is a modified azimuthal projection that is neither conformal nor equal area Oswald Winkel developed it in 1921 as the average of the Aitoff and Equidistant Cylindrical Equirectangular projections It is used primarily for whole world maps In this projection the central meridian is a straight line Other meridians are equally spaced along the Equator and are concave toward the central meridian The Equator and the poles are straight lines while all other parallels are curves equally spaced along the central meridian and concave toward the nearest pole Scale is true along the central meridian and constant alo
170. ccdenctidecancdydansegaes Seeeadenciesgsereseitetaregas 21 Preparing the Workspace susssesssssesesesosesecsesesesesesesororeree 23 Chapter 2 Map Data File Formats 25 Import and Export Supported Data Formats cece cece eee e eee eees 26 Chapter 3 Importing Map Data 31 APE NADO ve au Hao eee traced eis kn rE EEEE ERRE 32 Advanced IMpPOrt sosirsrrirrsiisoeres d irris EU EEEE EKO PERETE ENEE a 37 Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing 41 C720 fatle 2 g 6 610 ane ee re E EREE E ERE E EEEE 42 MAP Views Panel ssissrresrresiresneesr irtee teri rr ers EnENNE EERE EE ESERE EREE 44 MAP View Editor wasn eteaaeaiene pacathaene ee ctneaepeeseo cee naaeedeeaseenaaase 49 MPCrENIAP VOW 5 ccccodd oxauweses bewksosaee bas eauer coe eeenrerawetuaaiauwanes 53 EPO ire E E E eee E E S 54 MAP Location TOOL osr tereisreiirerrtst isis NERE FIRE EP FENTER E EEEN OERS 57 Chapter 5 MAP Attributes 59 Attri DUTE SOLE WON versre is trarre EENETI EEEE EEEREN 60 MAP AttriDUtES Goctcaan oreadcusheassddsetanenss seees sau CEREN E EEREN ae 63 Find amp Replace Attributes nunnnnsnnnnsusuesussesurneserrerorrerseseeno 65 eae ea E a E N E A E E EE E A T 66 Edit EXPrES SION iepr aner EEE EE EErEE EEEN 68 S O eee Ere EPES E EEE EIEEE RE EETA 72 PDI EXpreSSiON aug greases oe eee es ne EEEE awa eo eene eens 74 Chapter 6 Plotting Points 75 MAP POMNILIPIOUCY sorrir ceed cuexcuaedssecaeeuaaaw cena INEN asides ayeemnrsas 76 PICT CONEIOIOS pcnecregedarxetenydaa
171. ce notes These are freely available from www epsg org NOTE Polynomial datum shifts are generally computed for specific areas of use Since the derivations of the formula are based on a limited number of reference points using the transformation for data outside of the pre determined envelopes may cause unreliable results SIX PARAMETER METHOD Based on the Helmert family of transformations the six parameter transformation is very similar to a seven parameter transformation except it does not contain a scale parameter The Six parameters needed are Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems A2 55 Datum Shifts TEN PARAMETER MOLODENSKY BADEKAS METHOD The Molodensky Badekas 10 parameter transformation method allows for very high accuracy transformation of coordinates between datums over large areas For a detailed reference on Molodensky Badekas coordinate transformations refer to the EPSG Surveying and Positioning Guidance Note Number 7 part 2 www epsg org guides G7 2 html Parameters needed to define a 10 parameter transformation are S a T E e E RCS e e E e TOKYO TO JGD2000 Converts coordinates from the Tokyo datum to the JGD 2000 Japan Geodetic Datum of 2000 using a grid file defined by GSI Japanese Geographical Survey Institute A2 56 Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems Datum Shifts UTM Zone CON A ON BRWHDN Dunn arnrnanrnwnbPPFHPHPPHPRPPPRPW WWWBWWWWWWnNNNNNNNNNNGFDTPSRFRPTFIrTrFIar
172. ch are in yellow Colors are editable PREREQUISITE Web tags must be first setup with the Web Tag Dialog USING EXPORT TO WEB The Web Export Dialog is started from the MAP Web Author panel by clicking the Export to Web button a Layer Control Settings Users may choose to insert a Layer Control panel into the Flash map To do so the option Enable Layer Visibility Toggle must be checked Layers that are checked in the Layer List will be included as toggable in the Layer Control The layers that are not checked are exported but it will not be possible to switch them on and off of the display when the Flash map is opened in a Web browser In general the layers display order is the same as setup in Adobe Illustrator However toggable layers will be displayed at the top of the non toggable layers 144 Chapter 15 MAP Web Author Export to Web The style of the Layer Control is set through the Layer Control list box The two styles options are Built in Flash Datagrid the control is automatically placed on the Flash document and cannot be modified Layers Major city names Major cities N IS IS Canada province e External layerCheckboxes js Check boxes are placed outside the Flash map The great advantage of this option is that the position and layout of the check boxes can be re arranged using HTML tags By default they are placed at the top of the Flash map Major city names Major cities V Canada province V
173. ch may be in the specified file USING THE RECORD LOG SETTINGS DIALOG BOX The Record Log Settings dialog box requires either navigation to a directory or manual specification of a location to which the log file is to be saved Once a directory has been specified the file name for the Record Log must be specified This file will be saved as a standard text file that is readable in Notepad or any other plain text capable application It may also be used at a later date to import the log information into a new or existing document as MAP features In addition to specifying a file name and location either the Append option or the Overwrite option must be specified The Append option will add all new information to the end of the file if the selected file contains information The Overwrite option will overwrite any information currently contained in the specified file with the new information received NOTE Once a Record Log file has been specified using the Overwrite option and plotting started any interruption to the plotting for example evoking a Stop Scanning operation will result in the saved log file being overwritten by new log data once scanning and plotting restart If it is desired that a complete session log be created and saved which is not overwritten each time plotting is stopped and restarted the Append option should be used Chapter 16 MAP GPS 157 Record Sentence Log Playback Sentence Log Accessed from the MAP GPS menu B
174. coordinates the projection type and any parameters specific to the projection type Geodetic coordinate systems use Latitude and Longitude to define the position on the Earth and incorporate angular units of measurement such as degrees Projected coordinate systems consist of a two or three dimensional system in which each point on the plane is defined by an x y coordinate and having an origin where the axes intersect Projected coordinate systems incorporate linear units of measurement for the measurement of area distance and direction Within MAPublisher coordinate systems are organized in coordinate system categories This structure allows grouping into a logical collection for convenience per continent country or local sub divisions The folders listed below represent the default schema for the coordinate systems in the Geodetic Datasource dialog box Each folder option may be expanded by clicking the node adjacent to the folder name A2 14 Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems The Geodetic Datasource ALL Lists all the coordinate systems available in the database RECENT Lists the last 10 coordinate systems used SEARCH Lists the most recent results of a Search operation GEODETIC Lists the geodetic coordinate systems in the database PROJECTED Lists the projected coordinate systems in the database Folder Angular Units Coordinate Points Coordinate Systems All Recent E
175. ct Center to place the centre the label on the generated text path Labels can be modified if they exceed the length of the line in the current default font size First check the Adjust label if larger than line option to activate the label rules Rules are executed by MAPublisher in a hierarchical order and can be reordered by clicking the rule and clicking the Up or Down button Checking the Reduce font size option will allow you to reduce the size of the font to a specified minimum size in points Checking Reduce horizontal scaling allows text to be scaled down horizontally by the percentage specified Feature Text Label also provides an additional option not applicable in MAP Tagger If any of the labels have been adjusted in size due to the activation of a line adjustment rule all labels can be resized to the same size by checking the Set all labels to the same minimum font size option If no rules are enabled MAPublisher will not perform any label scaling If none of the rules specified in the panel can be satisfied MAPublisher will default to placing the label centered over the line Also note that text generated for Line labels will be automatically orientated above the lines irrespective of the direction of line digitization Area Label MAPublisher will place Area labels intelligently depending on the shape and size of the area polygon Click the Area Labels button to assign MAPublisher Area Label Settings Decide how to pl
176. d delete features to MAP Layers In addition to this MAPublisher also provides its own tools for creating and managing artwork MAP Area Tools are designed to draw rectangular and elliptical areas of specified dimensions in MAP Units The MAP Vector Crop Tool will trim all the vector data on all active layers falling outside of a crop area The topics covered in this section are as follows MAP Area Tool MAP Vector Crop Tool Chapter 7 Drawing Tools 81 MAP Area Tools Tools gt MAP Area Tool Box il MAP Area Tool Ellipse Go Add Area Width Height Enter the width and Width B O mi ok height for the area to be drawn e Height 0 mi Cancel Center area on click Check this option Units Select a map or page unit to be Center area on click if you want the area to be drawn Mile B used for width and height values centered on the click point FUNCTIONALITY By using the MAP Area tools areas of exact map dimensions can be quickly added to any MAP Layer and its related attribute table Whenever an area is created using the MAP Area tools any objects that fall inside the area in whole or part will be automatically selected USING THE MAP AREA TOOLS Overview MAPublisher offers Ellipse and Rectangle drawing tools Select the shape you require from the main Adobe Illustrator Toolbar and select the MAP Layer which contains the coordinate system on which you want
177. d to be seen by an observer at the origin of the coordinate frame looking in the positive direction of the axis about which the rotation is taking place Coordinate Frame Rotation CFR Rotation is positive counter clockwise as may be imagined to be seen by an observer at the origin of the coordinate frame looking in the positive direction of the axis about which the rotation is taking place CANADIAN NATIONAL TRANSFORMATION VERSION 2 NTV2 MAPublisher supports the definition of a geodetic datum based on the Canadian National Transformation Version 2 0 directly The Canadian National Transformation originally defined an accurate transformation from NAD27 to NAD83 for Canada but the method has been adopted by Australia New Zealand Spain and several other locations around the world The shift values for a geographic area are stored in a single grid file representing latitude and longitude shifts named with the extension gsb Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems A2 51 Datum Shifts MAPublisher uses grid files in a format published and provided by the Canadian Government While the definition of this method is supported it does require additional files to implement new datum transformations using this method Contact information is as follows Address Natural Resources Canada Phone 613 995 4410 Geodetic Survey Division FAX 613 995 3215 Geomatics Canada Email information geod NRCan gc ca Room 440 Web www geod NRCan gc ca
178. date of your try out version Note that this file has been automatically generated by Avenza and therefore manually editing will not re activate MAPublisher 4 If you have moved your license to a new computer you must notify Avenza and request a rehosting To organize a rehosting email activation avenza com and provide your MAPublisher 8 serial number along with the new machine ID The new machine ID can be found by selecting the Telephone Email option in the MAPublisher Activation Wizard on the new computer Can I run two different versions of MAPublisher at the same time You can run different full version releases i e 8 x and 7 x if you have two versions of Adobe Illustrator For example MAPublisher 8 using Adobe Illustrator CS3 and MAPublisher 7 6 using Adobe Illustrator CS2 You cannot run two point releases of MAPublisher 8 x on the same machine even if you have two different versions of Adobe Illustrator Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Al 15 Frequently Asked Questions How can I move my MAPublisher license to a new computer Unless you have purchased a floating license MAPublisher is licensed for use on one machine only and includes a protection mechanism that prevents activation on more than one computer If you wish to move your license permanently to a new computer please perform the following steps 1 Completely remove MAPublisher from the existing computer 2 Install MAPublisher on the new computer 3 Launch Ado
179. der The process of generating an image by means of a computer program Resolution The number of dots per inch displayed on screen or printed to an output device Rhumb line A line on the surface of the Earth cutting all meridians at the same angle A rhumb line shows true direction Parallels and meridians which also maintain constant true directions may be considered special cases of the rhumb line A rhumb line is a straight line on a Mercator projection A straight rhumb line does not show the shortest distance between points unless the points are on the Equator or on the same meridian RS Remote Sensing Rubber sheeting A procedure to adjust the coordinates all of the data points in a dataset to allow a more accurate match between known locations and a few data points within the dataset Rubber sheeting also known as rubber banding preserves the interconnectivity or topology between points and objects through stretching shrinking or re orienting their interconnecting lines S SAIF Spatial Archive and Interchange Format SAIF is a Canadian Draft National Standard for Geomatics data interchange It is a specification for data which includes an object oriented data model and a language for describing both Spatial and non spatial data Scale The relation between the size of an object on a map and its size in the real world Scanner A device for converting images from maps or photographs of part of the real world into digital
180. der established in Edit Schema To create a new column click the Add button and input the desired column properties To delete an existing column choose it from the available list and click the Delete button Click OK to confirm your edits to the attribute structure on the selected layer These edits will immediately be visible in the MAP Attributes panel EDIT COLUMN Edit Schema can also be accessed via the Edit Column context menu Within the MAP Attributes panel select the column you wish to edit right click the column heading or cell and click Edit This opens the Edit Schema dialog box with the same column immediately selected in the column list NOTES e MAPublisher does not allow a space to be entered in a column name When a space is entered in a column name an underscore is input instead This will avoid complications when exporting to external formats that might not support spaces e Some external file formats have limits on the number of characters allowed for field names Therefore during the export from MAPublisher some field names might get truncated to comply to the chosen external file format For example ESRI shapefiles are limited to 10 characters confirmed up to ArcGIS 9 2 ESRI Interchange File e00 to 16 characters MapInfo to 30 characters Chapter 5 MAP Attributes 67 Edit Schema Edit Expression Accessed from Edit Schema Apply Expression New Edit Selection Filter MAP Stylesheet Editor Edit Express
181. device Additionally auxiliary settings may be used to plot points on separate layers when either a change in speed or a change in heading is observed when concurrently using one of the previously mentioned plotting options MAP GPS also provides the ability to automatically apply user defined attributes for specific layers while plotting and to record a log file of information received from the GPS device which may then be played back into an Adobe Illustrator document at a later time PREREQUISITES Prior to being able to use MAP GPS it is required to have a compatible GPS receiver Supported devices include any NMEA compliant device which has either serial USB and or Bluetooth connection options Prior to interacting with the GPS device the proper settings must be specified in the Device Settings dialog box so that the GPS can communicate and interact with the MAP GPS software Either a new document or an existing document may be used to begin a GPS session If the appropriate type of layer is selected in the layers panel e g a point layer then points will be plotted on that layer If no layer or an improper layer for the type of plotting action is selected then a new layer will automatically be created of the proper type 150 Chapter 16 MAP GPS MAP GPS Panel USING THE MAP GPS PANEL Start Scanning This feature allows MAPublisher to interact with the specified GPS device When the Start Scanning button is clicked the sett
182. dia files images Source Media Folder ial Absolute Path Relative Path An empty relative path indicates the same folder as the document Relative Path Select this option to set a path relative to the current location of the Adobe Illustrator document best used when files have to be moved Newly created documents must be saved Remove Click this button to clear the for this option to be enabled current Source Media Folder settings FUNCTIONALITY The MAP Web Author tool exports a MAPublisher document as an interactive Flash map for Web display Together with the map artwork Web tags callout bubbles are exported Prior to the export process the MAP Web Author panel is used to create edit add or modify these interactive objects The Web tags can either be populated one object at the time or for a selection of objects Multiple The information can be entered manually or extracted from the MAP Attributes fields when available for the object layer In Multiple Web tagging mode the same text format is applied to all Web tags Individual Web tags can be edited later on through the Modify dialog box Text and image formatting is done using simple HTML codes the results can be checked in the Callout Preview window available in the Web Tag Dialog see page 139 Additional settings are available during the export process see page 143 such as callout bubble colour selection colour etc 136 Cha
183. dinates Conversions from projected coordinates always use the UTM projection currently specified by the parameters NOTE In MAPublisher Military Grid Reference System MGRS and U S National Grid USNG coordinate systems are defined with a UTM projection and a point style with the appropriate string format option V AND H V and H Projection for lat and long transform to the V ertical and H orizontal coordinates used for wired telephone AT amp T Created by Jay K Donald of AT amp T in 1957 to simplify the calculation of distance between telephone rate centers The system is based on Donald Elliptic Projection It is a two point equidistant projection for the continental United States and Canada It uses units of the square root of one tenth of a mile The Vand H projection has no parameters VAN DER GRINTEN This projection is neither conformal nor equal area but shows the globe enclosed in a circle This projection is exclusively used for world maps The central meridian and Equator are straight lines with scale true along the equator only When Van der Grinten is selected in the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box you will need to enter the following parameters e False Northing and False Easting e Longitude of the Center of the Projection e Radius of the Sphere A2 48 Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems MAPublisher Supported Projections VAN DER GRINTEN IV This projection is neither conformal nor equal area but
184. discussed in detail later in this section Reprojecting MAP Layers via MAP Views Panel The MAP Views panel can be used to move Adobe Illustrator layers from one MAP View to another enabling you to reproject vector art quickly Layers can be moved via drag and drop or with the new Switch MAP View button E Raster imagery cannot be reprojected with MAPublisher For example if you have two imported data layers one in UTM projection and the other in latitude longitude MAPublisher will produce two distinct MAP Views each holding the associated MAP Layer If you wish to reproject the layer which is in UTM into Lat Long drag it from the UTM MAP View and drop it into the Lat Long MAP View MAPublisher will automatically reproject the layer to match the destination MAP View If you are reprojecting in this manner and either the origin or destination MAP View does not contain a coordinate system you will be presented with the Missing Coordinate System dialog box after you drag and drop In essence both MAP Views must contain a coordinate system This dialog box will allow you to specify one of the following 1 Specify custom coordinate system allows you to specify the projection of the named MAP View via the Source Coordinate System function 2 Same as allows you to specify the coordinate system of the named MAP View by choosing a coordinate system which already exists in a MAP View in your document NOTE Many transformations will inhere
185. diting the name here will change the name of the resultant or existing MAP View Page Anchors Current page anchors are displayed in the Data Extents LL Lower Left Corner X Y text boxes in the current document units As discussed in the section on georeferencing at the beginning of this chapter the default page anchors are 0 0 in document units Editing the page anchor values will move the data relative to the lower left location of the data Entering negative values will move the data to the left or down entering positive values will move the data to the right or up There are also two graphical ways to edit page anchors Firstly the data can be assigned to respective positions in the document by clicking a respective Alignment Control button of which there are nine positional options Conversely dragging the green data preview rectangle around the page in the Preview Pane will update the Page Anchor values accordingly Note that editing Page Anchors will not affect data integrity It simply means that the lower left corner of the data in coordinate units Map Anchors is located at this new document position Scale The scale of the current MAP View is shown in the Scale text box For MAP Views in projected coordinate system the scale value is a real world scale exact ratio linear distance on the page over distance on the ground For MAP Views in geodetic coordinate system i e Lat Long format in angular unit the scale value is approximat
186. dix 1 Technical Reference Guide MAPublisher Unicode Support Mac OS X Unicode Support Working with Images File Directory Filename File Directory Filename Data Format i Register Image Register Image Export Image Export Image Limited su ppo rt not all combinations of Unicode characters are supported a A1 14 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide MAPublisher Unicode Support Frequently Asked Questions This section presents a number of frequently asked questions regarding the use of MAPublisher If the answer to your question is not included here please consult the online FAQs at http www avenza com products faqg html or the online MAPublisher Forum at http www avenza com forum In addition there is a US Census Bureau GIS FAQ database at http www census gov geo www tiger faq index html INSTALLATION ACTIVATION ISSUES The MAPublisher plug in is in the Plug ins folder but the filters do not all show up in Adobe Illustrator Try exiting out of Adobe Illustrator deleting the Adobe Illustrator preferences and plug in cache files and then restarting Adobe Illustrator They are named A Prefs Windows or Adobe Illustrator Prefs Mac OS X and Plug in Cache They are generally found in the directories Illustrator CS2 and CS3 Windows XP Documents and Settings user name Application Data Adobe Adobe Illustrator CSXX Settings Windows Vista Users user name AppData Roaming Adobe Adobe Illustrator
187. drag this layer back into your MAP View specifying Area as the feature type You can now export your Text as Area objects Since the text is no longer text you can no longer modify the fonts We recommend that you make a copy of the original text objects before you do this process These hints on how to transfer Adobe Illustrator files are necessary because the graphics environment handles text and curves differently and they need some modification in order for the GIS software to represent these accurately TIPS ON EXPORTING DATA TABLES You can export any data tables that are linked to physical features in MAPublisher 1 To export as a comma delimited data table export the desired features as MapInfo mid mif format The export file with the extension mid will contain your attribute data in comma delimited form 2 To export as a DBF data table export the desired features as ArcView shape files format The export file with the extension dbf will contain your attribute data in standard DBF format Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Al 35 General Tips and Hints DOUGLAS PEUCKER LINE SIMPLIFICATION The Douglas Peucker algorithm was primarily designed to reduce the number of points required to represent a vector line A common problem in digital cartography and geographic information systems can occur when lines are generated automatically from a mathematical function which records points at a fixed interval regardless if they are all l
188. e feet for projected coordinate systems The Proximity value or simplification tolerance is based on the vertical difference between the begin end line and points off a line NOT the distance between anchor points on the line The Douglas Peucker algorithm takes the proximity value and iterates through the line vertices to determine the points that fall within the specified proximity distance off the line and removes those vertices Once all vertices are determined to be greater than the proximity value the line processing ends A smaller proximity value will usually result in a fewer number of nodes being removed USING SIMPLIFY LINES To access the function click the menu Filter gt MAP Lines gt Simplify Lines or the MAPublisher toolbar button ue Enter a proximity value in Page Units or Map Units by making a selection from the Units drop down list Page Units will be simply the units of the current document Enter a proximity value in the unit specified by typing a value or by using the arrows Click the Preview button to see the simplification result Once the result is correct click OK to perform the actual simplification It is always a good idea to experiment with different proximity values in order to achieve the desired results particular to your scale and coverage area In Adobe Illustrator CS4 Simplify Lines is found in the Object gt Filters gt MAP Lines menu Chapter 8 Line Functions 91 Simplify Lines RESULTS A
189. e rapidly and your computer loses speed This is due to the memory management MAPublisher reserves a fairly large amount of memory for each import action which is not always returned when the import is done The solution is simple save your file close it and open it again It s not even necessary to close Adobe Illustrator itself By closing the file the reserved memory is properly returned How can I improve the speed of my data import Many GIS data files are large and when a series of such files is imported you may find that the import filter starts to run more slowly This is because scratch and memory allocations are being used up Try the following suggestions e Close the MAP Attributes panel prior to importing data e Periodically save your work then close and reopen the file This will free up the available scratch memory e Reduce the maximum number of undoes since they all reside in memory e See the Memory Considerations section for other suggestions pages A1 25 and A1 26 A1 16 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Frequently Asked Questions DATA IMPORT ISSUES Why do my files appear squashed after import They are probably stored in geographic or lat long coordinates Data in lat long usually looks squashed You can project them into an alternate map projection using the MAP View Editor see chapter 4 What alternatives are there for importing a file format not supported by MAPublisher We provide a web pag
190. e Formats Import and Export Supported Data Formats Importing Map Data The Import filters are the main starting point for most users wanting to work with GIS map data in Adobe Illustrator These are the filters that must be used to import GIS data files set the initial map scale and define your cartographic workspace to start making maps MAPublisher 8 supports import of the following GIS data formats CAD dxf dwg ESRI Interchange File e00 ESRI ArcInfo Generate gen ESRI Shapefile shp GML Simple Features 2 0 MapInfo Interchange mif mid MapInfo Table tab MicroStation Design dgn Not supported under Mac PPC Rosetta Delimited Text Data txt csv tsv KML kml S 57 000 TIGER Line rt1 bw1 USGS Digital Line Graph dlg opt USGS Spatial Data Transfer Standard SDTS ddf See chapter 2 for a description of these formats There are two Import filters available which will be discussed in detail in this section Simple Import This filter is designed to provide a fast way to import one file or several files of the same data format and coordinate system into Adobe Illustrator Advanced Import This filter provides functionality to import a number of files of differing data type and or coordinate systems into Adobe Illustrator Chapter 3 Importing Map Data 31 Simple Import File gt Import Map Data gt Simple and MAP Toolbar Format S
191. e Label Settings In Adobe Illustrator CS4 Feature Text Label is found in the Object gt Filters gt MAP Legend menu Chapter 10 Labeling Functions 103 Feature Text Label MAPublisher controls where text is placed along lines by using the Distance from start option Selecting Auto will place text at the midpoint for straight lines and for curved lines this will find the smoothest portion of the curved line closest to the midpoint Selecting Fixed the distance from start is set as a percentage of the length of the line Flip upside down labels is enabled by default and will automatically orient labels correctly if your lines are flipped Disabling this feature will not flip labels If the Line Smoothing option is used MAPublisher creates a smoothed path for each text object in the selected Text layer and places the text along this path at the specified Offset value The labels can then be dragged and positioned at any position along a line If the Line Smoothing option is not selected the labels follow the original path The Label Position option allows for the selection of the vertical position of the labels relative to the line Three op tions are available Baseline Descender and Center e Select Baseline to place labels above the generated text path e Select Descender to place the portion of a letter in a Latin derived alphabet that normally extends below the baseline of a particular font above the generated text path e Sele
192. e centerline It was adopted for use in the Madagasgar grid system in 1926 When Laborde is selected in the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box you will need to enter the following parameters e False Northing and False Easting e Scale Factor e Origin Latitude e Azimuth e Origin Longitude centerline LAMBERT CONFORMAL CONIC 2 PARALLELS The Lambert Conformal Conic 2 parallel projection is a map projection in which the scale is true along two standard parallels and the true shape of small areas is preserved Parallels are unequally spaced arcs of concentric circles spaced closer to each other near the center of the map The meridians are equally spaced and intersect the parallels at right angles The scale is true along two standard parallels The Lambert Conformal Conic projection is widely used in atlases in aeronautical charts and in plane coordinate systems in surveying It is also used in the State Plane Coordinate System for states with large east west extents When Lambert Conformal Conic is selected in the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box you will need to enter the following parameters e False Northing and False Easting e Latitude of the Southern Standard Parallel e Longitude of the Central Meridian e Latitude of the Northern Standard Parallel e Latitude of the Origin of the Projection LAMBERT CONFORMAL CONIC EXTENDED This is a variation of the standard Lambert Conformal Conic projection that is provided for the defin
193. e left of the zero be applied to the text Labeling mark Text style ol Normal Character Sty RJ Number of sub intervals Add interval left of 0 Display scale value Check eal Labelling Set a style for labels option to display the scale Mi Display scale value above eH from the Character Styles value above or below the bar EA panel Display the scale value Display page to map units ratio above E m and specify its location Display page to map units ratio Page units for captions inch Display a page to map units Check this option to show the ratio and choose its location M Display units to right of last interval label Display the units used in each bar if required scale as page unit to map unit ratio Page units is selectable from cm mm orinch t Ifthe Text style list does not contain a recently created character style Display units Check this option simply return to the Character Style panel double click this style and click to display the interval unit on OK in the Character Style Options dialog box This forces Adobe Illustrator the scale bar to re load the list of character styles FUNCTIONALITY MAPublisher contains ten different scale bar designs that you may incorporate into your map After creation MAPublisher scale bars can be subsequently resized via a bounding box for example to add or remove component intervals Scale bars can also be edited by selecting the Object
194. e map attributes of the MAP Layer being labelled MAPublisher provides two methods of adding labels to your map both of which contain options to place labels intelligently using defined label settings One way to create feature labels is to first select all the features you want to be labelled and use Feature Text Label to label all of them by specified attribute values An alternate method involves using the MAP Tagger Tool to apply labels individually also by specified attribute values Topics covered in this section are Feature Text Label MAP Tagger Tool Chapter 10 Labeling Functions 101 Labelling Tools For Feature Text Label and MAP Tagger Tool Tentara Text Label layr Lederle Source Layer Lists the Point Line and Area e Seren Laar Tak Teal Layee mr layers which can be labelled For Feature RETTES he IE em tent Text Label only layers containing selected 1D beri prenei ne r sae saj E mrve jame items are listed 2 erar KAE E caray ame e Text layer For each Source Layer select the destination text layer you wish to place the Source Column Select the column that tsbii generated text labels on contains the values you wish to use to e 7 label the selected features he oie a Da Label Settings Click the appropriate button kudi i See Settings panels below to assign label settings and rules for each P layer type see below kiii
195. e matching columns contains values in lowercase and the other contains values in uppercase for example you should not check this box RESULTS When you click OK the data table will be added to the attribute table on the destination MAP Layer and may be viewed in the MAP Attributes panel Notice that the matching column in your data table has also been added but has been appended with a 1 if the column names were identical in the source and destination tables Chapter 5 MAP Attributes 73 Join Table Apply Expression MAP Attributes panel gt Apply Expression Apply Expression Apply to Select the attribute column on which to apply the expression Attribute and MAPublisher Apply to Density Property columns can be assigned expressions Expression Enter the expression wo The expression is valid directly into the entry field or click the Browse button to access the Edit Expression function see page 68 Expression POPULATION Area Expression Validity Indicates if the expression is valid or invalid If invalid additional info is reported FUNCTIONALITY The Apply Expression tool allows for the assignment and application of expressions to currently selected art for the purpose of assigning attributes assigning properties or transforming artwork For example the tool can be used to assign attribute values based on values in other columns assign graphic styles to selected elements or transform d
196. e may be times when you wish to quickly add a point or a small group of points to your map but you do not have a GIS or ASCII file containing these points ready for import Alternatively your map may be in a projection that holds coordinates in linear units yet the coordinates of your point locations are in angular units i e degrees Provided you have a fully specified MAP View and know the coordinates coordinate system and unit can be specified for the locations you wish to plot you can use the MAPublisher Point Plotter to have your points automatically added at their correct locations Topics covered in this section are MAP Point Plotter Plot Centroids Chapter 6 Plotting Points 75 MAP Point Plotter Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP Point Plotter and MAPublisher Toolbar i E Plot Centroids Current Layer PU ponis RGPS3 MAP PointPlatter x Current Layer Displays the selected layer s name and coordinate system Coordinates Enter the coordinates of the point to be plotted either in MAP units e Coordinates gt or in a different choice of coordinate ee P system Format Decimal Degrees D d I a Format Select the input format iii deg for values in degrees when input Lat deg coordinate system is geodetic Scale Change the size of the chosen symbol if required The arrow keys will increase or decrease the scale value by E 10 incr
197. e that has links to freeware shareware and commercial GIS data translators at http www avenza com support links html lf you cannot find the translator that you need give us a call as we may have other suggestions lam having trouble getting my layers to overlay correctly Both files import correctly when they are imported alone but when import the second file they do not line up as expected They should overlay correctly Probably they are in different coordinate systems It is very important that you ensure that data used within a single mapped area have the same map projection If different data sets for a geographic location have differing coordinate systems the chances are high that they will not overlay on import If the files are of differing coordinate systems any software will give you the same results If the coordinate systems are known you can use the MAP View Editor filter to change all data to a common coordinate system For more information about map projections see http www gisdevelopment net tutorials tuman007pf htm Why do my MapInfo files crash on import or do not import properly There are a couple of possible common causes of this A couple of possibilities may be 1 How did you transfer the file to the machine where it is being imported If you have transferred these files from one operating system to another then you must always use ASCII FTP transfer or the files may be corrupted We have found that you can not rel
198. eb tagging process must be collected and grouped in a folder Source Media Folder If you plan to insert the images using a MAP Attributes field in the Multiple mode remember that you will not be able to change the sizes in the Web Tag Dialog If required image sizes have then to be changed in a picture editor first c Setting document size for the Flash map If the document size hasn t been set at step one document creation it should be modified through the Adobe Illustrator menu File gt Document Setup prior to the Web export NOTE Changing the document size might induce additional edition of the symbol and text sizes as well as stroke widths d Attribute table information to attach the callouts In order to use attributes information for Web tagging they must be organized using the MAPublisher MAP Attributes panel This process might include creating new attribute columns to type Web site links or image file path in that case create a column of type String e Data preparation Run the crop tool simplify lines and remove unneeded attributes 3 USING MAP WEB AUTHOR a Setup the Source Media Folder The user have a choice between entering an absolute or relative path for the Source Media Folder Example Absolute path C Work Flash_Project lmages Relative path Images Chapter 15 MAP Web Author 147 MAP Web Author Workflow NOTE If an image is placed under C Work Flash_Project lmages Mylmage Mylmage1 jpg and the
199. ection from grid to geodetic coordinates within the system wherein this projection is incorporated HOTINE OBLIQUE MERCATOR RECTIFIED SKEW ORTHOMORPHIC The Hotine Oblique Mercator HOM projection is a cylindrical conformal map projection It is similar to the Mercator projection except that the cylinder is wrapped around the sphere so that it touches the surface along the great circle path chosen for the central line instead of along the Earth s equator Scale becomes infinite 90 degrees from the central line and is true along a chosen central line along two straight lines parallel to the central line or along a great circle at an oblique angle The HOM projection is used for geographic regions that are centered along lines that are neither meridians nor parallels but that may be taken as great circle routes passing through the region such as the Alaskan panhandle Two cases of the Hotine Oblique Mercator projection are implemented within MAPublisher differing only in their defining parameters The Hotine Oblique Mercator projection has the following parameters e False Northing and False Easting e Standard Longitude 1st and 2nd Points e Latitude of the Origin of the Projection e Standard parallel 1st and 2nd Points e Scale factor Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems A2 33 MAPublisher Supported Projections The Rectified Skew Orthomorphic RSO projection is used throughout the world particularly in Malaysia The RSO projectio
200. ed Specify Specify Source Coordinate System If Perform Coordinate System 3 your MAP View does not currently Transformation Sane aes contain a coordinate system click Check this box to transform your Using Datum Shift Specify here to assign one by opening data from your source coordinate the Specify Source Coordinate system to a selected destination fp _s System tool coordinate system Info Click this button to view Same as Check this option to Specify Destination Coordinate System the parameters of a selected transform to a coordinate system Click this button to open the Specify coordinate system that matches that of an existing Destination Coordinate System Specify Datum Shift Click this button MAP View right then specify the destination to specify a new datum shift coordinate system for the resulting paci transformation FUNCTIONALITY The MAP View Editor can be accessed as part of the Advanced Import process chapter 3 or from the MAP Views panel To access via the Advanced Import process click the Create new option in the Destination MAP View section and then click the Editor button to open the dialog box From the MAP Views panel select the MAP View you wish to edit and then select Edit under the Options arrow in the upper right corner of the panel Conversely you can double click the MAP View to open the MAP View Editor The MAP View Editor has a variety of purposes It will allow you to transform coordina
201. ed discussions Subscribe by sending an email to majordomo avenza com with the statement subscribe map mac lt emailaddress gt in the body of the message Substitute your actual email address for lt emailaddress gt Contacting Avenza Technical Support Avenza offers a number of methods for direct communication with our qualified and experienced technical experts Please have your MAPublisher registration details handy to get prompt attention and include it in any email correspondence Support issues are handled on a first come first served basis Avenza does not guarantee a response within any specified time MAPublisher Maintenance Program subscribers receive free and unlimited support All others are eligible for support at the rate of US 49 per incident e email support avenza com online form http www avenza com support form html e phone 1 416 487 6442 A1 30 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Technical Support Options MAPUBLISHER MAINTENANCE PROGRAM MMP The MAPublisher Maintenance Program is a subscription based service plan that guarantees its members e unlimited priority technical support guaranteed same business day 9 4 EST or next business day response e unlimited telephone support 1 416 487 6442 e free MAPublisher updates e free MAPublisher version upgrades e additional discounts and offers available to MMP members only Your MAPublisher purchase includes a one year membership in the MAPublisher Mainte
202. ed for forward and inverse projection from grid to geodetic coordinates within the syste wherein this projection is incorporated ECKERT IlI The Eckert IIl projection is a pseudocylindrical projection that is neither conformal nor equal area This projection was presented by Max Eckert in 1906 and is used primarily for world maps Meridians in this projection are equally spaced semi ellipses concave toward the central meridian The central meridian is a straight line half as long as the Equator Parallels are represented by equally spaced straight parallel lines that are perpendicular to the central meridian Poles are represented by lines half as long as the Equator This projection is symmetrical about the central meridian or the Equator Scale is true along latitudes 35 58 N and S and constant along any given latitude The Eckertlll projection has the following parameters e Longitude of the Center of the Projection e False Easting e False Northing NOTE Only a spherical form of this projection is used The semi major axis of the ellipsoid sphere is used for forward and inverse projection from grid to geodetic coordinates within the system wherein this projection is incorporated Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems A2 27 MAPublisher Supported Projections ECKERT IV The Eckert IV was created by Max Eckert in 1906 and is used for world maps Both are Pseudocylindrical projections whose central meridian is a straight line
203. ed to Column X Value 3 Style D assigned to Column X Value 4 etc Appendix3 MAPublisher8HowTo sForLegacyUsers A3 1 CREATING STYLE RULES BASED ON MULTIBLE ATTRIBUTE COLUMNS Assign Legend Info previously provided options to assign legend criteria to legend elements based on values in multiple attribute columns This functionality can now be achieved using Advanced expressions in the MAP Stylesheet Editor Choose the Advanced option to compose advanced expressions The following are some examples of multi column expressions in a world countries stylesheet using a string type column named CONTINENT and an integer type column named POPULATION CONTINENT Africa AND POPULATION lt 1000000 Result only African countries with populations less than one million are assigned the selected style CONTINENT Africa OR POPULATION lt 1000000 Result all African countries and all countries with populations less than one million are assigned the selected style CONTAINS CONTINENT America AND POPULATION gt 1000000 Result only countries in North and South America with populations more than one million are assigned the selected style CONTINENT Europe AND POPULATION gt 1000000 OR CONTINENT Asia AND POPULATION gt 10000000 Result countries in Europe with populations more than one million and countries in Asia with populations more than ten million are assigned the selected style NUMBER OF UNIQUE ATTRIBUTES Unique
204. ed using the common formula 1 111 353m metres per degree at the equator This is not an accurate number because the formula is only valid at the equator but it is more intuitive for cartographic considerations This text box is editable allowing you to quickly specify an alternate scale Furthermore the up and down buttons will allow you to fine tune scales by increasing or decreasing a scale by 10 of the starting value The Auto Scale button will allow you to quickly fit the data to the page extents Clicking this button will edit the scale and page anchors so that it is located in the centre of document Transforming a Coordinate System To transform to another coordinate system in the MAP View Editor the Perform Coordinate System Transformation box must be checked Clicking the Specify button in the Perform Coordinate System Transformation frame opens the Specify Destination Coordinate System dialog box In the Specify Destination Coordinate System dialog box coordinate system folders are organized into geodetic and projected systems and then generally according to continents and countries to ease the process of choosing a coordinate system When a folder is selected the list on the right shows the coordinate systems belonging to this 50 Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing MAP View Editor folder When the All folder is selected the view lists all of the coordinate systems in the database and if you click this folder it may take
205. eear sarah ETEEN EEEE 79 Contents V vi Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Contents Drawing Tools MAP Area Tools 1124020 eseua cdasedweddviaidwessbeeecean MAP Vector Crop TOO i060 0cdve ctsrearesen ss eevnetacees Line Functions Bumer LINES 44 coersuanecg dee cuksoueuiards aieeeenerds FID EINES 5 ans ea accra terrne Enr E Rik aise aie RA Ve aA E EIIE EE E E eet E E ace JOM POINTS peerrrirrie eer di nsen rE AEE Simply LINES serrr irrar i nenia kr S EEEN EE NLI RENE EENS MAP Stylesheets MAP Stylesheets Panel cc ccc eee eee eeeeeenes MAP Stylesheet Editor cece ccc eee eee eees Labelling Functions PAGING 100 loc pda ceureu vende eeaeedensyeeee sanennnd Feature Text Label ccc cece ccc eee eet eeeeeee MAP Tagger Tool wneweeeaeassnseeatnadesseseaeeeeaennes Making Selections MAP Selection Filters 0 cc cece cee cee ee eee eee MAP Selection Stats 0 cc cee ce cee cee eee eee eee Working With Images Register Image a bse ee seieeecgertieed doesent ehetestes BROOM IMAJO ereas En AREARE Grids and Indexes Grids and Graticules lt sccdavccacovedsoedancdcsaseesaaes Make Index ccc ccc ce ccc eee e cee eeeeeeeees Scale Bars and North Arrows Scale Bal svaciuiuaneoeerweantsaaksaous dseut cures EREINEN Create North Arrow ccc ce cee ccc cece cence eeeees MAP We
206. elect the data type you Simple Import wish to import This drop down list shows the names of all MAPublisher t SRI Sh supported data types Format S __ bd Dataset ints Avenza MAPublisher 8 Tutorial Data canada shp Encoding System i Settings Dataset Displays the directory path and filename for the currently selected file s You can also manually type in the dataset location here Source Coordinate System NAD27 Source Coordinate System Provides a description of the coordinate system and units detected in the data source C Same as canada Clear Click this button to clear the existing source coordinate system Specify If the coordinate system of the selected file s is known but it was not automatically detected by the program click here This will open the Specify Source Coordinate System dialog box below Same as Check this option in order to assign a coordinate system that matches that of an existing MAP View RELATED TOOLS Specify Source Coordinate System Accessed via the Specify button Sond ina Syren D iisvj i D JPR ee aie Kii avert Pears iat barih Phi galt sai Cario Dun C pooma and Sevan A e Appas Dau der Pb Ipi een aml Eae T empia Aare gt hez Coordi Term at Bell Coordinate Systems Choose a category appropriate to the data to be imported To view all of the coordinate systems select All For a list of the last
207. election filter s e Addto Current Selection Adds any art on the current layer that satisfies the chosen selection filter s to the current selection e Remove from Current Selection Deselects any art on the current layer that is selected and satisfies the chosen selection filter s e Get Subset of Current Selection Deselects any art on the current layer that is selected and does not satisfy the chosen selection filter s Chapter 11 Making Selections 111 MAP Selection Filters MAP Selection Stats Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP Selection Stats or MAP Toolbar iy AandR All and Reverse You can choose to either select all of the features on the Number Selected Number Existing The field on the MAP Selection Stats selected MAP Layer or reverse the current left represents the number of selected objects eae een selection on the active MAP Layer The field on the right z z displays the total number of objects of a given Areas 44 Recall Restores a selection that has been feature on the active MAP Layer saved to memory Layer The current MAP Layer and feature type Save Save the current selection to memory so Clear Removes the saved selection from that it can be recalled later memory MOR Selects both the saved and currently MAND Selects the saved MXOR Selects both the saved and currently selected features features that are also selected features but also removes from currently selected the selection
208. ements Plot Click to plot the symbol after Display Options RST dinates Nave bern entered i Fa ar Style Choose a symbol to use Click Scale ical oun Ba the symbol name to open the list of n j symbols to choose from Sye d New Symbol 16 Input Coordinate System Plot points Input Coordinate System Select a style using coordinates of the current layer s coordinate system WGS84 for values in 2 Use Current Layers coordinate system MaPublisher Default Symbol degrees or when this option is selected Blue Bird click the Select button to open the Select Use WGS 34 Blue Flower Coordinate System dialog box and choose ae Cloud any coordinate system to plot points Grass using the selected coordinate system s _ Red Flower coordinate values Rosette New Symbol 16 NOTE Points can only be plotted on point layers The plot button will be disabled if another map layer type is the active layer PREREQUISITES In order to plot points using the Point Plotter you must first have a fully georeferenced MAP View in your document as this function will use the coordinate system of that MAP View in order to generate points Furthermore you must create a new Adobe Illustrator layer in which your points will be placed as the software will not support multiple feature types on the same layer Remember once you have created a Point layer you must drag it into the desired MAP View specifying P Point i
209. entation is non exhaustive and meant to assist users with limited knowledge of the S 57 format to interpret the data contents more easily The created map must not be used for navigation unless further processing is supervised by a trained hydrographer Helpful Styles amp Symbols gt Graphic Styles This folder contains five graphic style libraries with various useful styles for areas and lines MAP_AreaStyles ai MAP_LineStyles ai DGN_LineStyles ai MIF_AreaStyles ai MIF_LineStyles ai A custom library of styles for use in Area Stylesheets A custom library of style for use in Line Stylesheets A library of MicroStation DGN line styles 1 7 for use in Line Stylesheets A library of MapInfo MIF MID area styles 1 71 for use in Area Stylesheets A library of MapInfo MIF MID line styles 1 77 for use in Line Stylesheets Helpful Styles amp Symbols gt Symbols This folder contains eight symbols libraries categorized per topics Aeronautical symbols ai Bank Symbols ai MAP Symbols ai NorthArrows ai Parks Symbols ai Subway Symbols ai Transit Symbols ai Weather Symbols ai A library of aeronautical point symbols A library of symbols for major world banks for use in Point Stylesheets A library of useful map symbols A library of north arrow symbols for use in the Create North Arrow filter A library of symbols composed from the US National Parks Service font library A library of symbols from the major subway lines in the wor
210. enter of the Projection e Latitude of the Center of the Projection NOTE Only aspherical form of this projection is used The radius of the sphere is used for forward and inverse projection from grid to geodetic coordinates within the system wherein this projection is incorporated You are required to specify a geodetic datum when you use this projection as part of a coordinate system in order to perform geodetic datum shifts into other coordinate systems PERSPECTIVE CONIC The Perspective Conic projection is produced by projecting the Earth perspectively from the center or from some other point onto a tangent or secant cone along the standard parallels The meridians are equally spaced straight lines converging at a common point representing one of the poles The parallels are represented as unequally spaced concentric circular arcs centered on the pole of convergence of the meridians The other pole may not be represented on the projection though in some cases it may appear as a circular arc Along the standard parallels scale is true and there is no distortion Other conformal or equal area conics demonstrate less rapid distortion in a north south direction however and are preferred to the Perspective Conic The PerspectiveConic projection has the following parameters e Longitude of the Center of the Projection e Latitude of Southern Standard Parallel e Latitude of Northern Standard Parallel e False Easting e False Northing Appendix 2 A
211. enting longitude shifts named with the extension los MAPublisher uses grid files in a format published and provided by the National Geodetic Survey Questions about the availability of other NADCON grid files and the NGS NADCON method in general should be addressed to Address National Geodetic Survey Phone 301 713 3242 11400 Rockville Pike Web www ngs noad gov Rockville MD 02852 NTF TO RGF93 Converts coordinates from NTF Nouvelle Triangulation de la France to RGF93 R seau G odesique Fran ais using a grid file defined by IGN Institut G ographique National the French National Geographical Institute The default grid file assumes a Greenwich prime meridian ORDNANCE SURVEY GRID OSTN 02 To cope with the distortions in the OSGB36 TRF different transformations are needed in different parts of the country For this reason the national standard datum transformation between OSGB36 and ETRS89 is not a simple Helmert datum transformation Instead Ordnance Survey has developed a rubber sheet type transformation which works with a transformation grid expressed in easting and northing coordinates The grids of northing and easting shifts between ETRS89 and OSGB36 cover Britain at a resolution of one kilometre From these grids a northing and A2 54 Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems Datum Shifts easting shift for each point to be transformed is obtained by a bi linear interpolation The National Grid Transformation cop
212. enting spatial X Y coordinates that occur along a line between the nodes and help define the shape of the arc VPF Vector Product Format A binary format used by the US Defense Mapping Agency It is well documented and can be sued as an internal format and as a transfer format It carries geographic and attribute information but no display data VPF files are sometimes referred to as VMAP products MAPublisher does not support VPF files W World file A file associated with an image that contains georeferencing information for the image File extensions may be TFW or JPW tiff jpeg World Files IRP Image Report Files or TAB Table files WWW World Wide Web Zone Any well defined region of more or less belt like form Zoom To magnify or reduce the current view of a document Appendix 5 Glossary A5 13 ez
213. enwood map server United States Fish and Wildlife Service The FWS carries a variety of map data in the USGS DLG format http www fws gov USACE IENC download The US Army Corps of Engineer distributes inland ENC files in S 57 format They can be freely downloaded on the web site http www tec army mil echarts inlandnav main html download OTHER VALUABLE MAPPING LINKS The following are some additional places on the Internet where you can find news reviews tips and general GIS cartographic and geographic information GIS Cafe http www giscafe com GIS Dictionary http www geo ed ac uk agidict welcome html GIS Lounge http www gislounge com GIS Development http www gisdevelopment net University of Edinburgh http www geo ed ac uk home gishome html University of Florida Geoplan Center http www geoplan ufl edu US Census Bureau http www census gov Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Al 29 Online Links Technical Support Options MAPublisher support is provided free of charge to customers with a current MAPublisher Maintenance Program MMP subscription All new license and upgrade purchases include a one year MMP subscription Customers without a current MMP subscription may obtain support from a qualified MAPublisher technical specialist at the rate of US 49 per incident TECHNICAL SUPPORT Please consult the FAQs on pages A1 15 to A1 20 the additional how to s on the fol
214. equidistant intervals All meridians on the polar aspect are straight lines Distances and directions measured from the center are true The Azimuthal Equidistant Polar Aspect projection is used in the polar aspect for world maps and maps of the polar hemispheres The PolarEquidistant projection has the following parameters e Longitude of the Central Meridian e False Easting e Latitude of the Origin of the Projection e False Northing BEHRMANN The Behrmann projection is a variation of the generic Equal Area Cylindrical in which the latitude of the standard parallel is always 30 degrees It was originally presented by Walter Behrmann in Berlin in 1910 The Equal Area Cylindrical projection represents an orthographic projection of a sphere onto a cylinder Like other regular cylindrical projections the graticule of the normal Equal Area Cylindrical projection consists of straight equally spaced vertical meridians perpendicular to straight unequally spaced horizontal parallels To achieve equality of area the parallels are spaced form the Equator in proportion to the sine of the latitude This is the simplest equal area projection This projection is supported on spheres only The Behrmann projection has the following parameters e Longitude of the Central Meridian e False Easting e False Northing Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems A2 23 MAPublisher Supported Projections BELGIUM 72 The Belgium 72 Projection is a special case of
215. er GML Schema directory found here Windows XP and Vista C Program Files Avenza MAPublisher 8 Data Source Files GMLSchema Mac OS X Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 MAPublisher Plug In Data Source Files GMLSchema The second option is the most practical if all the GML files are using a same schema only one instance of the xsd file needs to be saved Installed with MAPublisher are three default xsd files e xml xsd generic GML attribute schema e nen3610 xsd and top10nl xsd models standardized in the Netherlands maintained by the Dutch topographic office Kadaster GML files with a missing xsd file or with an invalid attribute schema will cause a GML validation error upon import see chapter 3 Users have the option to either find the appropriate xsd file and copy it to the GML Schema directory or to the GML file directory or to disable the GML validation This option will assign a type string to all attributes See chapter 3 Importing Map Data for more details on these settings MAPublisher supports the import of simple features points lines polygons donuts and aggregates in GML 2 0 and later versions MAPublisher supports export to GML 3 1 1 Mapinfo Interchange mif mid Import and Export Files of this type are most commonly created by the MapInfo product though other products including MAPublisher are also capable of generating files in this format These files exist in pairs where each file has the same name but end
216. er Network nhn_014A001_1_0 gml Datatype error Type InvalidDatatypeValueException installation to avoid having to keep them Message Value does not match regular expression facet 0 9 with your GML files You can try disabling GML validation in the Settings dialog and reloading the file again SIMPLE IMPORT FUNCTIONALITY The Simple Import function provides a fast uncomplicated method of importing map data into Adobe Illustrator Its purpose is for the map maker who has a single piece of map data or several smaller files comprising one dataset of the same format and coordinate system that they wish to import quickly PREREQUISITES In order to import data via Simple Import you must first set up your Adobe Illustrator document Plan for the data that you will subsequently bring in and set up your Adobe Illustrator document accordingly For instance a map of the world would fit well into a page with a Landscape orientation whereas a map of South America would fit best into a page with a Portrait orientation Also plan for the output of the map document if necessary to ensure that your page dimensions are close to the required size that the document will be printed It is far easier to set up the page before the map data has been imported as MAPublisher will interpret these dimensions in the Importer and calculate a map scale for your document accordingly If you do edit the size of your document remember to reset you
217. er of the projection Its scale at a given distance from the center varies less from the scale at the center than the scale of any of the other azimuthal projections All meridians in the polar aspect are straight lines The PolarAzimuthalEqualArea projection has the following parameters e Longitude of Origin e False Easting e Latitude of Origin e False Northing A2 22 Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems MAPublisher Supported Projections AZIMUTHAL EQUIDISTANT The Azimuthal Equidistant projection is neither an equal area nor a conformal projection The outer meridian of a hemisphere on the equatorial aspect is a circle Distances and directions measured from the center are true We recommend using the Azimuthal Equidistant projection for coordinate systems in which distances are measured from an origin The Azimuthal Equidistant projection is used in oblique aspect for atlas maps of continents and in world maps for aviation When Azimuthal Equidistant is selected in the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box you will need to enter the following parameters e False Northing and False Easting e Longitude of the Central Meridian e Latitude of Origin of Projection AZIMUTHAL EQUIDISTANT POLAR ASPECT The Azimuthal Equidistant Polar Aspect projection is neither an equal area nor a conformal projection The outer meridian of a hemisphere on the equatorial aspect is a circle Parallels on the polar projection are circles spaced at
218. ercator v Parameter Value central_meridian 165 false_easting 500000 false_northing 0 latitude_of_origin scale_factor Projected Coordinate System Editor Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems A2 15 The Geodetic Datasource CREATE EDIT AND DELETE GEODETIC DATASOURCE OBJECTS Creating A New Object Category 1 Select Edit Geodetic Datasource from the options menu from the MAPublisher MAP Views panel 2 When necessary select the Geodetic or Projected category and then click the New Category button to create a new object category Deleting An Existing Object Category 1 Select Edit Geodetic Datasource from the options menu from the MAPublisher MAP Views panel 2 When necessary select the Geodetic or Projected category and then click the Delete Category button to delete an object category Creating A New Object Within A Category 1 Select Edit Geodetic Datasource from the options menu from the MAPublisher MAP Views panel 2 When necessary select the Geodetic or Projected category and then click the New Object button to create a new object 3 Inthe New Object dialog box Identification tab enter a name for the new object NOTE The name must be unique 4 Select and enter the appropriate parameters for the envelope point style geodetic value projection vertical reference angular unit linear unit or scale factor unit that the new object is based upon NOTE Fora new coordinate sys
219. erical form of this projection is used The semi major axis of the ellipsoid sphere issued for forward and inverse projection from grid to geodetic coordinates within the system wherein this projection is incorporated GUAM STATE PLANE 27 The State Plane Coordinate System SPCS is not a projection rather it is a system for specifying positions of geodetic stations using plane rectangular coordinates This coordinate system that divides all fifty states of the United States Puerto Rico and the U S Virgin Islands into over 120 numbered sections referred to as zones Each zone has an assigned code number that defines the projection parameters for the region There are four possible projections for SPCS The geometric direction of each state determines the projection utilized For states that are longer in the east west direction the Lambert Conformal Conic is used States which are longer in the north south direction use the Transverse Mercator Projection The panhandle of Alaska which the sole distinction of lying at an angle garners the use of the Oblique Mercator Projection While Guam uses a Polyconic projection The formulae for these calculations are based on Publication 62 4 State Plane Coordinates by Automatic Data Processing U S Department of Commerce 1968 These projections should only be used for data that has been A2 32 Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems MAPublisher Supported Projections computed using this method Fo
220. ermore the symbol of your choice must be present in the Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel USING PLOT CENTROIDS Plot Centroids is located in the Point Plotter panel options menu e Select first the MAP View that contains the layers concerned by the function e Select the Source Layer containing the polygons for which the centroids will be plotted MAP Layer of type Area e Choose the Destination Layer of type Point in which the centroids will be added e Finally select the symbol Style and Scale to apply e Click OK to produce a symbol at the centroid of all the polygons on the source layer RESULTS Symbols are added to the specified Point MAP Layer specified Depending on the type of polygon single or compound path symbols are located on the center of the polygons or at the center of the biggest polygon of a group Example result of plotting centroids on a Canadian provincial Area layer Chapter 6 Plotting Points 79 Plot Centroids Drawing Tools MAPublisher benefits from Adobe Illustrator drawing tools Any artwork created on a specified MAP layer will be incorporated into the map data on that layer and can therefore be rescaled and reprojected If the new artwork is of the same feature type as the MAP Layer it will be automatically added to the attribute table of that layer Similarly objects can be deleted and moved between layer with the basic Adobe Illustrator tools Therefore it is very easy to quickly add an
221. es This coordinate system that divides all fifty states of the United States Puerto Rico and the U S Virgin Islands into over 120 numbered sections referred to as zones Each zone has an assigned code number that defines the projection parameters for the region There are four possible projections for SPCS The geometric direction of each state determines the projection utilized For states that are longer in the east west direction the Lambert Conformal Conic is used States which are longer in the north south direction use the Transverse Mercator Projection The panhandle of Alaska which the sole distinction of lying at an angle garners the use of the Oblique Mercator Projection While Guam uses a Polyconic projection The formulae for these calculations are based on Publication 62 4 State Plane Coordinates by Automatic Data Processing U S Department of Commerce 1968 These projections should only be used for data that has been computed using this method For all other state plane calculations use Exact Methods The parameters for these coordinate systems are defined in Publication 62 4 For further information contact the U S Department of Commerce The Alaska27 projection is hard coded and does not require any parameters Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems A2 21 MAPublisher Supported Projections ALBERS EQUAL AREA CONIC The Albers Equal Area Conic projection is a map projection in which the parallels are unequally spaced arcs
222. es an option to specify an Entry Delimiter being the form of the separator between grid cell and text label for each index entry You can choose from Tab Comma or specify a Custom delimiter Saving the Index File When you have set all of your index options click the Save As button This will allow you specify a name for the text file and the location where it will be saved You can open this file in a text editor or place it back into document using the Adobe Illustrator Place function Using Adobe Illustrator CS4 on Mac OS X it is recommended to copy the index contents into a text box instead of using the Place function 128 Chapter 13 Grids and Indexes Make Index TREDYFFRIN EAST hoe whe Scale Bars and North Arrows WEST Pati WHITELAND ah j cosnen 5 AU MAPublisher contains tools for plotting accurate scale bars and north arrows onto your map The Scale Bar filter offers a number of different designs that you can choose from including double bar designs for the placement of scale bars in multiple units North Arrows are created from selected artwork on the page using the Create North Arrow filter and will be immediately aligned to true north Topics covered in this section are Scale Bar Create North Arrow _ PENNSBURY CHADDS FORD eg Ye E sr nan A A i J e IR a TAA ae io NA Basas NS ay te WILMINGTON ou2 Ata Chapter 14 Scale Bars and North Arrows 129
223. es not only with the change of datum between the two coordinate systems but also with the TRF distortions in the OSGB36 triangulation network which make a simple datum transformation of the Helmert type limited to applications at 5m and larger accuracy levels This transformation removes the need to estimate local Helmert transformations between ETRS89 and OSGB36 for particular locations Because the National Grid Transformation works with easting and northing coordinates other ETRS89 coordinate types 3 D Cartesian or latitude and longitude must first be converted to eastings and northings This is done using the same map projection as is used for the National Grid see section 7 below except that the GRS80 ellipsoid rather than the Airy ellipsoid is used After the transformation the resulting National Grid eastings and northings can be converted back to latitude and longitude this time using the Airy ellipsoid if required POLYNOMIAL The Polynomial datum shift methods uses a collection of parameters which define a high order mathematical function for transforming between two horizontal datums These equations are usually created by local and regional geodetic authorities They generally provide high accuracy transformations but are limited to specific areas of use In many cases the accuracy of these transformations is around one metre For a detailed description of generalized polynomial datum transformations please refer to the OGP guidan
224. ess the Save button to commit your update to the Geodetic Datasource file Renaming Moving An Existing Object Select Edit Geodetic Datasource from the options menu from the MAPublisher MAP Views panel Select the object and choose the Edit Object button Enter the modified parameters for the identification name Press the 0K button to commit your changes In order to move the coordinate system object select the record and drag it to another category if necessary Press the Save button to commit your update to the Geodetic Datasource file oO fay Saving Coordinate Systems xml file 1 Select Edit Geodetic Datasource from the options menu from the MAPublisher MAP Views panel 2 Customized the coordinate systems actions above 3 Click the Save As button type the file name This file can be exchanged with another computer using MAPublisher using Load Geodetic Datasource see page A2 6 EXPORTING A REFERENCE FILE The defined coordinate system for a Map View can be exported as a reference wkt file via MAPublisher Export Coordinate System to File option Select Export Coordinate System to File from the MAP Views panel options menu to access the export dialog box where you can save the wkt definition Export coordinate system Save in O Califomia referenced file Wd My Recent Documents E Desktop New Folder My Documents My Computer File name My Network Saveastype WKT definitions wi
225. estination layer must be of a matching feature type as the source layer e Pasted data will always maintain its attributes If you paste into a non map layer drag this layer into a MAP View then recreate the schema attributes will be populated appropriately Legacy Text Conversion Opening legacy files you may be prompted to update text legacy text conversion Only text objects that are associated to attributes are required to be updated For other text with no attributes you do not necessarily need to update Legacy Text Conversion MaAPublisher has detected that this document contains legacy Illustrator text art TEEM Illustrator will not recognize such text as true text art until that artis converted t and MAPublisher will not display attributes for legacy text art If you decide not to convert the text at this time and instead opt to convert it manually at a later time be aware that Illustrator s legacy text conversion process does NOT preserve attributes for converted text art All text art Choose this option to convert all text Update to the Adobe Illustrator current version All text art MAPublisher text art only Choose this option to convert only the MAPublisher text on MAP layers Nothing MAPublisher text art only Nothing Choose this option if no conversion is necessary A3 4 Appendix 3 MAPublisher 8 How To s For Legacy Users Appendix 4 Helpful Styles and Symbols Files The follo
226. ever be two pieces of artwork with the same ID value at the same time This property cannot be set Name describes the name of the polygon Editing this property will change the name in the Layers panel AreaDirection describes the direction as clockwise or counter clockwise Editing this value will reverse the direction accordingly VertexCount describes the number of points in the art This property cannot be set Style describes the Graphic Style in use Editing this property will apply the selected style to the art StrokeWeight describes the stroke weight of the path Editing this property will alter the stroke weight of the art Perimeter describes the perimeter of the area in world units This property cannot be set PathClosed describes whether or not the path is closed yes or no Editing this value will open close the path ArtScale describes the scaling of the line stroke Editing this value will scale the stroke weight Area describes the area of the path in world units This property cannot be set 60 Chapter 5 MAP Attributes Attributes Foreword Line layers ID Name VertexCount Style StrokeWeight PathClosed Length ArtScale PageX PageY ID Name HorizontalScale VerticalScale Rotation Style MapX MapY Text layers PageX PageY ID FontSize FontFamily Name Text TextLength Rotation Style PageX PageY P Point layers describes the internal uni
227. ext Label tool and MAPublisher will generate labels based on these settings Otherwise labels applied will appear in the current default colour font and font size Then select the features that you want to label and go to Filter gt MAP Legend gt Feature Text Label or the MAPublisher toolbar button to access the function FEATURE TEXT LABEL SETTINGS Source Layer and Column You must first set the options for MAPublisher to determine the attributes that will be converted to text labels The Source Layer list will show the Area Point and or Text layers currently containing selected data For each layer the Column drop down list s is populated with the attribute structure of that layer You must choose a column that holds the attributes you wish to label the map with Target Text Layer In the Text layer drop down list s you must specify a Text layer that the labels will be output to Note you can only output labels to text layers in the same MAP View as the Source Layer LABEL SETTINGS MAPublisher provides options to specify label preferences such as label position alignment to lines of latitude minimum font sizes and horizontal scaling to best place labels within polygons and paths These label settings are common to Feature Text Label and the MAP Tagger Tool Line Labels MAPublisher will place Line labels intelligently depending on the curvature and length of the line string Click the Line Labels button to assign MAPublisher Lin
228. f extra parameters such as for the import of DGN DXF DWG E00 GML KML MIF MID Tab and Delimited Text Data see facing page Browse Opens a Data Source browser to enable the selection of files for import Character Encoding Assign a codec if the attribute information held in the selected dataset uses a double byte character set Coordinate System Information This area shows information about the coordinate systems i e Name Type Envelope EPSG Code To choose a known source coordinate system select it from this list Search Click this button and your search results will be populated MAP View list Select the matching coordinate system that you wish to align the incoming data to Fit to page based on new MAP View Both the matching coordinate system and incoming data will be treated separately in terms of page scaling IMPORT SETTINGS Delimited Text Data Settings Latitude Longitude or X Y Columns These two drop down lists hold the names of all the numeric columns in the selected file Select the columns from which the coordinates for each point will be read LinrT bingi Coirm 10 100 ee Lathe Cr FE Laha y C Uae frit ire a a haider fl diecie Castile faat Fatma Deris Dezi dT a Deets miti gbrad diticton indicator Erangi 704 ALE SO Fas hotaaens Heres in se apaena mere pera ar one dga ed LF itera Ana dr iira dbi Daneebeen Gai ba inchcebed wah
229. f file for import Each entity in a mif file has a row of attributes stored in an associated mid file A single mif file contains many different types of geometry however the associated attribute in the mid file must have the same number and type of fields for each entity in the mif file The order of the entries in the two files is synchronized For example the second geometric entity in the mif file has the attributes held in the second row of the mid file The number and type of attributes associated with each entity is specified by the user There must be at least one attribute field in the mid file Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions mif mid Aggregate Yes Automated Translation Yes Circles Yes User Defined Attributes Yes Circular Arc Yes Coordinate System Support Yes Elliptical Arc Yes Generic Colour Support Yes Ellipses Yes Spatial Index Never Polygon Yes Schema Required Yes Donut Polygon Yes Geometry Type Attribute mif_type Point Yes Line Yes Text Yes Prior to the import process additional Settings can be made which will affect how the selected file will import The following parameters can be applied to the import e Import as Visible Attributes Enable this option to view the pen and brush pattern values in the imported attribute table The MAPublisher MID MIF importer supports the storage of point line polyline arc ellipse rectangle rounded rectangle region polygon and tex
230. f the projection alpha However there may be times when you want instead to specify the angle at the natural origin of the projection gamma Since each angle may be computed based on the other either one can be specified when defined in the projection If the Azimuth Is Gamma flag is set it is assumed that the value passed in via the Azimuth parameter is the angle at the natural origin of the projection gamma Otherwise it is assumed that the value passed in via the Azimuth parameter is the angle at the center of the projection alpha The ObliqueMercatorAzimuth projection has the following parameters e Longitude at the Center of the e Projection Rotation Angle Defaults to 0 e Latitude of the Origin of the Projection e Unrectified Flag Defaults to 0 e Azimuth of the Central Line e Use Gamma Flag Defaults to 0 e Scale Factor at the Center of the Projection e Center Flag Defaults to 0 False Easting e Azimuth is Gamma Defaults to 0 e False Northing OBLIQUE MERCATOR TWO POINTS The Oblique Mercator projection is a cylindrical conformal map projection It is similar to the Mercator projection except that the cylinder is wrapped around the ellipsoid so that it touches the surface along the great circle path chosen for the central line instead of along the Earth s equator Scale becomes infinite 90 degrees from the central line and is true along a chosen central line along two straight lines parallel to the central line
231. figuration for geospatial parameters coordinate system anchors map scale and rotation Every MAP Layer will be shown in this panel as belonging to a particular MAP View Adobe Illustrator layers that do not have georeferencing information e g layers existing in the document prior to import are placed in the Non MAP layers category Categories are symbolized in the following manner MAP View layers that contain georeferencing information Z Non MAP layers layers that do not contain georeferencing information Each layer that belongs to a MAP View is symbolized in MAPublisher panels and dialog boxes with an icon identify ing its feature type e g county boundaries urban areas country outlines etc e g rivers roads railways etc e g town and city symbols railway stations etc e g text labels for MAPublisher Legend items North Arrows Scale Bars Grids Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing 45 MAP Views Panel FUNCTIONALITY MAP Views are designed to provide an easy method of accessing settings for specifying and changing coordinate systems for editing scale and data placement on the page and for exporting to GIS formats Within the MAP Views panel you are just a few clicks away from merging Adobe Illustrator layers georeferencing existing Adobe Illustrator artwork changing multiple layer names and reprojecting data on the fly USING THE MAP VIEWS PANEL Using the MAP View Editor will be
232. filters in the panel EDITING AND DELETING SELECTION FILTERS The name and entered expression can be edited To edit a MAP Selection Filter double click the appropriate selection filter in the panel or click the selection filter in the panel and click the Edit Selection Filter in the panel options menu This will open the Edit Selection Filter dialog box Delete a MAP Selection Filter by clicking the Delete Selection Filter button or menu item MAKING SELECTIONS Once MAP Selection Filters have been created they can be applied to a MAP layer Selection filters can only be applied to one layer at a time However more than one filter may be applied simultaneously use Shift or Ctrl Windows or Command Mac to select multiple filters When applying multiple selection filters art only has to satisfy one of the chosen selection filters to qualify i e multiple selection filters are combined using the OR operator NOTE When the expression is marked as valid it is not necessarily valid when applied to a given layer For example the expression Country Ohio is only applicable to a layer with the Country attribute If an expression is not valid for a layer an error is shown when the selection filter is applied There are four methods of applying a selection filter available as buttons and menu items e Applyas New Selection Clears the current selection and selects any art on the current layer that meets the criteria of the chosen s
233. fy Lines Filter gt MAP Lines gt Simplify Lines or MAP Toolbar a Simplify Lines Proximity Set the simplification _ tolerance type in or use arrows Proximity 0 00 a z OK Unit Select page unit or map units 3 angular or linear unit list depending Vertex Count Displays the number Vertex Count if the map coordinate system is ance i f of vertices in the original and PA or projected or geodetic used for simplified line after clicking the aie proximity tolerance Preview button St ae einan Preview Display a preview on the artboard before running the tool e Uses Dowgles Peucker line simplification e Mazintzins topology between areas with shared edges The MAPublisher Simplify Lines filter allows for the simplification or generalization of imported vector data The Simplify Lines function uses the popular Douglas Peucker algorithm for removing nodes and vertices during simplification For more information on the Douglas Peucker algorithm see page A1 36 Simplify Lines is used to reduce the number of points required to represent a vector encoded line where the lines are approximated by a stream of X Y coordinates The function can be used on L Line or A Area layers and removes nodes based upon a proximity value in either Page Units or Map Units The list of Map Units depends on the MAP View coordinate system e g angular units page units degrees etc for geodetic coordinate systems linear units such as metr
234. fy State Plane coordinates A2 20 Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems Common Coordinate Systems MAPublisher Supported Projections This section helps you become familiar with the map projections that are supported in MAPublisher AITOFF The Aitoff projection is a modified azimuthal projection that is neither conformal nor equal area It was developed by David Aitoff or Altow in 1889 The central meridian is a straight line half the length of the Equator Other meridians are equally spaced along the Equator and concave toward the central meridian The Equator is straight Other parallels are equally spaced along the central meridian and concave toward the nearest pole The poles are represented by points This projections is symmetrical about the Equator and the central meridian Scale is true along the Equator and the central meridian This projection is supported on spheres only Aitoff projection requires the following parameters e Longitude of the Center of the Projection e False Easting e False Northing NOTE Only a spherical form of this projection is used The semi major axis of the ellipsoid sphere is used for forward and inverse projection from grid to geodetic coordinates within the system wherein this projection is incorporated ALASKA STATE PLANE 27 The State Plane Coordinate System SPCS is not a projection rather it is a system for specifying positions of geodetic stations using plane rectangular coordinat
235. g the Flip option from Type on the Path Options dialog box started from the menu Type gt Type on a Path gt Type on a Path Options Examples Crop vector data Original map Create Inset Crop result lines and area are clipped text with 1st letter within the cropping rectangle and symbol with center point in rectangle are maintained The MAP view can be re scaled to fit better to the document size e Open a map and make a copy menu File gt Save a Copy Leave the original map open make the copy the active document e Use MAP Vector Crop to crop the area of special interest e Make the original map active In the MAP Views panel select the option menu Import MAP View from document Select the MAP View from the copy The map now contains two MAP Views at least Their relative position can be managed from the MAP View Editor as well as the scale of the inset map Edit MAP views e g move inset and change scale 84 Chapter 7 Drawing Tools MAP Vector Crop Tool G RESULT Copy and Crop 1 Line Functions MAPublisher contains several tools for working with map line segments As the graphics environment offers much more flexibility when working with vector artwork MAPublisher offers graphics specific line tools which will be discussed in detail in this chapter Buffer Lines allows for the creation of a buffer around current lines at designated distances in map units Flip Lines can be used
236. g the Edit Schema button or menu item in the MAP Attributes panel options menu Edit Schema will list all of the columns which currently exist in the MAP Layer attribute structure including MAPublisher Property attributes page 60 By default imported or created attributes will be visible whereas property columns will not be shown by default Please note some Property column structures cannot be edited read only Editing Column Format To rename a column enter the new text directly into the Name field Specify a data type by making the appropriate selection in the Type list Please note the following String columns can contain attributes that are both alpha and numeric Integer columns contain only whole numbers e Real columns contain numbers carrying decimal values e Boolean columns contain True or False values 66 Chapter 5 MAP Attributes Edit Schema To modify the amount of characters or decimals enter a value into the Size Decimal text box You can also assign a Default Value for all new objects placed on the selected layer by entering text accordingly Check or uncheck the Visible option to edit a column s visibility Check or uncheck the Read only option to edit a column s read write status i e values cannot be edited in the MAP Attributes panel if the column is read only To assign an expression to the selected column check the Derive value from expression option Enter a valid expression in the Expression field The
237. ge number of layers and MAP Views open much faster Additionally the MAP Views panel has a new Export button for easy access as well as a new Switch to MAP View button which should facilitate the movement of layers between MAP Views What s New in MAPublisher 8 iX Getting Started Before using MAPublisher please read this section to ensure that you have a suitable hardware environment are familiar with the installation and activation procedures and adequately prepare your system and workspace to make maps with Adobe Illustrator and MAPublisher 8 Topics covered in this section System Requirements MAPublisher Compatibility Notes Installation Instructions MAPublisher License Management The MAPublisher Tools The MAPublisher Toolbar Preparing the Workspace Chapter 1 Getting Started 11 System Requirements Before installing MAPublisher 8 please ensure that you have sufficient system resources as outlined below WINDOWS e Adobe Illustrator CS2 CS3 CS4 e Intel Pentium 4 processor or higher Dual core recommended e Windows XP Vista e 1 GB of RAM 2 GB of RAM or higher recommended e 300 MB of available hard disk space MAC OS X e Adobe Illustrator CS2 CS3 CS4 PowerPC G5 or above Intel recommended e Mac OS X 10 4 or higher 1 GB of RAM 2 GB of RAM or higher recommended e 300 MB of available hard disk space Floating license use with Adobe Illustrator CS2 on Intel Mac computers is
238. graphics or GIS user who uses MAPublisher with medium sized data sets with up to 20 layers minimal text labels and some low resolution or small coverage raster images Power User 2 GB or more of RAM is recommended A professional cartographer who uses MAPublisher daily and works with large urban data sets including large transportation layers with 20 or more layers raster based air photographs large numbers of text labels complex fill patterns etc RAM USAGE HINTS Users often ask us why is so much RAM needed to operate MAPublisher First of all Adobe Illustrator requires a significant amount of RAM itself in order to run smoothly Secondly map data sets are often large which increases the need for RAM even further Map data sets contain both vector and attribute data which must be stored in memory Since we are adding a database to Adobe Illustrator this increases the file size which increases the RAM requirements MAPublisher builds a mini GIS application inside Adobe Illustrator so that it can geo code information and attach data to objects This also has some overhead GIS users also often ask why so much more memory is needed with MAPublisher than is with GIS software The graphics environment software of Adobe Illustrator loads the entire file into memory rather than just reading it from disk thus more RAM memory is required When you are importing a large number of files into Adobe Illustrator using MAPublisher you ll notice tha
239. gt License Management and click on the menu item Browse to license folder This opens a file browser at the dedicated MAPublisher license file directory for your operating system Keeping this browser opened users can past in the license file received directly at the appropriate location License Management O Evaluate PRegste ai Foar d Chedi kense Gy Check license usage Feature Version Type Status User Ser MAPublisher 8 0 Floating Licensed from server ABC Whatzits Inc MP gt Register product O Evaluate Retrieve licenses L Browse to license folder Chapter 1 Getting Started 17 MAPublisher License Management CHECKOUT A FLOATING LICENSE If you have purchased a floating license please refer to the floating license installation guide provided with your purchase Once the server license is fully operational follow these instructions to check out a license from the client machine computer running the actual MAPublisher application 1 After installation of MAPublisher 8 click the Floating button of the MAPublisher Welcome Screen or MAPublisher License Management dialog box 2 Enter the name or IP address of the server where the license manager resides 3 Click the Checkout button to retrieve the one of the licenses from the server NOTES e Ifyou wish to use Adobe Illustrator without MAPublisher then click the Checkin button from the MAPublisher License Management dialog
240. hat will be used to select the object in the main list The Remarks text box can be used to add notes on a definition and is optional The dentifiers list may be used to add identifying codes for an object that may come from other databases The GC code is a unique identifier assigned by MAPublisher do not alter this code To enter additional codes use the spaces below This tab is identical for all object types Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems A2 9 The Geodetic Datasource amp Projected Coordinate System Viewer Identification Definition Name ED50 France EuroLambert Remarks Identifiers tecuer Code cs ED50 EuroLambert EPSG 2192 GC 2192 Geodetic Datasource object Identification tab The Definition tab is used to define the object s parameters Parameters are specific to each object type Specific definition tabs per object are described here after Angular Units For Angular units you must enter a conversion for the new unit in terms of the scientific standard Degrees The Abbreviation is used to identify the unit within the application interface Example The Abbreviation for Degrees is deg Angular Unit Editor Ey Abbreviation ArcMinute Units Per Degree 60 Angular Units Editor Definition A2 10 Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems The Geodetic Datasource Coordinate Points For Coordinate Points you must specify the c
241. he positions Position the cursor at the desired location e Click the document while holding the Shift key The X and Y position in map units are copied to the clipboard and can be paste into any text editor Only one set of coordinates can be copied at once When shift click is used again the values copied previously will be overwritten NOTE When the cursor is placed outside of the MAP View extent of the selected layer positions values are indicated as Unavailable Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing 57 MAP Location Tool BZyYy g 4422 x s athedral Stajrs wuwa Grani tel Rapids Pts f 6740 x Day use only l SS Of lt x 6012 Set 4922 Salt Creek Rapids pao a 93 FI Regge Bipaas Se a PA MAP Attributes MAPublisher can import GIS files into Adobe Illustrator while retaining both geographic vector and attribute information and makes it very easy to produce high quality maps This section will explain the principles of georeferencing and attribute information and how these are maintained within MAPublisher Topics covered in this section are Attributes Foreword MAP Attributes Find amp Replace Attributes Edit Schema Edit Expression J oin Table Apply Expression Chapter 5 MAP Attributes 59 Attributes Foreword ATTRIBUTE INFORMATION The attribute table that forms part of a GIS map file is one of the most imp
242. he Use first line as a header check box though MAPublisher will generally automatically detect if this is the case If the file does not appear to contain column headers MAPublisher will assign the default headers Column1 Column2 to the attribute columns on import Importing Data When you have your file s selected and if necessary specified the coordinate system and or extra settings you can click OK to import If MAPublisher finds there is a coordinate system already in your document which matches the incoming data the Matching MAP View dialog box will open see chapter 4 on MAP Views If this dialog box opens you must choose to either add the incoming data file to a specified MAP View or create a new MAP View to hold the incoming data 1 If you specify Add to choose the MAP View from the drop down list to add your incoming data to This option will also allow you to rescale the existing and incoming data which will comprise this MAP View in order to fit them all inside the page extents To achieve rescaling check the Resize MAP View to fit option If you do not check this option some of your data may be imported outside of the page extents 2 If you specify Fit to page based on new MAP View the incoming data will be treated separately from the matching data as if it was the first import RESULTS The data will be imported into Adobe Illustrator as individual Adobe Illustrator layers one for each feature type in the import T
243. he art so that the new styles can be added to the Graphic Styles panel and be used in the MAP Stylesheets ot ha YS ASSIGNING INCREMENTAL VALUES TO STYLES It is very straightforward to assign styles to values for stylesheets based on Equal to expressions The following examples can be used as a basis for new stylesheets providing the functionality which was previously available in the Unique Occurrences option in Auto Assign Legend Info Example 1 Rule 1 assigned first listed value and first style 1 Create the first Equal to rule using the first listed style and an expression based on the first listed value in a specified attribute column i e Style A assigned to Column X Value 1 2 Click the Add button The second rule will be automatically assigned an incremental expression i e Style B assigned to Column X Value 2 3 Keep clicking the Add button until all the values or styles have been used Example 2 Rule 1 assigned first listed value and third style 1 Create the first Equal to rule using the first listed style and an expression based on the third listed value in a specified attribute column i e Style C assigned to Column X Value 1 2 Click the Add button The second rule will be automatically assigned the first unused style i e Style A assigned to Column X Value 2 3 Keep clicking the Add button Assignments will be incremental but will not include the third style again i e Style B assign
244. he common attributes you wish to join together For example to join points based on a unique ID you should select the column containing the common ID names This will result in point symbols containing the same name being joined together In Adobe Illustrator CS4 Join Points is found in the Object gt Filters gt MAP Lines menu Chapter 8 Line Functions 89 Join Points As each point that is joined will be represented by a node in a line string you must now specify a logical order by which the points will be joined For example it is logical that the point which was captured by a GPS unit first should be the first node in the line string with the second and third points being located at the second and third nodes In order to specify these parameters choose columns by which to sort your points These should be attribute columns which contain rising alphabetical or numerical values In the Sort By Available Columns list select the primary sorting column This should be the attribute column that contains the best fit for rising alphabetical or numerical values For example if points have rising values from 1 10 the point with a value equal to 1 will be at the start of the generated line and the point with a value equal to 10 will be at the end of the line When you have selected the column click the Add button to place the column into the Sort Order list If all the values contained in the first Sort By column are unique you will not be re
245. he ellipsoid must be expanded by an additional amount to account for the average elevation within that county In the case of a Wisconsin county the ellipsoid must also be adjusted based on the average geoid height for that county For Minnesota counties the average geoid height should be set to zero The TransverseMercatorExtended projection has the following parameters e Longitude of the Central Meridian e Latitude of the Origin of the Projection e Scale Reduction Factor at the Center of the Projection e False Easting e False Northing e Average Elevation Minnesota and Wisconsin e Average Geoid Height Wisconsin only TRANSVERSE MERCATOR SNYDER This projection is based on the description and formulae in John P Snyder Map Projections A Working Manual U S Geological Survey Professional Paper 1395 pp 60 64 These formulas have been superseded by more precise versions There are however some instances where users may want to use the older less precise formulas for example if the results will be compared to old data The TransverseMercatorSnyder projection has the following parameters e Longitude of the Central Meridian False Easting e Latitude of the Origin of the Projection e False Northing e Scale Reduction Factor at the Center of the Projection TRANSVERSE MERCATOR SOUTH ORIENTED This is a projection used in the southern hemisphere It is identical to the standard Transverse Mercator except that the false easti
246. he name of these layers will be the same as the name s of the original imported data file with the appropriate feature type extension appended For instance importing a single polygon file named world mif would produce a single Adobe Illustrator layer called world_area which contains the imported file Additionally this layer can be seen as part of a MAP View where Adobe Illustrator layers are automatically placed as sub features of MAP Views in relation to specific coordinate systems 36 Chapter 3 Importing Map Data Simple Import Coordinate System Indicate the coordinate system of the file to be imported File Numbers Allows the l selection of individual files in order to activate the Edit and Remove buttons Add Allows the selection of files for import by opening the Advanced Import Data Source function see below New based on Imports all of the files to one of the coordinate systems in the File List Use existing Allows you to import all of the files in a coordinate system that already exists in a MAP View in the document Auto scale If you have multiple files in the File List and have selected the New Based On or Use Existing options check this box to ensure all the files fit inside the page extents when imported RELATED TOOLS Advanced Import File gt Import Map Data gt Advanced and MAP Toolbar Advanced Import 1 NAD27 2 Robinson Coordinate System Filename C
247. he one parameter to define a longitude rotation is the angle of rotation MOLODENSKY TRANSFORMATIONS The Molodensky transformation method shifts coordinate values between local and geocentric datums using three linear shift parameters It provides a general solution with limited accuracy The Molodensky method provides a transformation that is accurate to within 5 10 metres For a detailed discussion of the Molodensky algorithms and parameters for a variety of local geodetic datums please refer to Defense Mapping Agency Technical Report TR 8350 2 1991 Department of Defense World Geodetic System 1984 Its Definition and Relationships with Local Geodetic Systems The Molodensky method can be defined for local geodetic datums worldwide MRE MULTIPLE REGRESSION EQUATIONS The DMA Multiple Regression Equations transformation method shifts coordinate values between geodetic datums It can be defined for local geodetic datums worldwide The DMA Multiple Regression Equations method uses Doppler derived parameters and provides a general solution with limited accuracy It provides a transformation that is accurate to within 3 10 metres Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems A2 53 Datum Shifts For a detailed discussion of the DMA Multiple Regression Equations algorithms and parameters for a variety of local geodetic datums please refer to Defense Mapping Agency Technical Report TR 8350 2 1991 Department of Defense World Geodetic System 1984 Its
248. he values entered into the Latitude and Longitude text boxes may be entered in different formats e Decimal degrees D d e Delimited Degrees Minutes Seconds D dMM SS s Degrees Minutes D MM m e Degrees MinutesSeconds D MMSS s Packed DMS with decimal point D DDMMSS s Packed DMS D DDMMSS s Items in are optional means zero or more digits means one or more digits NOTES e Lines of latitude run East West the Equator is an example whereas lines of longitude run North South the Greenwich Meridian is an example Positive degree values represent north latitudes and east longitudes Negative degree values represent south latitudes and west longitudes Directions can be entered either with positing negative values or using the N S E or W letters preceding or following the numerical values separated or not with a space e Valid delimiters for Delimited Degrees Minutes Seconds format are gt d degree single quote minute double quote second e g 43d41 48 98 N gt hyphen e g 43 41 48 98N gt space e g 43 41 48 98N e Packed formats require the use of two digits for degrees of latitude e g 1 N must be written 01 and 3 digits for degrees of longitude e g 1 E must be written 001 Examples of Latitude Longitude values Packed DMS with decimal Delimited Packed DMS Degrees Minutes Decimals Degrees Degrees Minutes Degrees MinutesSeconds Seconds po
249. hed metadata document by contacting the data provider or in textual information on the original data itself e g title of a scanned map In all cases the source coordinate system must be known with certainty Then only can the proper parameter be specified in the MAPublisher interface A wrongly specified source coordinate system would make the map data unusable for transformations and merging with other datasets FINAL MAP COORDINATE SYSTEM Most of cartographic projects are restricted in the choice of coordinate system for the final map This parameter is usually part of the project requirement It is the task of the professional cartographer to analyze carefully the situation to make the wise decision For general purpose mapping projects interpretive or marketing maps for example a more approximative selection of the coordinate systems might be acceptable Following the request from some of our users who may not have a cartographic expertise here are a list of simple considerations to take into account before making a choice Use of a Geodetic Coordinate system angular coordinates Lat Long age z e Appropriate for overlay with GPS data recorded in Lat Long format e WGS84 system is required to export vector data to KML format for display ski in Google Earth Google Maps sama e Use of a Projected coordinate system asa e Appropriate for printed map so that users can use a ruler to measure Example Systems NOT FOR US
250. hoose specific coordinates for a pass through point LABELLING OPTIONS A number of labelling options are available for use in grids and graticules Axis labels and cell labels for indexing can be included the direction of axis and cell labels can be modified and the axes used for aloha and numeric labels can be flipped The ability to choose between labels starting from zero and actual projected coordinates is also when labelling the end of line When using graticules on projected world maps axis and line labels may not display properly due to the extreme curvature of the graticules at the edges In this case it is recommended to use the don t label options The labelling graphic shows the status of axis cell and line labels solid labels mean that label is enabled grey labels mean that label is OFF Click any cell label to switch all cell labels on or off Click a line label to switch that line label only on or off Click an axis label to switch the labels on that axis only on or off Click a horizontal arrow to flip the direction of labels on the top and bottom axes Click a vertical arrow to flip the direction of labels on the left and right axes Click a corner graphic to swap which axes are labelled numerically and which are labelled alphabetically For indexing choose a character style to use for the cell labels by selecting an entry for Center Style choose a character style to use for the labels on each axis by selecting an entry for
251. if mid MapInfo Table tab MicroStation Design dgn Not supported under Mac PPC Rosetta Delimited Text Data txt csv tsv KML kml S 57 000 TIGER Line rt1 bw1 USGS Digital Line Graph dlg opt USGS Spatial Data Transfer Standard SDTS ddf Export Formats CAD dxf dwg ESRI Interchange File e00 ESRI Arclnfo Generate gen ESRI Shapefile shp GML Simple Features 3 1 1 MapInfo Interchange mif mid MapInfo Table tab MicroStation Design dgn Delimited Text Data txt csv tsv KML kml This section will provide an overview of the formats outlined above as well as additional considerations when using GIS data with MAPublisher For an in depth analysis of further considerations when using these formats during Import please see Appendix 1 pages A1 2 to A1 11 Chapter 2 Map Data File Formats 25 Import and Export Supported Data Formats DATA FORMAT DESCRIPTIONS AutoCAD Drawing dwg and Drawing Exchange dxf Import and Export These file types are most commonly created by Autodesk AutoCAD product though other software programs such as Bentley MicroStation and various other computer aided design CAD programs are capable of creating files in this format There are two formats used by AutoCAD DXF drawing exchange format files which are large and ASCII representations of the binary DWG drawing files Logically both f
252. ific work area Since the GML models base abstract classes these application profiles schemas are required for accessing and processing any GML datasets Generally GML data has a GML extension and requires any application specific schema files xsd For more information on GML and the GML simple features profile please visit the Open Geospatial Consortium web site www opengeospatial com Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions gml xml xsd Aggregate Yes Automated Translation Varies Circles No User Defined Attributes Yes Circular Arc Yes Coordinate System Support Yes Elliptical Arc No Generic Colour Support No Ellipses No 3D Support Yes Polygon Yes Schema Required Yes xsd Donut Polygon Yes Transaction Support No Point Yes Geometry Type Attribute xml_type Line Yes Text No Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Al 11 MAPublisher Import Formats MAPublisher Unicode Support This section contains information regarding Unicode character encoding in MAPublisher MAPublisher supports Unicode character encoding in MAP Views MAP Attributes MAP Stylesheets and MAP Selection Filters MAPublisher can also reference Adobe Illustrator layers graphic styles and character styles using Unicode encoding To use Unicode character encoding you require a Unicode compliant font Mac OS X users will have Unicode compliant fonts installed with OS X Windows users will require Unicode compliant fonts to render Unicode
253. iger_type Line Yes Text No Supported Versions 1992 1995 1997 1998 1999 2000 2002 USGS DIGITAL LINE GRAPH DLG OPT DLG is a fixed field record that may or may not have end of line markers The DLG file structure was designed to accommodate all categories of spatial data represented on a conventional line map DLG is a published ASCII format developed by the United States Geological Survey USGS Federal Agency and is intended to assist in data exchange with the National Digital Cartographic Data Base NDCDB The DLG reader supports all three distinct types of DLG data e Large scale DLG data 1 24 000 scale e Intermediate scale DLG 1 100 000 scale e Small scale DLG data 1 2 000 000 scale The three scales of DLG data are physically formatted into files in one of these ways standard optional and graphics formats MAPublisher supports both the standard and the optional DLG distribution formats however the graphics format is not supported Most DLG data is distributed in the optional format The DLG file structure was designed to accommodate all categories of spatial data represented on a conventional line map Node line and area data types are present within the DLG format along with linkages and attribute codes Linkages are references to other features within the same DLG data set used in a variety of contexts DLG files do not explicitly store attribute values but use a feature coding approach in which unique feature code
254. ign left gt Inserts an image picture jpg located in the Source Media Folder Besides HTML ignores extra spaces and returns Therefore commands must be used to create line breaks For example the key code lt br gt is used for line break lt p gt to start a new paragraph In addition to the HTML tags MAPublisher can use text extracted from the MAP Attributes table The reference to the attribute field name is indicated between two percent signs At tribute 1 Examples use of attribute field e lt b gt Street Name lt b gt Main Street e lt img src sSourcemedi a i mage hspace 0 vspace 0 align left gt gt Shows image indicated in the attribute called image a string text hspace and vspace set the horizontal and vertical space left blank around the image align set the image alignment to the left of the page e lt a href http WebSite gt Avenza Web lt a gt gt Avenza Web and opens the Website indicated in the attribute WebSite on click Text with HTML tags may be directly entered for formatting or benefit from the Web Tag Dialog HTML Text Editor Tools described here after USING THE WEB TAG DIALOG Callout Set up and Preview The user must set the Height and Width of the callout bubble in pixel units or use the Auto Size option The Auto Size option sets the size of the bubble automatically based on the contents image and text The Preview button opens or closes the preview of
255. iles are identical and therefore MAPublisher treats both file types in the same manner AutoCAD files consist of drawing settings and configurations as well as a series of entities or graphic elements organized into layers MAPublisher provides broad support for many AutoCAD entity types and options Prior to import set the colour mode of the Adobe Illustrator document to the same scheme used in the colour table of the CAD file i e RGB or CMYK to ensure colours are imported correctly Note the hierarchy of layers in multi feature imports is by feature type text layers then point then line then area layers ESRI Interchange File e00 Import and Export ESRI Interchange File files are created by ESRI ArcInfo product A single E00 file describes a complete ArcInfo coverage The file itself is actually an archive of several smaller files or sub files which will have fixed names and follow a predefined data format MAPublisher will reproduce these sub files as distinct Adobe Illustrator layers on import Therefore importing a single e00 import can result in the generation of point area line and text layers Note the hierarchy of layers in multi feature imports is by feature type text layers then point then line then area layers ESRI Arcinfo Generate gen Import and Export Arcinfo Generate files are created by ESRI Arclnfo product and have a simple ASCII from x y to x y format Due to its simplicity you can also use a text edit
256. image files linked to attributes will be ignored A1 10 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide MAPublisher Import Formats Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions 000 001 002 Aggregate No Automated Translation Yes Circles No User Defined Attributes No Circular Arc No Coordinate System Support Yes Elliptical Arc No Generic Colour Support No Ellipses No 3D Support Yes Polygon Yes Schema Required N A Donut Polygon Yes Transaction Support No Point Yes Geometry Type Attribute s57_type Line Yes Text No NOTE Most ENC producers private and public publish their 000 files in encrypted formats Only non encrypted files can be imported in MAPublisher from NOAA or USACE for example GEOGRAPHIC MARKUP LANGUAGE SIMPLE FEATURES GML GML was designed as a geographic interface language for the Geo Web It is currently in draft as an ISO standard ISO 19136 The goal of the format is to provide users with a set of abstract base objects that can be built into working real world datasets It uses as XML base to store geometry and feature information that can easily be transported across the Internet The GML simple feature profile was created by the Open Geospatial Consortium as a restricted subset of the GML specification It provides a reduced geometry and metadata profile that can be shared across many GIS tasks This simple feature model can be used as a base to generate local application profiles for a spec
257. image is a GeoTIFF you should select your image file in order to retrieve georeferencing information as files of this type will contain both the image and its reference data Select your reference file and click Open The values contained in this reference file will be entered automatically into the image parameters Manual Registration To manually enter image parameters you must have one of the following available in page units or map units a The X and Y coordinates of one corner of the image and the X and Y Pixel Size b The X and Y coordinates of one corner of the image and the X and Y size of the image First choose the units you wish to use for entering parameters by making a selection from the Units drop down list Set the Corner Coordinates you have known values for by clicking the appropriate corner of the graphic Then enter the X and Y coordinates for this location in the adjacent fields Next set either the Pixel Size or Effective Map Size The Pixel Size is the value of a single pixel in the units set The Effective Map Size is the X and Y size of the whole image in the units set Setting either option will update the other accordingly NOTE The MAPublisher Register Image now supports the registration of images having non square pixels RESULTS When you are confident that all values have been assigned correctly click OK Providing the coordinate systems of the raster image and the MAP Layer match and the values you have e
258. images from GIS systems are stored in this format A GeoTIFF is a TIFF file with embedded geographic information such as position and scale in world coordinates affine transformation or an explicit list of ground control points NOTE The only way to differentiate a regular TIFF image from a referenced GeoTIFF image is to open it in a spatial imaging software application such as Avenza s Geographic Imager product Unlike the other geographically referenced image formats discussed in this section GeoTIFFs do not require a separate reference file When registering a GeoTIFF image in MAPublisher the same file name must be selected in the Load File dialog box the required georeference information is contained in the file header 118 Chapter 12 Working With Images Register Image Supported projections when saving the coordinate system are listed below Albers Equal Area Cassini Soldner Cassini Cylindrical Equal Area Equidistant Conic Equidistant Cylindrical Equirectangular Gnomonic Hotine Oblique Mercator Laborde Oblique Mercator Lambert Azimuthal Equal Area Lambert Conic Conformal 1SP Lambert Conic Conformal 2SP Lambert Cylindrical Equal Area Mercator Miller Cylindrical New Zealand Map Grid Oblique Mercator Oblique Stereographic Orthographic Polar Stereographic Polyconic Robinson Sinusoidal Stereographic Transverse Mercator Transverse Mercator South Oriented VanDerGrinten Chapter 12 Working With I
259. imilar to the Mercator projection except that the cylinder is wrapped around the ellipsoid so that it touches the surface along the great circle path chosen for the central line instead of along the Earth s equator Scale becomes infinite 90 degrees from the central line and is true along a chosen central line along two straight lines parallel to the central line or along a great circle at an oblique angle The Oblique Mercator projection is used for geographic regions that are centered along lines that are neither meridians nor parallels but that may be taken as great circle routes passing through the region such as the Alaskan panhandle In this variation of the Oblique Mercator projection a point and an azimuth define the central line where the cylinder touches the ellipsoid The planar points determined by this projection may be left unrectified often these are referred to as the u v coordinates in published formula or they may be rectified often these are referred to as the x y coordinates in published formula Rectification consists of rotating the coordinates by a certain angle This implementation of the Oblique Mercator projection allows for a flag to be set to determine if the points should be rectified or not By default the points will be rectified If an unrectified version of the projection is desired the Unrectified Flag parameter should be set to 1 5In the case where the points are rectified the angle of rotation may be one of
260. indrical projection that is neither conformal nor equal area Oswald Winkel developed it in 1914 as the average of the Sinusoidal and Equidistant Cylindrical Equirectangular projections It is used primarily for world maps The central meridian is a straight line while other meridians are equally spaced sinusoidal curves concave toward the central meridian The parallels are equally spaced straight parallel lines perpendicular to the central meridian The poles are represented by lines If the latitude of true scale is chosen to be 50 28 the total area scale will be correct though local area scales will vary The Winkell projection has the following parameters e Longitude of the Center of the Projection e False Easting e Latitude of True Scale False Northing NOTE Only a spherical form of this projection is used The semi major axis of the ellipsoid sphere is used for forward and inverse projection from grid to geodetic coordinates within the system wherein this projection is incorporated Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems A2 49 MAPublisher Supported Projections WINKEL II The Winkel II projection is a pseudocylindrical projection that is neither conformal nor equal area Oswald Winkel developed it in 1918 as the average of the Mollweide and Equidistant Cylindrical Equirectangular projections It is used primarily for world maps The central meridian is a straight line while other meridians are equally soaced curves con
261. ing information such as currency accuracy extent and geographic projection assigned Metadata is typically stored in data models or data dictionaries MIF MID The MapInfo Map Interchange Format An ASCII file format pair exported from MapInfo GIS software The mif file contains the geometry information and the mid file contains the attribute data MrSID MrSID is a file format developed by LizardTech that reduces the size of large high resolution images to a fraction of their original size while maintaining the original image quality and integrity NAD North American Datum Network Two or more interconnected computer systems for implementation of specific functions or a set of interconnected graphic lines defining some spatial features Node The point or intersection at which areas or lines are joined endpoints of an arc NSDI National Spatial Data Infrastructure O Orthophoto A modified copy of a perspective photograph of the Earth s surface with distortions due to tilt and relief removed Overlay A set of graphical data that can be superimposed on another set of graphical data through registration to a common coordinate system The process of laying one set of digital spatial data over another for analysis purposes A5 8 Appendix 5 Glossary M O p Page anchor The location on the page where the map anchor is placed Page extent Defines a rectangular portion of the graphics page to be displayed Page size The
262. ings specified in the Device Settings dialog box will be used to begin reading and interpreting the information the GPS is receiving This information is then used to display the GPS status in the GPS panel as well as to plot points and or lines Manual Plot This method plots a single point at the current position reported by the GPS device The plotted point is reflective of the settings specified under the Manual Plot section of the MAP GPS Point Plot Settings panel i e using the specified scale and point symbol When Manual Plot is clicked a single point will be plotted either on an existing point layer if selected or on a new layer which is automatically created if a point layer is not selected If the Adobe Illustrator document does not contain any MAP View a new one is created in the WGS84 geodetic coordinate system Plot By Time This method plots a single point each time the specified time interval is observed The time interval is displayed in the MAP GPS Point Plot settings panel along with other settings such as scale and point symbol Plot By Distance This method plots a single point each time the specified distance interval is observed The distance interval is displayed in the MAP GPS Point Plot settings panel along with other settings such as scale and point symbol Start Route This method creates a line feature for all valid information received by the GPS Line styling is determined by the Graphic Style selected in the Ad
263. int Avenza Office 43 6969N 43 41 48 98 N 79 23 32 38 W 48 41 8163 N 79 23 5396 W 48 6969 N 79 3922 W 79 3922W 43 6969 79 3922 N 43 6969 079 3922 43d41 48 98 N 79d23 32 38 W 43 41 48 98 W 079 23 32 38 N 43 41 48 98 W 79 23 32 38 43 418163N 79 235396W N43 418163 W79 235396 43 418163 079 235396 43 414898N 79 233238W N 43 414898 W 79 233238 43 414898 079 233238 434148 98N 0792332 38W 434148 98 0792332 38 N 434148 98 W 0792332 38 43414898N 079233238W N 43414898 W 079233238 43414898N 079233238 Chapter 6 Plotting Points 77 MAP Point Plotter Choosing a Symbol and Scale After entering coordinate values select an appropriate symbol to use by clicking the symbol name link Again the symbols displayed are the symbols that currently exist in the Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel To scale the symbol used edit the Scale entry field Clicking the Up and Down arrows will increase or decrease the value by 10 Plotting Points Click Plot to plot the point in the designated MAP layer To plot subsequent points edit the coordinates and also choose different symbols if required and click Plot again 78 Chapter 6 Plotting Points MAP Point Plotter Plot Centroids MAP Point Plotter panel gt Plot Centroids MAP View Select the MAP View containing Plot Centroids the layers of interest Source Layer and Destination
264. int layers then line layers then area layers MicroStation Design file import is not supported under Mac PPC Rosetta operating system Please contact Avenza support if you require more assistance regarding this issue Delimited Text Data txt csv tsv Import and Export MAPublisher also supports the import of Delimited Text Data held in a variety of tabular file formats as long as the data contains coordinate values File types supported are Text txt Tab Separated tsv and Comma Separated csv files Import Settings dialog box In order to import point data with MAPublisher you must set parameters by clicking the Settings button This operation is required to choose the columns of the selected attribute file that will be used to derive the X and Y coordinates of the data and ensure correct georeferencing These and further settings will be discussed in the Delimited Text Data Settings section on page A1 10 28 Chapter 2 Map Data File Formats Import and Export Supported Data Formats KML kml Import and Export Keyhole Markup Language KML is an XML based language for managing the display of three dimensional geospatial data in the programs Google Earth Google Maps Google Mobile and WorldWind The KML file specifies a set of features for display Each feature always has a longitude and a latitude and can have other data such as tilt heading and altitude KML shares some of the same structural grammar as GML KM
265. int is a pole then the meridians great circles radiate from that point and parallels are shown as concentric circles The gnomonic projection has the useful property that all great circles not just those that pass through the central point appear as straight lines conversely all straight lines drawn on it are great circles A navigator taking the shortest route between two points always part of a great circle can plot his course on a gnomonic projection by simply drawing a straight line between the two points Miscellaneous Projections Projections that do not fall into the above categories such as unprojected maps and rectangular latitude and longitude grids Also this classification can be applied to modified projections being altered versions of other projections Pseudo projections have some of the characteristics of another class of projection For example the Sinusoidal is called a pseudo cylindrical projection because all lines of latitude are straight and parallel and all meridians are equally spaced However it is not a truly cylindrical projection because all meridians except the central meridian are curved DATUMS AND ELLIPSOIDS OVERVIEW An ellipsoid is a mathematical figure generated by the revolution of an ellipse about one of its axes The Earth is not a sohere but an ellipsoid distorted by rotation about its axis with the globe bulging at the equator and flattened at the poles The actual amount of the flattening is appro
266. io 3 Captials CAPITAL Y L Rivers SYSTEM St Lawrence uyu Expression Displays the expression Province PROVINCE Y used for the MAP Stylesheet rule Legend Symbol Displays the associated symbol for the MAP Stylesheet rule Rule Name Displays the name of the MAP Stylesheet rule O To create a legend using MAP Stylesheets you must first create a N Legend layer Create a layer in the Adobe Illustrator layers panel drag the layer to a MAP View and define the layer as a Legend layer Then select the MAP Stylesheet that you would like to use to create the legend In the panel options menu select Create MAP Stylesheet legend The legend s font is set by the character panel Select the font you would like to use for your legend using the character panel before creating a MAP Stylesheet Legend Legends are fully customizable If you would like to change any aspect of the legend this is can easily be accomplished Select your legend and use Adobe Illustrator Object gt Ungroup The legend is now Illustrator artwork allowing you freedom to edit individual elements 96 Chapter 9 MAP Stylesheets MAP Stylesheets Panel MAP Stylesheet Editor MAP Stylesheets panel gt Edit Name Editable name of the Edit MAP Stylesheet 1 MAP Stylesheet Rules List of styling criteria Name Density A in a hierarchical format Style Rules Move Up Down To adjust the Style Expression A de ia e x 1
267. ion Lite Gite be STATE_NAME Florida Operator buttons Click to insert an operator into the expression at the current cursor position Expression Entry Where all composition of the expression occurs Use the keyboard operator buttons and or the Objects list to compose the expression Expression Validity Indicates if the expression is valid or invalid If invalid additional info is reported Advanced toggle Click to show or hide the Expression Components section Lew The expression is valid Position 21 e Cursor Position Position of the current text entry point Objects List of attribute and property columns constants and functions for use in the expression To expand a folder click to collapse click 4 Expression Components Objects Description Description Displays information on the currently selected item in ey T Al usa_area limits a staTe_nane lal Double click items to pied them into Constants r the Objects panel i e a description ct las paral Type String and example of the function or Size 25 Layer attributes List of the attribute and pi Er constant or information regarding Functions Default Value property columns which comprise the iR Ags the format of the MAP layer along current layer ACOS Refresh unique values with it s attribute values prod Alabama When selecting an attribute
268. is describes the rotation in degrees of the art around its anchor point Editing this value will rotate art describes the Symbol in use Editing this property will apply the selected symbol to the art describes the x coordinate in the world units of the current point describes the y coordinate in the world units of the current point describes the x coordinate in the document units of the current point text For text on a path or text in a path this will be the x coordinate of the first vertex on the associated path describes the y coordinate in the document units of the current point For text on a path or text in a path this will be the y coordinate of the first vertex on the associated path describes the internal unique ID to refer to Adobe Illustrator artwork within the document There will never be two pieces of artwork with the same ID value at the same time This property cannot be set describes the font size used by the text describes the font family used by the text describes the name of the text field Editing this property will change the name in the Layers panel describes the contents of the text Editing this property will edit text on the page describes the number of characters in the contents of the text art This property cannot be set describes the rotation in degrees of the art around its anchor point Editing this value will rotate art describes the Character Style in use Editing this property will apply the selec
269. is established MAPublisher will be able to perform coordinate system transformations rescaling plotting points etc NOTE In MAPublisher dialog boxes map units are displayed in the coordinate system of the layer So the Map Anchor coordinates must be entered in the Source Coordinate System units For example the lower left corner of a map might be indicated in latitude longitude however the map is projected in WGS84 UTM zone 17N In that case the geodetic latitude longitude coordinates must be converted to ground coordinates in the WGS84 UTM zone 17N system before they are typed in MAPublisher 42 Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing Georeferencing 0 0 X map Illustration on page and map anchors For further information please refer to the appendices See appendix A1 page 34 Georeferencing an Adobe Illustrator file Appendix A2 provides general information on projections and gives details of the MAPublisher coordinate systems as well as customizing options Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing 43 Georeferencing MAP Views Panel Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP Views and MAP Toolbar i MAP Views X lis New MAP View MAP Views List of the distinct er 4 configurations for geospatial 7 i i ai aa parameters i image MAP Layers An alphabetical Interstate Names list of the layers that comprise towers ares each MAP View symbolized by z feature type Morth Arrow scale Import MA
270. is option is used the callout size automatically adapts to the contents and callout image size 142 Chapter 15 MAP Web Author Web Tag Dialog Export Folder Points to the destination folder of the exported Flash Documents Layer List Lists all the layers in the active artboard Layers are preceded with a check box when the option Enable Layer Visibility Toggle is on All layers will be visible but only checked layer will be toggable in the Flash map Quick Selection Buttons These buttons are visible when the option Enable Layer Visibily Toggle is on to Select All or Deselect All layers Enable Layer Visibility Toggle Check this option to add a Layer Control box on the Flash map Flash Viewer Settings Width and Height Size of the window of the Flash map in the browser Cannot be larger than the Adobe Illustrator document Enable Navigation Check this option to display navigations button on the Flash map pan up down left right and zoom in zoom out Compress Metadata File Check this option to compress the file map afm recommended Viewer Style Expand to set the Flash viewer style actions allowed pan and zoom factors Popup Style Expand to set the style of the callout bubbles bubble rounding settings drop shadow options E pt Popup Style Line Style Export to Web Basic Settings Web Export Dialog PA e Basic Settings Advanced Settings
271. ither entered manually or via a reference file are correct the image will be scaled and registered with your vector data NOTES e Raster images cannot be transformed into another coordinate system So after your image is registered and the vector data is transformed through the MAP View Editor Perform Coordinate System Transformation function the image will have to be transformed externally with Avenza s Geographic Imager for example and registered again in MAPublisher e Registered images can be re scaled and rotated together with the vector data The registration process must be redone after the vector data has been re scaled or rotated using the MAP View Editor In the case of a manual registration it is recommended to export the image before applying the changes to the vector data next page This way registering the image again is only a matter of loading a reference file Chapter 12 Working With Images 117 Register Image SUPPORTED GEOREFERENCED IMAGE REFERENCE FORMATS World File tfw tifw wld eww jgw jpw pgw sdw eww blw dmw World files contain the affine relationship between source image coordinates pixel locations and real world reference coordinates lat long or other real world coordinate units World files simply contain a computed relationship between source image coordinates and reference coordinates and not the complete reference point information World files do not support storing co
272. ition of coordinate systems used in specific counties in the U S states of Minnesota and Wisconsin Within a specific county in one of these states the ellipsoid must be expanded by an additional amount to account for the average elevation within that county In the case of a Wisconsin county the ellipsoid must also be adjusted based on the average geoid height for that county For Minnesota counties the average geoid height should be set to zero The LambertConformalConicExtended projection has the following parameters e Longitude of Origin e False Northing e Latitude of Origin e Average Elevation Minnesota and Wisconsin e Scale Factor at projection center e Average Geoid Height Wisconsin only e False Easting Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems A2 35 MAPublisher Supported Projections LAMBERT TANGENT The Lambert Tangent projection is a map projection in which the scale is true along a single standard parallels and the true shape of small areas is preserved This projection is also known as Lambert Conformal Conic 1 parallel Parallels are unequally spaced arcs of concentric circles soaced closer to each other near the center of the map The meridians are equally spaced and intersect the parallels at right angles Coordinate systems based on this projection are used extensively in France When Lambert Tangent is selected in the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box you will need to enter the following parameters False
273. itude 28 64 Latitude 59 87 Maximum Point Longitude 10 32 Latitude 69 23 Envelope Editor A2 12 Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems The Geodetic Datasource Horizontal Datums For Horizontal datums you must select the Ellipsoid the datum is based on as well as the prime meridian used Ellipsoid Besse 1841 Horizontal Datum Editor Linear Units For Linear units you must enter a conversion for the new unit in terms of the scientific standard metres The abbreviation is used to identify the unit within the application interface Example The Abbreviation for metres is m amp Linear Unit Editor X Abbreviation brealey Units Per Meter 0 0026666666666667 Linear Unit Editor Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems A2 13 The Geodetic Datasource Prime Meridians For Prime Meridians you must enter the longitude value of the Prime Meridian and the angular unit that value is in a 1 amp Prime Meridian Editor _Identification Definition Longitude Value 4 367975 Units Degree Prime Meridian Editor WORKING WITH COORDINATE SYSTEMS A coordinate system within MAPublisher defines a mathematical model of the conversion between a specific location on the Earth and a set of coordinates This model is specified by the Geodetic Datasource parameters including the Earth model ellipsoid or datum the units used to measure the
274. ix 2 All About Coordinate Systems MAPublisher Supported Projections The Eckertl projection has the following parameters e Longitude of the Center of the Projection e False Easting e False Northing NOTE Only a spherical form of this projection is used The semi major axis of the ellipsoid sphere issued for forward and inverse projection from grid to geodetic coordinates within the system wherein this projection is incorporated ECKERT II The Eckert II projection is a pseudocylindrical projection that is equal area This projection was presented by Max Eckert in 1906 and is generally used for novelty maps of the world showing a straight line equal area graticule Meridians in this projection are represented by equally spaced converging straight lines broken at the equator The central meridian is half as long as the Equator Parallels are represented by unequally spaced straight parallel lines that are perpendicular to the central meridian Poles are represented by lines half as long as the Equator This projection is symmetrical about the central meridian or the Equator Scale is true along latitudes 55 10 N and S and constant along any given latitude This projection is supported on spheres only The Eckert Il projection has the following parameters e Longitude of the Center of the Projection e False Easting e False Northing NOTE Only a spherical form of this projection is used The semi major axis of the ellipsoid sphere is us
275. ke index based on label position An index Make index based on label position gt City Tex Label layer T City_Text will be created by assigning one index location for each label found on the selected label text layer Make index based on label and matching feature position Make index based on label and matching Tiii midek Jaba Ga Advanced Click this button to feature position MAPublisher will Feature layer City_Symbol iv open the Advanced dialog determine what features to index by s box below enabling you to matching label text on the selected Label text matches attribute NAME Is specify additional options for Label layer to the indicated attribute your index MAPublisher will determine what features to index by matching label text on the n the Fe re layer Anin ill j p PONNE Ta dicell ene r ne indicated layer to the indicated attribute An index will be created for every arid PISA GOP EVEN gria COA erie e cell in which the feature can be found labelled feature can be found Advanced Options Sort index by You can choose to sort the entries in the index file by either feature label or grid cell address Remove duplicate entries Sort index by Feature label Remove duplicate entries If this box is Index Delimiter Index Delimiter Select a delimiter for the checked any duplicate index entries in file Tab Comma or m If will be removed from the generated Tab ee eee ene ee fi
276. lace may be performed on all attributes by default or only on specific columns contained within the MAP Attributes panel by enabling the Just option and choosing a column from the list Criteria may be further refined by enabling the Case sensitive and Match whole word only options There are two methods to replace values The first method requires you to approve each replacement manually by clicking the Replace button so that each instance of the attribute located via the search parameters is successively replaced in the map attribute table The second method allows for the replacement of all found records simultaneously accomplished by clicking the Replace All button Chapter 5 MAP Attributes 65 Find amp Replace Attributes Edit Schema MAP Attributes panel gt Edit Schema Edit Column New Column Edit Schema Name Edit the name of the selected Ae column here A S Name Name STATE_NAME AreaDirection f Up Down Click the w IE vertexCount Display Label STATE _NAME Display Label Edit the column label appropriate button to move Style EF iS displayed the selected column up or IR StrokeWeight Type String v down the hierarchy R Perimeter Type Edit the column type here i B PathClosed Size 25 2 R ArtScale choose from Integer Real String or Column list Attribute and i Area EUAN OED Boolean property columns on the K SOE annn op ie r listed ISHSTATE
277. lash datagrid layer controls are automatically placed within your Flash document External layerCheckboxes js controls are placed externally and can be re arranged using HTML tags Line Style Expand to set the selection and hovering line al styles color thickness Search Box Style Expand to set the style of the search box position color of searched objects Chapter 15 MAP Web Author 143 Export to Web FUNCTIONALITY The final settings for the export to Flash are entered through the Web Export Dialog started from the MAPublisher MAP Web Author panel While settings concerning the map contents and Web tags are done through the classic MAPublisher tools and the Web Tag Dialog the settings in Web Export concerns the parameters specific to the Flash format navigation buttons search box layer controls callout bubble aspect Navigation buttons Pan up down e is e Search box Type in a text It will search left right Canada 1 through the contents of all the Zoom in and out exported callout bubble Callout Bubble Style can be edited corner rounding drop shadow etc ai oo Lines By default objects clicked Layer control Check boxes to e rayem toggle on off layer display U majar city names on are highlighted in blue objects Layer list and positionis ih p Major hiaz hovered on are in green and objects WED entpor Dialog ta found by the sear
278. lation process which will be placed on your desktop Launch Adobe Illustrator Please proceed to the section on Registration and Licensing on the following page NOTE You may install different full version releases i e 8 x and 7 x on the same computer if you have two versions of Adobe Illustrator For example MAPublisher 8 with Adobe Illustrator CS3 and MAPublisher 7 6 3 with Adobe Illustrator CS2 However you cannot have two point releases of MAPublisher 8 x on the same machine even if you have two different versions of Adobe Illustrator For example you cannot operate MAPublisher 8 1 with Adobe Illustrator CS4 and MAPublisher 8 with Adobe Illustrator CS3 on the same computer Chapter 1 Getting Started 15 Installation Instructions MAPublisher License Management MAPublisher will fail to function until activated The following instructions are for the activation of single user licenses of MAPublisher 8 only If you have purchased a floating license please refer to the floating license installation guide provided with your purchase MAPublisher 8 is available in both single user and floating license configurations Floating licenses are designed to allow an organization to deploy a specific number of licenses that can be used and shared on any number of computers over a network IMPORTANT Some peripheral components might interfere with the activation process Before activating MAPublisher users must temporarily unplug or disable mo
279. ld A library of symbols for the major transit systems of the world A library of weather related point symbols A4 2 Appendix 4 Helpful Styles and Symbols Files Appendix 5 Glossary A Accuracy The closeness of results of observations computations or estimates to the true values or the values accepted as being true Accuracy relates to the exactness of the result and is distinguished from precision which relates to the exactness of the operation by which the result is obtained AGI Association for Geographic Information Algorithm A set of rules for solving a problem ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange a widely used industry standard code for exchanging alphanumeric codes in terms of bit signatures ANSI American National Standards Institute an association formed by the American Government and industry to produce and disseminate widely used industrial standards Analog Analogue A continuously varying electronic signal Also refers to traditional paper mapping products and aerial photographs Annotation The explanatory or descriptive alphanumeric text or labels on a map or artwork such as street or place names Application A set of computer programs designed for a specific task ESRI Interchange File File format with the extension e00 for Arclnfo Interchange E00 files exported from Arclnfo Area A bounded continuous two dimensional object which may or may not include its boundary I
280. le Exports the selected MAP View coordinate system to a WKT definition wkt Import MAP View Imports MAP Views and associated MAP Layers from other open documents retaining georeferencing and attribute information Export Enables the export of the selected MAP View or MAP Layer to various GIS formats Merge Layers Allows the combining of two or more MAP Layers as long as their attribute structures match Ctrl key Windows or the Command key Mac select the layers in the MAP Views panel Layer Name Search and Replace To search for text within layer names and specify an alternative Useful for multi layer imports Load Geodetic Datasource Allows the loading of an external data source in xml format Edit Geodetic Datasource Allows you to create new coordinate systems and edit the parameters of existing ones in the data source Apply to all If you are dragging a number of layers of the same feature type to a specified MAP View you should check this box Specify Coordinate System Automatically opens when dragging a MAP Layer to an alternate MAP View and either the source or destination MAP View has an unspecified coordinate system Missing Coordinate System Same as Choose this option in order to assign a coordinate Specify Coordinate System system to the named MAP The World MAP View does not contain any coordinate system information Please specify View that matches that of the coordinate system of
281. le choose Custom enter the desired delimiter Comma into the adjacent entry field Custom FUNCTIONALITY When a Grid or set of Graticules have been created the Make Index filter can be used to generate an index for your map based on the position of text elements in referenced grid cells Index files generated using this function are produced as a simple text file and sorted alphabetically A typical file would be formatted as follows Melrose Place B 4 Richview Avenue A 5 Sesame Street A 4 Wisteria Lane B 5 PREREQUISITES Ensure the grid is selected then go to Filter gt MAP Legend gt Make Index or MAPublisher toolbar button A to access the Make Index tool In Adobe Illustrator CS4 Make Index is found in the Object gt Filters gt MAP Legend menu Chapter 13 Grids and Indexes 127 Make Index USING MAKE INDEX Index Based on Label Position This method will create an index by assigning one index location for each label found on the selected label text layer For example if the label High Street is only found in grid cell A 4 the only entry for High Street in the index file would be as follows High Street A 4 Select the Make index based on label position button to generate an index using this method Then choose the Label layer from the drop down list which contains the text you wish to index Index Based on Label and Matching Feature Position This method will create an index by
282. le once in a single stylesheet The Move Up and Move Down buttons will move the priority of the selected style up or down the list Chapter 9 MAP Stylesheets 97 MAP Stylesheet Editor Assigning an Expression The Expression field describes the criteria for applying the style rule By default the field displays the currently entered expression if any Clicking the Expression field opens either the Simple Expression panel or the Advanced Expression panel depending on the Expression Mode and the current expression see page 68 To choose the mode in which to compose your expression select the Simple or Advanced option Then assign an expression for each rule using the guidelines below Simple Expressions The Simple Expression panel is intended to facilitate quick expression generation First select a column from the drop down list or manually type in a name Choose a Comparison There are six options available Equal to gt Greater than or equal to gt Greater than lt Less than or equal to lt Less than l Not equal to Select the Value against which the comparison will be applied You can select the value from the drop down list or enter the value manually Similarly the value does not have to appear in the list to be valid If you chose any Comparison except Equal to you then have the option of extending your expression further Clicking the Range operator check box enables an additional Comparison and Value inp
283. lect or un select column names to show or hide columns You can also choose to show all columns or hide all columns data table to the current attribute table Right click Windows or Ctrl click Mac on a column to display this menti Apply Expression To assign attribute values or graphical properties to selected art via the input of an expression Find amp Replace Click to find and replace attributes in the current attribute table Edit Schema To edit the properties of all columns comprising the current attribute table i e edit column names visibility type and ArtScale width or assign expressions to Area columns AREA Zoom to Feature Click the Feature STATE_NAME Highlight Feature Click the feature number or right click the attribute STATE_ABBR attribute to highlight that feature on and select Zoom to Feature POPULATION your map 1B Draw RI z001 i id The MAP Attributes panel displays the map attribute and property attribute records for a map layer which are linked to the map s graphic elements and makes them available for editing This panel is also the hub from which you can edit column schemas and visibility add or delete columns join tables find and replace attributes and apply expressions to selected art Only the visible attributes of selected map features will be displayed in the dialog box USING THE MAP ATTRIBUTES PANEL Viewing Attributes Selected features are sorted per la
284. lery Flip Lines T A T z Artistic gt Join Lines i Join Points 4 a Blur ie simplify Li z gt implify Lines wa E Stylize gt peee Pe Texture gt Video t EIR A ns B w E 7 MAF Location Tool m E MAF Area Tool Ellipse st aap O l Five MAPublisher tools can be found in the main Adobe Illustrator Tools panel MAP Crop Tool In Adobe Illustrator CS4 MAPublisher Filters are found in the Object gt Filters menu 20 Chapter 1 Getting Started The MAPublisher Tools MAPublisher Toolbar Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP Toolbar Adobe Illustrator CS3 and CS4 only The new MAPublisher Toolbar allows the user to launch the MAPublisher tools described in the previous paragraph in a single click The MAP toolbar is divided in five sections MAPublisher Import MAPublisher Lines MAPublisher Legends MAPublisher Imaging MAPublisher Panels Zo PF yO Rous SR MusOevorn MAPublisher MAPublisher Lines MAPublisher Legends MAPublisher MAPublisher Panels Import Imaging NOTES e MAPublisher Toolbar is not available for Adobe Illustrator CS2 only for CS3 and higher versions e MAPublisher Toolbar cannot be saved in a workspace Adobe Illustrator main menu Window gt Workspace gt Save Workspace MAPUBLISHER IMPORT Simple Import Advanced Import iA MAPUBLISHER LINES Buffer Line eo Fa gt firs lt Simplify Lines a g Flip Line O m
285. line Common weeding algorithms include distance traversed algorithm Nth point selection algorithm angle selection algorithm William point relaxation algorithm and Douglas Peucker algorithm TIFF Tagged Image File Format a common raster graphic file format Tile A discrete part of the Earth s surface By splitting a study area into tiles considerable savings in access times and improvements in system performance can be achieved Topographic map A map showing natural and man made features as well as relief often in the form of contours Topography The study of the relief of a given area on the Earth s surface usually on a large scale including both natural and man made features Topology The way in which geographic features relate to each other Spatial relationships among features including adjacency and connectivity Relative position as opposed to absolute position specified by coordinates angles and distances Toponym The place names of a region or map feature Transform The process of changing the scale projection or orientation of a mapped image TRIM A GIS data file format from the Terrain Resource Information Management of British Columbia Canada U Ungenerate The file format created by the Arclnfo Ungenerate function UNIX A general purpose multi user computer operating system URL Universal Resource Locator or Internet address USGS United States Geological Survey UTM Universal Transve
286. lines Check the Create black background option to incorporate a layer containing a black background to mimic the AutoCAD environment ESRI INTERCHANGE FILE E00 An archive of files that describes a complete Arclnfo coverage This is either ASCII or compressed into a binary and is used to transfer files between different versions of ArcInfo It is a commonly found format for freely distributed data such as that found at the GIS Data Depot http www geocomm com A single E00 file describes a complete ArcInfo coverage The file itself is actually an archive of several smaller files referred to as subfiles Some of these subfiles have fixed names which do not vary from coverage to coverage and Al 2 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide MAPublisher Import Formats follow a predefined data format The remainder of the subfiles contained within an E00 are the info files These files may contain user defined attributes and have names which vary from coverage to coverage Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions e00 Aggregate No Automated Translation Yes Circles No User Defined Attributes Yes Circular Arc Yes Coordinate System Support Yes Elliptical Arc Yes Spatial Index Never Ellipses No Schema Required Yes Polygon Yes Geometry Type Attribute e00_type Donut Polygon Yes Point Yes Line Yes Text Yes There are essentially four types of geometry defined in E00 files which will be reproduced as layers during import
287. ll About Coordinate Systems A2 41 MAPublisher Supported Projections POLAR STEREOGRAPHIC The Polar Stereographic projection somewhat resembles other polar azimuthal projections with straight radiating meridians and concentric circles for meridians This projection is used for polar mapping within the Universal Polar Stereographic UPS coordinate system When Polar Stereographic is selected in the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box you will need to enter the following parameters e False Northing and False Easting e Longitude of the Center of the Projection e Latitude of the Center of the Projection e Scale Reduction Factor at the Center of the Projection POLYCONIC The Polyconic projection is neither an equal area nor a conformal projection Scale is true along each parallel and along the central meridian Parallels of latitude are arcs of non concentric circles and the projection is free of distortion only along the central meridian The Polyconic projection can be used to represent small areas on any part of the globe preserving shapes areas distances and azimuths in their true relation to the surface of the Earth Polyconic projections over large areas usually result in serious errors and exaggeration of details When Polyconic is selected in the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box you will need to enter the following parameters e False Northing and False Easting e Longitude of the Center of the Projection e Latitude of the Cen
288. ll selected lines or areas are simplified according to the settings Simplified lines or areas will not be simplified again unless the tolerance value is increased For example if a line has been simplified with a proximity of 1 5 km then it will not be simplified again until the tolerance is set to a value larger than 1 5 km In practice it means that simplified lines can be selected again with non simplified lines to run the function again when the Simplify Lines function is run only the new lines will be simplified unless the proximity value is increased NOTES e Itis a good idea to perform simplify lines on artwork before exporting a Flash map This will reduce the size of the file and therefore it will have a faster rendering time e To smooth the appearance of paths using Bezier curves use the Adobe Illustrator function Simplify Lines found in the menu Object gt Path gt Simplify 92 Chapter 8 Line Functions Simplify Lines MAP Stylesheets CLET 17 MAPublisher provides extensive tools for quick easy and accurate styling of points lines areas and text This function is able to read and work with the data found in the MAP Attributes panel and to apply symbols graphic styles and character styles to artwork according to the legend criteria you specify The topics covered in this section are as follows MAP Stylesheets Panel MAP Stylesheet Editor Chapter 9 MAP Stylesheets 93 MAP Stylesheets Pa
289. llel and a point source of light at the centre of the globe projects the surface features onto the cone The cone is then cut along a convenient meridian and unfolded into a flat surface in the shape of a circle with a sector missing All parallels are arcs of circles with a pole the apex of the original cone as their common centre and meridians appear as straight lines converging toward this same point Some conic projections are conformal shape preserving some are equal area size preserving A polyconic projection uses various cones tangent to the globe at different parallels Parallels on the map are arcs of circles but are not concentric Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems A2 1 Overview Azimuthal Projection The result of projecting a spherical surface onto a plane In an azimuthal projection a flat sheet of paper is tangent to the globe at one point The point light source may be located at the globe s centre gnomonic projection on the globe s surface directly opposite the tangent lt point stereographic projection or at some other point along the line defined by the tangent lt point and the center of the globe e g at a point infinitely distant orthographic projection In all azimuthal projections the tangent point is the central point of a circular map all great circles 7 Y passing through the central point are straight lines and all directions from the central point are accurate If the central po
290. llustrator User Guide for more details PPC Power PC e g Macintosh PowerPC computer Precision The number of digits used to express the fractional part of a number The more digits the more precision Projection The representation on a plane surface of any part of the surface of the Earth Also see Map Projection Appendix 5 Glossary A5 9 P P R Raster A method for the storage processing and display of spatial data Each given area is divided into rows and columns which form a regular grid structure Each cell must be rectangular in shape although not necessarily square Each cell within this matrix contains an attribute value as well as location coordinates The spatial location of each cell is implicitly contained within the ordering of the matrix unlike a vector structure which stores topology explicitly Areas containing the same attribute value are recognized as such however raster structures cannot identify the boundaries of such areas as polygons Also raster structures may lead to increased storage in certain situations since they store each cell in the matrix regardless of whether it is a feature or simply empty space Record A set of attributes relating to any entity a set of related contiguous data Redundancy The duplication of data in a database Remote sensing The technique of obtaining data about the environment and the surface of the Earth from a distance for example from aircraft or satellite Ren
291. lowing pages as well as the following online options before contacting Avenza technical support as your situation may be easily addressed by one of the answers contained therein MAPublisher User Forum The MAPublisher User Forum is located at http www avenza com forum Answers to common technical questions may be found in the Common Support Issues and FAQs category All users with a MAPublisher license evaluation or permanent can post and read topics under the General Questions for Evaluation and Licensed Users category Additionally users with maintenance have access to the Maintenance Users category There users can find additional information relative to software updates etc Internet Mailing Lists There are two very popular Internet mailing lists that are populated by experienced MAPublisher users worldwide and offer an open forum for discussing problems solutions tips and other general issues relating to MAPublisher and cartography These lists are also monitored by Avenza technical support staff who often participate with a solution or useful discussion item e mapublisher l This is the main MAPublisher list Subscribe by sending an email to majordomo avenza com with the statement subscribe mapublisher I lt emailaddress gt in the body of the message Substitute your actual email address for lt emailaddress gt e map mac This is a very popular mapping list to which many MAPublisher users belong It is not limited to mac relat
292. lt state Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems A2 7 The Geodetic Datasource rae Edit Geodetic Data Source Datasource File containing the default geodetic Le Datasource C Program Files Avenza MAPublisher 8 Data Source Files geodata xml parameter geodata xm I Custom Data C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Avenza MAPublisher 8 customsystems xml Save Save As Save ch anges Folder Display Name Name Units per Degree Abbrev EPSG Code Sive to a custom file data to Custom Data File containing Angular Units TT gy arcminute ArcMinute 60 59103 xml and view to xvw j All G ArcSecond ArcSecond 3600 arc 9104 k Save AS the custom geodetic Recent s Centesimal Minute Centesimal Minute 111 11111111111 9112 parameter File loaded or Search amp Centesimal Second Centesimal Second 11111 111111111 9113 Coordinate Points G Degree Degree 1 de 9102 i a g g s saved by the user g Coordinate Syste y BrE E AA a E E ae Lock Icon Indicates read E ao E Gon Gon 1 1111111111111 9106 only parameters default A Ellipsoids amp Grad Grad 1 1111111111111 grads 9105 Geodetic Objects See list Envelopes Microradian Microradian 17453 292519943 9109 ones above Horizontal Datums amp Mil_6400 Mil_6400 17 777777777778 9114 Linear Units fe Minute Minute 467707849 minute Prime Meridians amp Radian Radian 0 0174532925
293. ltiple views of a document at several different magnification levels simultaneously Redrawing is Automatic Redrawing of the affected map objects is clean and automatic and impacts only the redrawn portion and possibly some immediately adjacent portions of the map This eliminates the need to wait while the entire map is re drawn or refreshed This applies to text as well as to vector data Broad Selection of Fonts A broad and flexible selection of text fonts styles sizes and enhancement features e g Haloing is available Paste in Front or Behind When pasting map objects elements you have the option of deciding to paste the new object in front or behind the copied elements at the time of pasting Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Al 23 Graphics Backgrounder Postscript Pattern Fills You can use PostScript pattern fills and complex vector strokes You can sample colours from images and apply them precisely to vector data Complex Colour Treatments Even with complex colours you can quickly and accurately create colour ramps with differing depths intensity of 10 20 etc These can be set as individual colours on a panel or as a gradient across mapped features Improved Symbology Improved symbology e g road treatments and cartographic symbols than is available in traditional GIS software Speed Drawing You can easily turn on and off selected layers of a map to speed drawing This can be done by tur
294. mages Register Image 119 Export Image Filter gt MAP Images gt Export Image or MAP Toolbar EN Export Image Store Geography As Select the output Store Geography As format for the georeferencing information for the selected image Save As Choose a destination name Image Report file IRP Ea and directory for the exported image MapInfo TAB file TAB ListGeo file LGO GeoTIFF FUNCTIONALITY MAPublisher offers the ability to export placed raster files as georeferenced images for use in other programs and or for archival purposes This can be useful in a number of ways For example when working with an image for which there is no georeferencing file you can use the MAPublisher Export Image function to create a GeoTIFF or other georeferenced image file based upon the coordinate system of the host MAP View The Register Image filter can be used to accurately position and scale imagery with vector data Alternatively you can manually move scale or rotate imagery to align with artwork in a designated MAP View If your host MAP View contains accurate georeferencing information you can use Export Image to save raster data to a fully georeferenced image format It is also possible to convert your vector artwork to a georeferenced raster image MAPublisher will export the selected image as a TIF with a choice of the five reference file formats see the following pages USING EXPORT
295. mat lacks the capacity to store topological information A single logical Shapefile consists of three physical files each with one of the following file name extensions shp Geometric data shx Index to the geometric data dbf Attributes for the geometric data These extensions are added to the base name of the Shapefile creating separate physical files that must all reside in the same directory You must select the shp file for import Point multipoint polyline and polygon geometric data can be stored in shp files However a single shp file can contain only one type of geometry Each entity in a shp file has a corresponding entry in the shx index file and a corresponding row of attributes in the associated dbf file The order of the entries in each of these files is synchronized For example the 3rd geometric entity in the shp file is pointed to by the 3rd entry in the shx index file and has the attributes held in the 3rd row of the dbf A single Shapefile may also consist of a number of additional files with the following file name extensions sbn sbx Spatial index files for the geometric data These two files are only generating by an ESRI product however they are not required by MAPublisher for import and will they be generated when exporting data to the Shapefile format prj Spatial coordinate system information If a prj file exists in your Shapefile directory holding the coordinate system inform
296. matching label text on a selected Label Layer to the indicated attribute on the Feature layer creating an index entry for every grid cell in which the feature can be found Note that only features that have labels can be indexed For example if High Street passes through grid cells A 3 B 3 and C 4 the grid cells will be sorted alphabetically on one line High Street A 3 B 3 C 4 e Select the Make index based on label and matching feature position button to generate an index using this method e Choose the Label layer from the drop down list which contains the text you wish to index e Choose the layer that was used to generate the labels from the Feature layer drop down list e n the Label text matches attribute list select the attribute column in the selected Feature layer which matches the labels you are indexing Formatting Options If you wish to set additional options to control the formatting of your index file click the Advanced button Choose an option to Sort index by This will be the ordering of your index entries The default is the Feature label itself meaning for example countries starting with A will be listed first Alternatively you can choose to index by Grid cell meaning labels inside the cell marked A 1 will be listed first If you require to remove entries that are duplicates i e street names named twice in the same grid cell you should click the option to Remove duplicate entries Make Index also provid
297. may be used to format the text and images in the contents Click here to see which HTML tags are supported in Flash Trigger External URL Advanced Hover URL Target Click URL Target The specified URL s will be loaded when the user hovers or clicks on this art Use the target tag to load the URL in a specific html frame Previous and Next Click Previous or Next button to switch from one object to another buttons are enabled when more than one object is selected Callout Bubble example Callout title e Santa Fe Depot 2 x Callout Image as set in the image frame FUNCTIONALITY E g e las Kettner Boulevard I I Major Intersection Callout Contents can contain text images and graphics Set in the contents frame L i sd Callout Preview Click this button to open or close the preview of the callout bubble Callout Size Set the size of the Web tag Auto Size Check this option to have the callout bubble size be automatically set from the image size and text contents Trigger External URL Advanced This function allows users to setup properties so that web pages may be opened in a different frame when either clicking or hovering on a web art The user has to create a set of framesets and target the Web page to a specific frame The Web Tag Dialog and Multiple Web Tag Dialog are started from the MAP Web Author panel by clicking the buttons Add Modify o
298. mbert Conformal Conic Projection while zones extending in a north south direction are based on the Transverse Mercator Projection Alaska Florida and New York use both Transverse Mercator and Lambert Conformal Conic for different areas The Aleutian panhandle of Alaska uses the Oblique Mercator Projection Zone boundaries follow state and county lines and because each zone is small distortion is less than one in 10 000 Each zone has a centrally located origin and a central meridian that passes through the origin The United States uses a two zone numbering system The United States Geological Survey USGS Code System and the National Ocean Service NOS Code System However other code systems do exist The State Plane zone is the only required defining parameter for any of the State Plane Coordinate Systems supported in MAPublisher IT IS STRONGLY RECOMMENDED THAT YOU USE THE NGS NADCON GEODETIC DATUM TRANSFORMATION METHOD WHEN CONVERTING STATE PLANE COORDINATES HOWEVER YOU MAY USE THE MOLODENSKY METHOD WHEN CONVERTING STATE PLANE COORDINATE SYSTEM OF 1927 COORDINATES AND SELECT ONE OF THE DEFINED SET OF NAD 27 DATUM TRANSFORMATIONS A State Plane coordinate is specified in MAPublisher by northing and easting values The U S Survey Foot is the standard unit in the State Plane Coordinate System of 1927 The metre is the standard unit in the State Plane Coordinate System of 1983 Any distance unit defined within MAPublisher may be used to speci
299. meridians are equally spaced parabolas intersecting at the poles and concave toward the central meridian The parallels are unequally spaced farthest apart near the Equator They run perpendicular to the central meridian This projection is symmetrical about the central meridian or the equator Scale is true along latitudes 36 46 N and S and constant along any given latitude This projection is supported on spheres only This projection is also known as Putni P4 which was independently presented in Latvia in 1934 The CrasterParabolic projection has the following parameters e Longitude of the Central Meridian e False Northing e False Easting NOTE Only a spherical form of this projection is used The semi major axis of the ellipsoid sphere is used for forward and inverse projection from grid to geodetic coordinates within the system wherein this projection is incorporated DANISH SYSTEM 34 Pre 1999 variation using order 11 polynomial This projection is a variation of the Transverse Mercator projection used in Denmark and is also referred to as UTS34 The projection consists of a base UTM zones 32 and 33 calculation which is then adjusted by an order 11 polynomial The polynomials used in the Danish System 34 projection were developed by K Poder and K Engsager of Kort and Matrikelstyrelsen The polynomial coefficients can be obtained by contacting Kort and Matrikelstyrelsen Note that this projection was superseded in 1999
300. meters e Longitude of Origin e False Easting e False Northing NOTE Only a spherical form of this projection is used The semi major axis of the ellipsoid sphere is used for forward and inverse projection from grid to geodetic coordinates within the system wherein this projection is incorporated A2 28 Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems MAPublisher Supported Projections ECKERT VI The Eckert VI was created by Max Eckert in 1906 and is used for world maps Both are Pseudocylindrical projections whose central meridian is a straight line Meridians on the Eckert VI projection are equally spaced sinusoidal curves In both projections the parallels are unequally spaced straight lines parallel to one another and the Poles are straight lines half as long as the equator Scale is true along latitude 49 16 for Eckert VI The EckertVI projection has the following parameters e Longitude of Origin e Latitude of Origin e Radius of Sphere e False Easting e False Northing NOTE Ifthe spherical_radius parameter is set to a value greater than zero then it will be used as the radius of the sphere If this parameter is set to a value less than or equal to zero then the semi major radius of the Ellipsoid will be used as the radius of the sphere EGYSEGES ORSZAGOS VETULET EOV The Egyseges Orszagos Vetulet EOV is a conformal cylindrical projection in transversal position used uniformly for the Hungarian civilian base maps and
301. milar to MAP Views the icons used for these layers are Area Layer P Point Layer 94 Chapter 9 MAP Stylesheets MAP Stylesheets Panel By default all MAP Layers will be listed as not belonging to a stylesheet No MAP Stylesheet When a new MAP Stylesheet is created drag a MAP Layer into it This will load its attributes for creating legend rules or expressions Loading Symbols and Styles The symbology used by MAP Stylesheets is directly related to the symbols and styles which exist in native Adobe Illustrator panels In order to correctly function the MAP Stylesheet requires that symbology or styles appropriate to the feature type is established in the following Adobe Illustrator panels A Area Stylesheets Graphic Styles panel Window gt Graphic Styles Line Stylesheets Graphic Styles panel Window gt Graphic Styles P Point Stylesheets Symbols panel Window gt Symbols Text Stylesheets Character Styles panel Window gt Type gt Character Styles Symbology can be quickly added to these panels by dragging and dropping artwork from the artboard or by dragging and dropping symbology from custom libraries As an example under Window gt Graphic Style Libraries gt Other Library navigate to the Helpful Styles amp Symbols Files folder see Appendix 4 on your MAPublisher CD and load either MAP_AreaStyles ai or MAP_LineStyles ai Then shift select these styles and drag them into the Graphic Styles panel
302. moved when MAPublisher is uninstalled LOADING A GEODETIC DATASOURCE A geodetic datasource or coordinate system database can be loaded into MAPublisher thus greatly extending the coordinate systems available for use You can load a geodetic database within MAPublisher by choosing Load Geodetic Datasource from the MAP Views panel options menu The directory containing the xml file must also contain the file geocalc xsd This file can be found in the directory of the default geodata xml file see above So the custom xml file can either be copied to the Data Source File directory prior to loading or geocalc xsd should be copied from there to the custom xml directory Any additional change will be saved into the loaded xml file eather ER x New MAP View laap CS Dia Daren Fim OFC l AE Duplicate Map View 1 A On Edit Map View 1 LJ Orra 4 RE Map View 1 ity Brom gt Custos Sribin cs Cocuments E pee i layeri Source Coordinate System L Z Non map layers Specify Anchors ar Import Coordinate System from File Export Coordinate System to File i by T ah Import MAP View from Document Export Map View 1 wt bt Lis Layer Name Search amp Replace Load Geodetic Data Source k SEE a Shere Li bi Mai F ol pee jecdaic ais boro mi Lara I 1 MAP View Edit Geodetic Data Source Selecting a geodetic datasource to load NOTE Coordinate systems may also be extracted from the inpu
303. n is equivalent to a HOM projection except that the defining parameters are different You can specify a HOM projection by specifying a point and the azimuth defining the central line This case allows for the entering of parameters for the RSO projection When Hotine Oblique Mercator 1 Point or is selected in the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box you will need to enter the following parameters e False Northing and False Easting Azimuth of the Central Line e Latitude of the Origin of the Projection e Scale Factor at the Center of the Projection e Longitude at the Center of the Projection e Skew Azimuth NOTE The Skew Azimuth parameter is essential for correct rectified to skew coordinate transformation If you have researched a coordinate system and there is no defined skew angle simply enter the azimuth of the central line as the skew angle This will provide for an identity rectified to skew transformation There are two variations of the Hotine Oblique Mercator 1 Point projection type These are mathematically identical in terms of results returned The only difference is that the Hotine Oblique Mercator 1 Point Method 2 version uses hyperbolic functions in the underlying mathematical computations IMW POLYCONIC The IMW Polyconic projection is a modified Polyconic projection devised as a basis for the1 1 000 000 scale International Map of the World IMW series The IMW Polyconic projection differs from the ordinary Polyconic in tw
304. n the Define Layer dialog box USING POINT PLOTTER Setting up the Symbol Selection The symbols used by Point Plotter are a direct reproduction of those that exist in the Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel To open the Adobe Illustrator symbols panel click the menu Window gt Symbols If you wish to add points to this panel create your symbols as closed Adobe Illustrator objects and drag them into this panel Alternatively open the MAP Symbols file from the Helpful Styles amp Symbols folder on your MAPublisher CD or local drive see Appendix 4 and drag the symbols into your Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel 76 Chapter 6 Plotting Points MAP Point Plotter Entering Coordinates When the Use Current Layer s coordinate system option is toggled coordinate values can be entered in the current MAP units of the coordinate system of the MAP View containing the selected layer When the Use WGS 84 option is toggled the Select button will become enabled Clicking the Select button will open the Select Coordinate System dialog box Choose any coordinate system the coordinates values entered to plot points will be in the unit Point Style for this coordinate system When the selected or default coordinate system is projected X and Y coordinates are entered in the unit Point Style of the coordinate system e g metre kilometre feet When the selected or default coordinate system is Geodetic Lat and Long coordinates are entered in degrees T
305. nance Program so you are well on the way to worry free use of MAPublisher for the first year and will be able to enjoy all the benefits of the MMP immediately All MAPublisher Maintenance Program subscriptions begin on the date of purchase and run for one calendar year Your email address has been automatically entered in the maintenance l online email list for MMP subscribers so that you are assured of receiving all the latest MMP news and access to all the update and upgrade files If you purchased your MAPublisher license from a reseller or are the end user but not the person who purchased the software please contact us at sales avenza com to ensure that we receive your email address and add you to the MMP notification group Renewal Approximately 6 8 weeks prior to the expiration of your annual MMP subscription you will be notified regarding renewal options You will be contacted a minimum of five times prior to expiration in order to ensure that you have ample opportunity to renew or not at your discretion You will have the option of renewing your MMP for an additional year at the then prevailing price or canceling without penalty Of course if you cancel or let your MMP lapse you will no longer be entitled to the benefits of the program as outlined above and will thus have to purchase future upgrades at the upgrade price There is a grace period of approximately 30 days from the time of the MMP expiry during which you may still renew without
306. native to a particular mapping application is not supported by MAPublisher you can often request the data provider to export a file in one of the supported formats When obtaining data you should acquire as much metadata about the files as possible MAPublisher deals with data in the following manner Unprojected data will be imported by MAPublisher with latitude and longitude map anchors which will therefore range from x 180 to 180 y 90 to 90 If you receive projected data you should be aware of the following MAPublisher will import projected data with a true scale and appropriate map anchors Unlike unprojected data these map anchors will not be in lat long but rather in a coordinate system appropriate for the particular projection For most file formats the name of the projection datum and units will be recognized by MAPublisher However if the program cannot find this information in the data and you wish to subsequently reproject your data you will be required to specify the coordinate system Additionally please be aware that MAPublisher is a 2D mapping program Therefore if you attempt to import 3D data with MAPublisher it will be converted to two dimensional artwork by the importers NOTE Data provided in a generic latitude and longitude unprojected coordinate system will usually be recognized as a WGS 84 World Geodetic System 1984 EPSG 4326 coordinate system by the MAPublisher importers 30 Chapter 2 Map Data Fil
307. nce importing a polygon file named county mif and a line file named roads shp would produce two Adobe Illustrator layers named county_area and roads_line which contain the imported files Additionally these layers will be seen as part of a MAP View where the Adobe Illustrator layers will be automatically placed as sub features of a single coordinate system that being the singular coordinate system specified in the Destination MAP View section of the Advanced Import dialog box 40 Chapter 3 Importing Map Data Advanced Import a CA Mn MAP Views and Georeferencing The MAP Views panel is the hub from which many additional MAPublisher features may be accessed The panel itself will display the Adobe Illustrator layers that exist in the current document as sub layers of distinct coordinate systems or MAP Views From this tool you can specify coordinate systems for map layers transform coordinate systems edit scale and data placement merge layers and export to GIS formats During a standard Import process an Adobe Illustrator layer will be created for each feature type automatically and will be automatically appended with a_point _line _area or _text suffix in the Adobe Illustrator Layers panel Certain file types will generate multiple layers such as the levels found in DGN or DXF but they will be similarly split up by feature type A single import of such files will produce a single MAPublisher View as an import can only
308. ndow Cascade Tile Arrange Icons Workspace gt 4 4 Adobe Labs Actions Align Appearance Attributes Brushes Color Color Guide Control Document Info Flattener Preview Gradient Graphic Styles Info Layers Links Magic Wand MAPublisher Navigator Pathfinder Stroke Shift F7 Shift F6 Ctrl F11 F5 F6 Shift 3 Ctri F9 Shift F5 Ctrl F8 F7 Shift Ctrl F9 Ctrl F10 d for editing Scale Bars Grids and Graticules menu item name is adjusted accordingly The MAPublisher panels can be found under the Window menu MAP Attributes Alt Ctri A MAP GPS Panel Alt Shift Ctrl 5 MAP Stylesheets Alt Shift trl F MAP Views Alt Shift HC trl F7 MAP Point Plotter Alt Shift Ctrl P MAP Selection Filters Alt Ctrl F MAP Selection Stats Alt Shift Ctrl MAP Web Author Alt Ctrl F9 MAP Location Alt Shift Ctrl L w MAP Toolbar Alt Shift C trl Fa Chapter 1 Getting Started The MAPublisher Tools 19 The MAPublisher filters can be found under the Filter menu is Apply Last Filter E Last Filter XE ustrator Filters Colors b Create gt MAF Images Export Image Distort gt Register Image Stylize p N fC MAF Legend Create North Arrow i Additional Filters Feature Text Label I I OR cereal MAP Images p l Grids and Graticules l l MAP Legend Make Index n T l MAP Lines bl eee 4 Photoshop Filters MAP Lines Buffer Lines X fe Filter Gal
309. nel Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP Stylesheets or MAP Toolbar 5 Options Menu 200 d New MAP Stylesheet Opens the New MAP Stylesheet List An alphabetical MAP Stylesheets MAP Selection iltes i New MAP Stylesheet Stylesheet dialog box to specify a list of the MAP Stylesheets and v A Drainage Areas Duplicate Drainage Areas name and feature type for the new associated MAP Layers in the A takes 1 Edit Drainage Areas stylesheet kes 2 beara orumi Pantara A 12 e Duplicate MAP Stylesheet Will create depicted with their feature type E Drainage tines l a duplicate of the selected MAP L coastiine Create MAP Stylesheet legend Stylesheet Lock button Click this button to L riversi_tine _ _ _ lock or unlock the layer oie L iversz_tine Edit MAP Stylesheet Will open the MAP Yy Roads 5 Stylesheet Editor dialog box to edit Other MAP Layers Lists the MAP L major Rozas the selected MAP Stylesheet Layers which are not associated v Sahk to any MAP Stylesheet therefore EEI Delete MAP Stylesheet Delete the belonging to a Stylesheet of Son eck selected MAP Stylesheet None ate a v Text Create MAP Stylesheet legend Allows you New MAP Stylesheet Opens the New A T City Names to create a legend using the selected T Town Nam MAP Stylesheet rules Stylesheet dialog box to specify B Ton Nainis a name and feature type for the Bors MENETES new M
310. ng Box to resize Resizing scale bars horizontally will add or remove intervals from the bar s Resizing vertically will adjust the width of the bar s Scale bars can also be resized using the Adobe Illustrator menu Object gt Transform gt Transform Each by changing the horizontal or vertical scales If you require a different design to be used for your scale bar or wish to change any parameter without generating a new version select the scale bar and access the Object gt Edit Scale Bar menu item This will re open the Scale Bar dialog box and the current parameters of the bar will be available for editing NOTE Manually editing the type position font colour etc is not possible on scale bars in their default grouped state However manual editing is still possible if the object is expanded first Object gt Expand Please note however that his will remove all opportunity to subsequently edit the art via the Scale Bar filter Please see Appendix 3 page A3 3 for more information on working with scale bars in MAPublisher 8 132 Chapter 14 Scale Bars and North Arrows Scale Bar Create North Arrow Filter gt MAP Legend gt Create North Arrow or MAP Toolbar bs FUNCTIONALITY The MAPublisher Create North Arrow filter provides the functionality to convert selected symbology into a geographically correct north arrow Once the north arrow is created it will be rotated to true north and this property will be maintained through subse
311. ng and northing are interpreted instead as a false westing and southing The TransverseMercatorSouthOriented projection has the following parameters e Longitude of the Central Meridian False Easting e Latitude of the Origin of the Projection e False Northing e Scale Reduction Factor at the Center of the Projection A2 46 Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems MAPublisher Supported Projections TRANSVERSE MERCATOR STATE PLANE 27 The State Plane Coordinate System SPCS is not a projection rather it is a system for specifying positions of geodetic stations using plane rectangular coordinates This coordinate system that divides all fifty states of the United States Puerto Rico and the U S Virgin Islands into over 120 numbered sections referred to as zones Each zone has an assigned code number that defines the projection parameters for the region There are four possible projections for SPCS The geometric direction of each state determines the projection utilized For states that are longer in the east west direction the Lambert Conformal Conic is used States that are longer in the north south direction use the Transverse Mercator Projection The panhandle of Alaska which has the sole distinction of lying at an angle garners the use of the Oblique Mercator Projection Conversely Guam uses a Polyconic projection The formulae for these calculations are based on Publication 62 4 State Plane Coordinates by Automatic Data Processing
312. ng as the name of the vector file MAPublisher imports SDTS files that have the characters CATD at the end of the file name A typical table to import and join with this file might be called HY01CATD ddf Use the MAPublisher table importer with SDTS file type chosen to import these files When you join layer and table you do the join based on the column from the layer matched to the RCID column of the table Several SDTS sample files can be found on your MAPublisher CD in the SDTS_samples folder Note that the CATD catalog file found amongst the SDTS files explains what each table is ROTATING OBJECTS INDIVIDUALLY IN ADOBE ILLUSTRATOR On some occasions you may wish to rotate selected objects about their own centres rather than as a group about a common origin This can be accomplished using the native Adobe Illustrator Transform Each function To use this function first select the objects you wish to rotate Then go to Object gt Transform gt Transform Each In the Rotate box enter a desired rotation value and click OK Each of the selected objects will be rotated individually about their own centres You may also use the Rotation property column to individually rotate point symbols or text items based ona specified value See chapter 5 for guidelines on how to use this function Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Al 33 General Tips and Hints GEOREFERENCING AN ADOBE ILLUSTRATOR FILE If you are using an existing Adobe Illustra
313. ng the Equator Distortion is moderate except near the outer meridians in the polar regions The Winkel Tripel projection has the following parameters e Longitude of the Center of the Projection e False Easting Standard Parallel e False Northing NOTE Only a spherical form of this projection is used The semi major axis of the ellipsoid sphere is used for forward and inverse projection from grid to geodetic coordinates within the system wherein this projection is incorporated A2 50 Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems MAPublisher Supported Projections Datum Shifts 7 PARAMETER METHODS There are two types of seven parameter transformation available The difference between the two is the rotation sense which direction the rotations take place in This method is sometimes referred to as the Bursa Wolfe method The seven parameter methods incorporate three geocentric translations three geocentric rotations and a scale correction factor To change parameters from one rotation sense to the other you must simply reverse the sign of the rotation values The parameters to define a seven parameter transformation are NOTE To properly define a seven parameter translation you MUST know which rotation sense is used for your transformation parameters The two types of rotation sense for seven parameter transformations are Position Vector Rotation PVR The rotations are defined as positive clockwise as may be imagine
314. ning map is too large the MAP Vector Crop can be run again on the remaining data If the remaining map is too small the MAP Vector Crop can be undone menu Edit gt Undo and run again RESULTS On all visible and unlocked layers e Text objects that have their anchor outside of the cropping rectangle are deleted e Points falling outside of the cropping rectangle are deleted the position of the center of the symbol is relevant e Lines are clipped at the boundary of the cropping rectangle e Areas polygons that are completely out of the cropping rectangle are deleted Areas intersecting with the cropping rectangle are clipped and closed following the edge of the rectangle The overall result is a map coverage reduced to the cropping rectangle outline Subsequently the MAP View s can still be transformed rescaled etc See examples on the next page NOTE The purpose of the MAP Vector Crop is to cut vector data types points lines and polygons Some Adobe Illustrator specific objects might not be cropped properly using this tool for example e Blend and Live Paint objects e Any art using effects that have been rasterized e Custom art such as scale bars grids graticules north arrows expand custom art to crop e Images cannot be cropped with this tool Legacy Text Chapter 7 Drawing Tools 83 MAP Vector Crop Tool Due to an Adobe Illustrator limitation text on a path might flip after a crop operation This is corrected by checkin
315. ning off specified layers and or limiting the display of selected layers to simple vectors with all symbology removed Not only will this speed the handling of the map it lets you easily use underlying vectors for reference with no distraction or distortion caused by mapping symbology Actual Size Viewing In addition to standard zooming and panning capabilities you can view the details on a map at the actual size at which they will be plotted printed Rulers Guides and Alignment Tools Rulers with adjustable guides and multi combination alignment tools are available for use in aligning map objects Grouping and Ungrouping There is grouping and ungrouping functionality When items are grouped you still retain the option of separately accessing querying and otherwise working with the individual components of a map group Store Related Objects Individual but related map objects can be stored together by groups or by layers or both within the graphic file This provides additional control and support in handling and organizing the map components Text Placement The graphics environment offers a truly hands on text placement environment and goes well beyond that of a GIS For example text can be easily placed along any path or outside the map extents and is fully editable A1 24 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Graphics Backgrounder Memory Considerations RAM RECOMMENDATIONS Occasional User 1 GB of RAM is recommended A
316. not supported Data provided in a generic latitude and longitude unprojected coordinate system will usually be recognized as a WGS 84 World Geodetic System 1984 EPSG 4326 coordinate system by the MAPublisher importers Source Coordinate System Once the Dataset text box has been populated with a valid path the program will read the file s to determine the coordinate system and display this in the Source Coordinate System section see chapter 4 on MAP views If the program returns the message No Coordinate System Specified for the coordinate system you may click the Specify button to specify it MAPublisher will read the coordinate system automatically if the file format supports projection information In the Specify Source Coordinate System dialog box coordinate systems are separated into categories to ease the process of choosing a coordinate system Under the Coordinate System category All will list all the coordinate systems in the database For an overview of Geodetic and Projected systems and Datums see appendix A2 If you wish to view the parameters of a certain coordinate system click the Info button Character Encoding Extended and international character sets are supported as attributes on import To assign a character codec suitable for your selected dataset choose the appropriate value from the list box Format Specific Settings Certain file formats will offer additional configuration parameters which can be acces
317. nt Adobe Illustrator session A subsequent click of the Save button will overwrite the original saved selection Clicking Recall will perform the selection that is saved to memory Clicking Clear will remove the saved selection from memory 112 Chapter 11 Making Selections MAP Selection Stats Additional Selection Options This panel also offers additional selection tools MOR MAND and MXOR Clicking the MOR button will select both the currently selected objects and urent Resulting Saved m ange the saved selection Selection M AND rs The MAND button will select the map features in the current selection which Current Resulting f Selection Saved gt Ei are included in the saved selection Selection SS a Current MXOR The M XOR button will select both the currently selected features and the Saved gt saved selection if these selections do not overlap However if the current seein selection includes any features that are part of the saved selection those will be deselected Chapter 11 Making Selections 113 MAP Selection Stats 2 ry ee z U ach z A E Pretty Bay p rms Stocks Niadh ERA JS N Si ig Working With Images MAPublisher contains tools for working with georeferenced raster images such as aerial photography and satellite imagery The Register Image filter allows for accurately registering raster images with georeferencing information to your vector map data
318. nt and professional graphic output results The MAPublisher environment focuses on the map graphics first with the right GIS data management tools to facilitate the map production process in the easiest and most efficient way This is in direct contrast to traditional GIS software that are designed and written for the analysis of geographic data with the graphic map production coming second almost as an afterthought This means that as powerful as most GIS are for analysis they were never designed for cartographic or publication quality mapping Cartographers have long been doing their mapping within graphics environments because they provide tools such as Bezier curves and true CMYK colour separation for publication quality mapping FEATURES OF THE GRAPHIC ENVIRONMENT Accurate Colour Colours displayed on screen accurately reflect the colours as they will be printed Proportional Symbology Symbology is accurately proportional to the map area you have zoomed into Views You can display your document on screen in a variety of ways using the View menu commands For example you can see a preview of the illustration as you edit you can view only the outlines of your artwork or you can preview selected parts of your artwork while displaying the rest as outlines You can also create and save custom views of your document retaining a particular magnification level layering and other viewing features for later retrieval You can even display mu
319. ntains column headings check the Use first line as a header check box though MAPublisher will generally automatically detect if this is the case If the file does not appear to contain column headers MAPublisher will assign the default headers Column1 Column2 to the attribute columns on import Advanced Import File List Once the Dataset text box has been populated with a valid path and you have clicked OK the program will close the Advanced Import Data Source dialog box and either read the selected file s to determine the coordinate system or attach your specified coordinate system to the files The file s will now be listed in the Advanced Import dialog box You can now add more files to this list for instance adding the next file format by re clicking the Add button and proceeding in the same manner as specified above There are two columns present in the Advanced Import list The first will display the full path of each file and the second will display the coordinate system that has either been automatically read by the program or assigned manually Each file added to the Import list will have a row number that can be clicked in order to select it This function will allow you to remove a selected file from the Import list or edit a selected file Therefore to remove a selected file or number of selected files from the Import list click the Remove button NOTE The file list cannot contain a mix of known and unknown coordinate systems
320. ntly cause the loss of precision by the very nature of the complex mathematical calculations that must be performed Additionally there are differences in precision between MAPublisher and Adobe Illustrator MAPublisher calculations are in 64 bit for accuracy but the results still must be stored as 32 bit for Adobe Illustrator As a result please be aware that you may lose precision if you drag repeatedly from one coordinate system to another When determining a coordinate system to use via the drag method we strongly recommend you use Edit gt Undo to revert coordinate systems until you find the appropriate system for your data Layer Name Search and Replace The MAP Views options list also provides a Search and Replace function enabling the quick change of names of multiple Adobe Illustrator layers For example MicroStation Design or CAD imports may contain a large number of similar named layers This option will allow you to quickly change the names of all layers that contain a specified character string 46 Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing MAP Views Panel Merge Layers This panel also provides a fast way of merging Adobe Illustrator layers If you have more than one layer in a MAP View that contain the same attribute structure and data type this option will allow them to be merged into a single layer For example your data may have been received in pieces and you therefore find it occupying multiple layers in Adobe Illustrator Pres
321. o principle ways All meridians are straight and two meridians are made true to scale When IMW Polyconic is selected in the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box you will need to enter the following parameters e False Northing and False Easting e Latitude of the Northern Standard Parallel e Longitude of Central Meridian e Longitude of the Meridian True to Scale Latitude of the Southern Standard Parallel KROVAK The Krovak projection was created and used in Czechoslovakia in the early part of the 20th century It is an oblique version of the Lambert Conformal Conic projections with a pseudo standard parallel that intersects the centerline of the projection at a defined azimuth The projection accurately preserves scale and area along the pseudo standard parallel It is primarily used in the Czech Republic When Krovak is selected in the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box you will need to enter the following parameters False Northing and False Easting Latitude of True Scale e Origin Latitude Azimuth e Origin Longitude centerline A2 34 Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems MAPublisher Supported Projections LABORDE The Laborde projection is an Oblique Mercator projection that is primarily used in Madagascar It is a cylindrical conformal map projection similar to the Mercator system except the cylinder is wrapped around the sphere so that it touches the surface along the great circle path at a chosen azimuth from th
322. o update the text later Choose Cancel to cancel opening the file Legacy Text Conversion MAPublisher has detected that this document contains legacy Illustrator text art N D F Illustrator will not recognize such text as true text art until that art is converted ew Document Format and MAPublisher will not display attributes for legacy text art If you decide not to convert the text at this time and instead opt to convert it M p bl hi 8 manually at a later time be aware that Illustrator s legacy text conversion process u 1S er does NOT preserve attributes for converted text art Update Adobe Illustrator CS2 altextart Y CS3 CS4 MAPublisher text art only f Nothing 14 Chapter 1 Getting Started MAPublisher Compatibility Notes Installation Instructions Please note that MAPublisher is licensed for use on a single computer and once activated will be node locked to that computer and will only function on that computer Therefore before proceeding with installation and activation please ensure that you are installing MAPublisher on the computer upon which you intend to use it WINDOWS 1 4 Make sure that you have a compatible version of Adobe Illustrator installed on your computer If Adobe Illustrator is running exit the program CD version Insert the MAPublisher 8 CD into your CD ROM drive If Autorun is disabled on your system navigate to the MAPublisher 8 0 direct
323. oard 52 Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing MAP View Editor Import MAP View MAP Views panel gt Import MAP View From Document Import MAP View MAP View to transfer 5 LocationMap 1 Document list List of open documents and the MAP Views MAP View 1 contained in them LocationMap2 Country LatLong County UTM FUNCTIONALITY MAPublisher Import MAP View copies a MAP View from one document to another including all the layers that are within that MAP View This can be a useful tool when merging parts of several documents into a single document An example might be to import a commonly used inset map PREREQUISITES At least two documents must be opened to use Import MAP View The active document does not need to contain any MAP View but the second document must at least contain one MAP View To access the function click the Import MAP View from Document item in the MAP Views panel options menu IMPORTING A MAP VIEW The Import MAP View dialog box will show all other documents currently open along with all the MAP Views they contain Simply select the MAP View you wish to import into the current document and click OK to import the MAP View and MAP Layers Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing 53 Import MAP View Export MAP Views panel gt Export and buttons Ey MAP View agp MAP Layer Format Select the export format for the selected layer or MAP View Dataset
324. obe Illustrator Graphic Styles panel Chapter 16 MAP GPS 151 MAP GPS Panel MAP GPS Panel Menu Accessed from the MAP GPS Panel Many of the MAP GPS features can be accessed via the MAP GPS panel options menu These features include Device Settings Point Plot Settings Autosave Settings Edit User Attribute as well as many different log file features The following sections will outline each of the features and their uses Device Settings Opens the Device Settings dialog box Point Plot Settings Opens the Point Plot Settings dialog box Autosave Settings Opens the Autosave Settings dialog box Edit User Attribute for Current Layer Opens the Edit User Attribute for Current Layer dialog box Record Sentence Log Opens the Record Sentence Log dialog box View Sentence Log Opens the View Sentence Log panel Playback Sentence Log Opens the Playback Sentence Log panel Start Scanning Begins Scanning the GPS device Manual Plot Plots a single point Plot by Time Begins plotting points by a specified time Plot by Distance Begins plotting points by a specified distance Start Route Begins plotting a route MAP GPS DEVICE SETTINGS Accessed from the MAP GPS menu Device settings Point Plot Settings Autosave Settings Edit User Attribute for Current Layer Record Sentence Log View Sentence Log Playback Sentence Log Start Scanning Manual Plot Plot by Time Plot by Distance p
325. odetic Survey is establishing HARNs within the U S on a state by state basis You can think of a HARN as a geodetic datum most easily viewed as an enhanced NAD83 datum HARNs are also known as NAD83 91 and High Precision Grid Networks HPGN The NGS HARN method is actually very similar to the NGS NADCON method As with the NADCON method the shift values for a geographic area are stored in a set of grid files one representing latitude shifts named with the extension las and one representing longitude shifts named with the extension los The major difference is that the HARN data files contain shifts from NAD83 to a HARN instead of NAD27 to NAD83 MAPublisher uses grid files in a format published and provided by the National Geodetic Survey Questions about the availability of other HARN grid files and the HARN systems in general should be addressed to Address NGS Information Services NOAA N NGS12 Phone 301 713 3242 National Geodetic Survey SSMC 3 9202 Web Wwww ngs noad gov 1315 East West Highway Silver Spring MD 20910 3282 The current HARNSs are already pre defined within MAPublisher As new HARNs are completed and made available they will be added to avenza xml LONGITUDE ROTATION The Longitude Rotation datum shift method is a transformation on a two dimensional or three dimensional geographic coordinate system that changes the longitude values by a rotation value and leaves the latitude and elevation values unchanged T
326. of showing the entire Earth in an uninterrupted form The Robinson projection is destined to replace the Van der Grinten projection as the premier projection used by the National Geographic Society When Robinson is selected in the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box you will need to enter the following parameters e False Northing and False Easting e Longitude of the Central Meridian SINUSOIDAL The Sinusoidal projection is pseudocylindrical and equal area The central meridian is a straight line All other meridians are shown as equally spaced sinusoidal curves Parallels are equally spaced straight lines parallel to each other Poles are points Scale is true along central meridian and all parallels The Sinusoidal projection is used for maps of South America and Africa When Sinusoidal is selected in the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box you will need to enter the following parameters e False Northing and False Easting e Longitude of the Central Meridian SPACE OBLIQUE MERCATOR The Space Oblique Mercator SOM projection is a modified cylindrical projection with the map surface defined by a Satellite orbit The SOM is an extremely complicated projection We urge you to refer to Map Projections a Working Manual by Snyder for a detailed explanation The SOM projection was designed especially for continuous mapping of satellite imagery The ellipsoidal form with a non circular satellite orbit is implemented within MAPublisher When
327. of the Projection e Latitude of the Southern Standard Parallel e Latitude of the Northern Standard Parallel EQUIDISTANT CYLINDRICAL The Equidistant Cylindrical projection is probably the simplest of all map projections to construct and one of the oldest Meridians and parallels are equidistant straight lines intersecting at right angles Poles are shown as lines This projection is used only in spherical form If the Equator is made the standard parallel true to scale and free of distortion the meridians are spaced at the same distances as the parallels and the graticule appears square This form is often called the Plate Carree or the Simple Cylindrical Projection When Equidistant Cylindrical is selected in the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box you will need to enter the following parameters e Radius of the Sphere False Northing and False Easting e Longitude of the Central Meridian Latitude of True Scale NOTE Only aspherical form of this projection is used The radius of the sphere is used for forward and inverse projection from grid to geodetic coordinates within the system wherein this projection is incorporated You are required to specify a geodetic datum when you use this projection as part of a coordinate system in order to perform geodetic datum shifts into other coordinate systems EUROPEAN STEREOGRAPHIC The European Stereographic projection is a derivation of the Stereographic projection for use in the Netherlands
328. oftware treats the point at 0 0 in the document Page Anchor as being coincident to the lower left corner of the data in real world coordinates Map Anchor From this point on these two points are dynamically linked MAPublisher uses this anchor point in subsequent data transformations such as rescaling and transforming but also in the creation of grids and to maintain georeferencing on export If a coordinate system has not been defined in the source data the Source Coordinate System has to be manually set in MAPublisher as well as the Scale see page 50 One should not estimate this information it is usually provided as metadata by data vendors or indicated as text on the original map Also anchors have to be specified manually see page 45 Map Anchor information must be entered in the coordinate system of the layer Page Anchor are entered in the document units The most common way to set up an Adobe Illustrator page is to set the page origin 0 0 to coincide with the lower left corner of the map extents If this information is not known you can also use a point on the map for which the geographic location is known e g a building or graticule grids on a scanned map this information is usually given by the data provider if not obvious on the map itself You can find page positions of this same point using the Adobe Illustrator Information panel Again once the relationship between the real world coordinates and the page coordinates
329. oints will be plotted Plot Symbol Plot Symbol Choose a symbol to use The symbols displayed here will be the same as those in the Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel enabled only for the Plot by Change in Speed or Plot By Change in Heading options If the check box is selected then when Plot by Time Plot by Distance or Start Route are being used the settings will be applied Enable this Auxiliary GPS Plot Type This setting becomes Enable this Aindiary GPS Poot Type FUNCTIONALITY The MAP GPS Point Plot Settings panel is used for controlling all of the settings related to points to be plotted by the GPS In this dialog box users define parameters such as scale interval and point symbol The Point Plot Settings panel also controls the additional auxiliary settings such as change in speed and change in heading Point symbols reflect the symbols found in the Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel New symbols created or loaded in the Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel will be appended to the MAP GPS Point Plot Settings panel Use the Type drop down list to enter the settings for Manual Plot Plot By Time Plot by Distance Plot by Change in Speed or Plot by Change in Heading USING THE POINT PLOT SETTINGS PANEL Manual Plot The Manual Plot setting option controls how points will be plotted and styled when using the Manual Plot option from the main MAP GPS panel There are two settings for the Manual Plot the Scale and Plot symbol
330. ojection one imagines the paper to be wrapped as a cylinder around the globe tangent to it along the equator Light comes from a point source at the centre of the globe or in some cases from a filament running from pole to pole along the globe s axis In the former case the poles clearly cannot be shown on the map as they would be projected along the axis of the cylinder out to infinity In the latter case the poles become lines forming the top and bottom edges of the map The Mercator projection long popular but now less so is a cylindrical projection of the latter type that can be constructed only mathematically In all cylindrical projections the meridians of longitude which on the globe converge at the poles are parallel to one another in the Mercator projection the parallels of latitude which on the globe are equal distances apart are drawn with increasing separation as their distance from the equator increases in order to preserve shapes However the price paid for preserving shapes is that areas are exaggerated with increasing distance from the equator The effect is most pronounced near the poles E g Greenland is shown with enormously exaggerated size although its shape in small sections is preserved The poles themselves cannot be shown on the Mercator projection Conic Projection The result of projecting a spherical surface onto a cone In a conic projection a paper cone is placed on a globe like a hat tangent to it at some para
331. ology user with the latest news resources and tools affecting the GIS industry http www gisuser com National Atlas of the United States This site is a great source of a wide variety of data files for the United States http www nationalatlas gov atlasftp html NOAA ENC Download NOAA distributes its Electronic Navigational Charts in S57 format free of charge on this site http www nauticalcharts noaa gov mcd enc download_agreement htm Doug Price s list of Free Digital GIS Data This site based at the Tennessee Geographic Information Council and the University of Tennessee offers an extensive list of data download links from around the world http www lib utk edu tngic price html Robert E Kennedy Library California Polytechnic State University California Polytechnic State University has various links to US based map inventories http lib calpoly edu collections gis webresources html Al 28 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Online Links United State Geological Survey Department of the Interior USGS home page This is the primary source for Digital Line Graph DLG files A must have resource is the US Geological Survey Digital Format Standards manual published by the USGS http www usgs gov USGS Home page e http www usgs gov ngpo National Geospatial Program http www usgs gov pubprod index html Products and Publications Listings http greenwood cr usgs gov The USGS Gre
332. olumn FUNCTIONALITY The Edit Attribute for Current Layer dialog box provides the ability to create a new attribute column for the current layer or use an existing string text attribute column and have custom attribute values automatically entered in that column for plotted features Attribute values will be added each time a new point is plotted For example if points are being plotted along a street a Street column could be created and the street name could be added as an automatic attribute value each time a new point is plotted PREREQUISITES Prior to using this feature the current document requires a MAP View and at least one MAP layer If the MAP layer is selected then the Edit User Attribute for Current Layer is accessible and can be set up for use when plotting begins If the above criteria are not met the Edit User Attribute for Current Layer menu item will be greyed out and unavailable USING THE EDIT USER ATTRIBUTE FOR CURRENT LAYER The Edit User Attribute For Current Layer function can be accessed whenever a valid MAP layer is selected Upon opening the dialog box the current layer name will be displayed in the dialog box along with any string attribute column names associated with that layer To add attribute values to an existing attribute column select the desired column name from the Current Attribute combo box and enter the desired attribute value into the Current Value text field To create a new column select the Create New
333. olumns Edit Column To edit l Mew Colum the properties Layer Selection If data is selected Layer Aj Lower48_area 49 areas selected v ProF l of the selected on a number of layers select e 5l style v IRJAREA SISTATE_NAME JPOPULATION BlDraw al column the map layer containing the l 5 3 attributes you wish to view 1 Graphic Style 1 121757 343000 New Mexico 1819046 E Edit Schema Delete Column To with this list The number of 2 E aids 3 264435 873000 Texas 20851820 re delete the currently objects selected on each layer pp selected column is also displayed 3 Graphic Style 1 70003 325000 Oklahoma 3450654 Import Table 4 E Aids 2 113712 679000 Arizona 5130632 Attributes and Properties ___ Attribute and property values 5 _ Graphic Style 1 82196 955000 Kansas 2688418 on the selected layer are e Ml Aids 2 104101 231000 Colorado 4301261 displayed here 7 TB Aids4 157776 310000 California 33871648 s _ Graphic Style 1 84871 909000 Utah 2263169 F Join Table Click to join an external 9 Sk Zoom To Feature E3 a 4 J Hide Column To hide the currently selected column New Column To add a new column to the attribute table Hide Column i New Column iat Edit Style Show All Show Hide Columns gt Hide All Name AreaDirection VertexCount Style StrokeWeight Perimeter PathClosed 2B eee eRe eo Show Hide Columns Se
334. omplete grids and graticules to be drawn Such issues may occur if the MAP View is in a polar projection or the extents of the data cross the 180 degree west east meridian If the generation of a grid graticule causes blank or incomplete results the following workflow should be used 1 Reproject the MAP View to a standard Lat Long projection e g NAD27 Lat Long Degrees Generate your grid or graticules on this MAP View Expand the object choose Object gt Expand Create a new Area layer in the MAP View Drag the expanded grid to this new layer Reproject the MAP View back to the original projection ee hy Appendix3 MAPublisher8HowTo sForLegacyUsers A3 3 Copy and Paste The MAP Copy Paste function has been removed You can now achieve the same functionality via Adobe Illustrator native Copy Paste tools Use Edit gt Copy or Edit gt Cut to copy art Deselect the art Select the destination layer in the Layers panel Use Edit gt Paste in Front or Edit gt Paste in Back to paste the art into the new layer at its previous location al le da e When pasting to layers which already contain an attribute structure the destination layer must have an attribute schema which matches the source layer e When pasting to layers which contain no attribute structure the destination layer will be assigned the same attribute schema as the source layer e The destination layer can be contained in any MAP View as required e The d
335. onal columns as you wish containing additional information to be imported as attribute data If you are using a text editor you can simply type in your data in the following format Column 1 Header Column 2 Header Column 3 Header etc Column 1 Value 1 Column 2 Value 1 Column 3 Value 1 etc Column 1 Value 2 Column 2 Value 2 Column 3 Value 2 etc Note that negative values for the X and Y coordinates denote west longitudes and south latitudes respectively Also make sure to enter a carriage return using the enter key on your keyboard after the last line of data otherwise the last line may be ignored by the MAPublisher Point Importer If you are using a spreadsheet application you can enter your point information as a table and save the file in a text format preferably csv or txt choosing either comma or tab delimiting The spreadsheet application will format the text automatically The screenshot below illustrates an example of such a table in Microsoft Excel prior to exporting as a csv or txt for import into Adobe Illustrator using MAPublisher S file Edit View Insert Format Tools Bata Window Help ziel xi OSA SAS SOAS Or T E Aria 0 gt BLY Egas _ o A Al X Coords B D Y Coords Name Poputation 43 6 Toronto 3 000 000 40 75 New York 10 000 000 45 5 Montreal 1 500 000 24 5 Miami 3 000 DoD 0 z M 4b N Sheet Sheet
336. ontains a coordinate system using custom user defined point styles or units Advanced Options Click the Advanced button to show or hide additional scale bar parameters Specify the number of cells in the bar s by entering a figure in the Number of labeled intervals entry field Depending on the style of scale bar you have chosen you can also specify the Number of horizontal lines that will compose the scale bar If you wish some of the intervals or cells in the bar s to be additionally subdivided choose a figure from the Number of intervals to subdivide list The subdivided cells will begin from the left of the bar s The Number of sub intervals that compose each of these cells can be specified in the next list You can also choose to Add an interval left of zero if required Labelling Options Choose a Character style for the scale bar labels by choosing a style from the list The label options allow you to add extra scaling information to the generated scale bar The text that will be generated by this tool is displayed in the Preview panel when the options are set Generating the Scale Bar When you click OK the selected scale bar will be placed on the legend layer at a default position The Adobe Illustrator editing tools may be used to move the scale bar to a desirable location Chapter 14 Scale Bars and North Arrows 131 Scale Bar EDITING A SCALE BAR Use the bounding box of the generated scale bar View gt Show Boundi
337. oordinate point dimensions in either 2D or 3D For Geodetic and Projected Coordinate Points the Longitude and Latitude style of units must be entered for all 2D Dimensional Points The Longitude Latitude and Ellipsoid Height style of units must be entered for 3D Dimensional Points Geodetic Point Style Editor Identification Definition Dimensions D Longitude Label Geodetic longitude Units Degree Latitude Label Geodetic latitude Units Degree Geodetic Point Style Editor Datum Shifts amp Projected Point Style Editor Identification Definition Dimensions OD East Label Easting Units Meter North Label Northing Units Meter Height Label Height Units Meter Projected Point Style Editor For Datum Shifts you must select an Envelope appropriate geographic area of use If you are unsure of a more specific envelope leave it se to the default World Envelope The Source and Target text boxes are used to specify the two geodetic models the Transformation is valid for The Method specifies the necessary parameters to define a particular datum transformation With the proper method selected enter the appropriate parameters for your datum transformation Be sure to define the appropriate units for each parameter by clicking the Units button amp Datum Shift Editor Envelope Ethiopia Source Adindan Target WGS 1984 Method GeocentricTranslation
338. oosing a coordinate system Choose the folder All to list all the coordinate systems in the database If the coordinate system needed cannot be found then enter a text string in the search text box to query the database for coordinate systems The results are displayed in the Search category For an overview of projections and datums see appendix A2 Searching For a Coordinate System The Specify Source Destination Coordinate System dialog box allows you to search for coordinate systems based on an entered text string Searches can be performed on the whole database or solely in continent and country sub folders To use the Specify Coordinate System type a search term into the text box located at the bottom of the dialog box and click the search button In the Find text box enter the text on which to search For example to find coordinate systems with NAD83 properties enter NAD83 Following the Find text box is the in text box to select an area of the database in which to search For example to find NAD83 in the name only select Names When you have entered the search criteria click the Search button If the search has returned results these results will be displayed in the Specify Coordinate System dialog box in the Search folder and can be immediately selected in order to reproject your data or to assign a coordinate system Search results will be stored in this folder until you restart Adobe Illustrator or perform another Coordinate Sy
339. or editing You can even choose an alternate grid type if required IMPORTANT NOTES Manually editing type position font colour etc is not possible on Grids and Graticules in their default grouped state Manual editing is possible however if you first expand the object Object gt Expand though this will negate any opportunity to subsequently edit the art via the Grids and Graticules filter Certain projected coordinate systems may cause incomplete grids and or graticules to be drawn Such issues may occur if the MAP View is in a polar coordinate system or the extents of the data cross the 180 degree west east meridian Measure grids cannot be labelled properly using actual coordinates when the data is projected using a stereographic or orthographic coordinate system If the generation of a grid graticule causes blank or incomplete results the following workflow should be used Transform the MAP View to a geodetic coordinate system e g WGS 84 Generate your grid or graticules on this MAP View Expand the object Object gt Expand Create a new area layer in the MAP View Drag the expanded grid to this new layer Transform the MAP View back to the original projection Hoe w S Please see Appendix A3 for more information on working with grids and graticules in MAPublisher 8 126 Chapter 13 Grids and Indexes Grids and Graticules Make Index Filter gt MAP Legend gt Make Index or MAP Toolbar A 1 Make Index Ma
340. or generating text that curves with lines of latitude may result in a situation whereby undoing such an operation and subsequently running any other labelling operation causes an apparent hang or lockup of Adobe Illustrator CS2 Eventually Adobe Illustrator will unlock or unfreeze and the operation will continue This situation is only known to occur in Adobe Illustrator CS2 and typically happens when more than 500 labels are placed in a single instance To avoid this problem when working with a large number of labels delete the unwanted labels rather than undoing the labelling operation Adobe is aware of this issue At the time of this writing every possible programmatic workaround has been explored by Avenza but due to the severity and nature of this Adobe bug no solution is available yet This is not an issue in Adobe Illustrator CS3 and CS4 Chapter 10 Labeling Functions 105 Feature Text Label MAP Tagger Tool Tools gt MAP Tagger Tool FUNCTIONALITY The MAP Tagger Tool allows labels to be added to your map based on the attribute data of the features Line Point or Area MAP Layers containing attribute information can be labelled using this filter This tool functions similarly to the Feature Text Label filter However labels are created by clicking the feature with the MAP Tagger Tool You also have greater control over the initial placement of the label because the label is placed where you click and the tool provides the ability to c
341. or such as Notepad to create text files and save them with a gen extension which can then be imported with MAPublisher ESRI Shapefile shp Import and Export Shapefiles are most commonly created by ESRI ArcView product although other products including MAPublisher are capable of generating files in this format Shapefiles store both geometry and attributes for features and a single Shapefile will consist of at least three physical files The shp portion contains the geometric data the dbf contains attributes for the geometric data and the shx contains the index information All three files are required in order to successfully import a Shapefile to Adobe Illustrator using MAPublisher There is also usually a prj file which holds the coordinate system information of the Shapefile and will automatically be read by MAPublisher on import If your Shapefile folder does not contain a prj file you will be required to specify the coordinate system in order to fully utilize MAPublisher The important things to remember when importing Shapefiles are that the shp file must be the one that is selected through the MAPublisher import filter and that all its component files must be in the same folder You may also find that your Shapefile directory comes with two extra files a sbn and a sbx which hold the spatial index for the geometric data These two files will not exist unless the Shapefile was created with an ESRI product and are not necessary
342. ordinate system information IRP Image Report File irp IRP Image Report files are ASCII report files indicating the coordinates of the four corners of the raster file and the pixel size in ground units to allow for georeferencing of the image in other image processing CAD or GIS programs MapInfo TAB File tab MapInfo Table file formats save the complete reference point list information such that it can be loaded again in the future MapInfo TAB files support storing coordinate system information Supported projections when saving the coordinate system are listed below Albers Equal Area Hotine Oblique Mercator Hotine Oblique Mercator 1pt Azimuthal Equidistant Lambert Azimuthal Equal Area Polyconic Cylindrical Equal Area Lambert Conic Conformal Robinson Eckert IV Mercator Sinusoidal Eckert VI Miller Cylindrical Swiss Oblique Mercator Equidistant Conic Mollweide Stereographic Transverse Mercator Gall Stereographic New Zealand Map Grid Coordinate Systems using this projection will not be stored when saving the reference file ListGeo file lgo A ListGeo files are text files containing the GeoTIFF metadata information or tags which can then be read and may also be used as input to other programs GeoTIFF File tif tiff Tagged Image File Format TIFF or TIF is a common raster graphic file format and one of the most common geospatial image formats you are likely to come across Many raster geographic
343. ormat to interpret the data contents more easily The S 57 template and the symbols and graphic styles libraries can be found in the MAPublisher Helpful Styles amp Symbols folder see Appendix 4 TIGER Line rt1 bw1 Import only TIGER is an abbreviation of Topologically Integrated Geographic Encoding and Reference System and was developed by the U S Census Bureau TIGER Line files are a digital database of geographic features such as roads railroads rivers lakes political boundaries census statistical boundaries etc that cover the entire United States The database contains information about these features such as their location in latitude and longitude the name the type of feature address ranges for most streets the geographic relationship to other features and other related information TIGER Line files are the public product created from the Census Bureau TIGER database of geographic formation TIGER was developed in order to support the mapping and related geographic activities required by the census and sample survey programs More information on the TIGER Line file format and data product can be found on the US Census web page at http www census gov geo www tiger MAPublisher considers the rt1 or ow1 file as the TIGER dataset Even though each county will consist of a series of files with a common base name there may be a number of different extensions Remember to select the rt1 or bw1 file when importing TIGER dat
344. ort Allow Random Colour Mode Enabling this option will allow Adobe Illustrator to generate random colour settings for your data e Expand Network Links Checking this box will enable the use of network linked KML files Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Al 9 MAPublisher Import Formats DELIMITED ASCII TEXT CSV TSV TXT An ASCII file containing a tabular data where delimiters separate the columns and rows Common delimiters are commas spaces or tabs Microsoft Excel and many other spreadsheet programs will export data in these formats Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions csv tsv txt Aggregate No Automated Translation Yes Circles No User Defined Attributes Yes Circular Arc No Coordinate System Support No Elliptical Arc No Generic Colour Support No Ellipses No Spatial Index Never Polygon No Schema Required Yes Donut Polygon No Point Yes Line No Text No Prior to the import process additional Settings can be made which will affect how the selected file will import The following parameters can be applied to the import Axis Column Specify which columns contain the x and y coordinates for the point data to be read in e Coordinate Format Choose the formatting type of the data you wish to import e g Decimal Degrees Delimited Degrees Minutes Seconds Packed DMS e Use first line as header Allows the user to enable the first line of the text file to be used as column headings
345. ortant parts of any data set It is in the attribute table that we find important information such as street names for lines Zoning or zip code numbers for areas and elevations for points to go along with our vector line area or point data Along with vector line area and point data imported as explained in the previous sections MAPublisher also imports the attribute data table associated with any vector map file that it supports MAP LAYERS Throughout this guide an Adobe Illustrator layer containing georeferencing and or attribute information will be referred to as a MAP Layer Each MAP Layer which can contain attribute information is symbolized in MAPublisher panels and dialog boxes with an icon depicting its feature type IT Text layer e g text labels MAPUBLISHER PROPERTY ATTRIBUTES In addition to the attribute values that were created upon data import or within a work session Area Line Point and Text layers are also assigned a number of additional MAPublisher attribute columns These property columns prefixed with a are designed to indicate the physical properties of map art on the Adobe Illustrator canvas Art can be modified directly from the attribute table by making edits to values in these columns The following property columns are attached to valid map layers in this version of MAPublisher Area layers ID describes the internal unique ID to refer to Adobe Illustrator artwork within the document There will n
346. orted it is scaled to fit the current page extents If you do not check this option your current scale will be used and some of your data may fall outside of the page extents during the import process 2 Choose to import all of the listed files in the coordinate system and parameters that currently exists in the document for example via a previous import In this case select Use existing and then select the MAP View containing the desired coordinate system Check the Auto scale option to ensure the combination of incoming and existing data will be fit inside the page extents i e existing data may be rescaled as a result If you do not check this option some of your data may be imported outside of the page extents 3 Choose to assign another coordinate system completely by first selecting the Create new option and then clicking Editor This will open the MAP View Editor allowing you to specify a coordinate system from a projection list and make numerous page scaling edits For an in depth look at this tool see chapter 4 RESULTS When you have your file s selected and if necessary specified the coordinate system and or extra settings you can click OK to import The data will be imported into Adobe Illustrator as individual Adobe Illustrator layers one for each feature type in the import The name of these layers will be the same as the name s of the original imported data files with the appropriate feature type extension appended For insta
347. ory on the CD and double click the Setup exe file Electronic version Double click the mp80wi e zip file to open the WinZip self extractor When you have unzipped the files proceed to the MAPublisher directory and double click the Setup exe file Proceed through the installation screens as instructed You will have options to install documentation and tutorial data If you choose to install these components these files can be subsequently be found here Start gt All Programs gt Avenza gt MAPublisher 8 gt MAPublisher Tutorials Launch Adobe Illustrator Please proceed to the section on Registration and Licensing on the following page MAC OS X Make sure that you have a compatible version of Adobe Illustrator installed on your computer If Adobe Illustrator is running exit the program CD version Insert the MAPublisher 8 CD into your CD ROM drive Navigate to the MAPublisher 8 0 directory on the CD and double click the Install MAPublisher 8 0 icon Electronic version Unstuff the mp80mi e dmg file if this operation has not been completed automatically Then proceed to the MAPublisher 8 0 folder and double click the Install MAPublisher 8 0 icon Proceed through the installation screens as instructed Note that documentation and tutorial data will also be installed After installation these files can be found in the Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 MAPublisher Tutorials An Alias to this folder will be created at the end of the instal
348. ot contain georeferencing or attribute information will also appear in this panel under the default MAP View entitled Non MAP layers Such layers can be quickly moved into a specified MAP View with a matching coordinate system When moving a non map layer into a specified MAP View you will be prompted by the Define Layer dialog box to specify the feature type of the layer you are moving Multiple layers may be selected and moved together to a specified MAP View Use the Apply to all function in the Define Layer dialog box if the type is identical for all layers to be moved The Advanced option Base attribute schema on allows you to copy the attribute schema from an existing MAP Layer see chapter 5 for details Duplicating And Deleting MAP Views MAP Views can be duplicated For example to make placement or coordinate system edits to certain MAP layers while leaving the others unchanged drag the MAP layers into the duplicated MAP View then open the MAP View Editor to make the edits Additionally MAP Views that do not contain any MAP layers can be deleted Both of these tools are accessed in the panel options menu of the MAP Views panel You can also delete a MAP View by clicking the Delete button at the base of the panel Note that these functions act on MAP Views only and not MAP Layers Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing 47 MAP Views Panel Creating New MAP Views To create a new MAP View click New MAP View under the panel options menu o
349. ource MAPublisher currently contains over 3500 coordinate systems which are defined by a wide range of differing projections datums and ellipsoids Even though the current list of selections is comprehensive there may be instances where the end users may wish to add a brand new coordinate system to meet their particular needs or perhaps to duplicate and modify an existing definition to change the units for example The default parameters installed with MAPublisher are stored within an XML database file referred to as the Geodetic Datasource a file named geodata xml MAPublisher ships with this base datasource file that is read only It is stored in the following location Windows XP C Program Files Avenza MAPublisher 8 Data Source Files geodata xml Windows Vista C Program Files Avenza MAPublisher 8 Data Source Files geodata xml Mac OS X Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 MAPublisher Plug In Data Source Files geodata xml MAPublisher allows users to create a custom definition where parameters are stored within a separate XML database file Please ensure that where the custom xml is saved there is a copy of the geocalc xsd in the same folder as this will be needed to load the file if not geocalc xsd can be copied from Data Source Files folder NOTES e Only predefined systems are maintained after a new installation of the software Custom systems will have to be re loaded manually e Files saved in the Data Source Files folder will be re
350. oval of Avenza Systems Inc Avenza Systems Inc 124 Merton Street Suite 400 Toronto Ontario M4S 2Z2 Canada Tel 1 416 487 5116 Toll Free North America 1 800 884 2555 Fax 1 416 487 7213 Email info avenza com Web http www avenza com Support Tel 1 416 487 6442 Support email support avenza com Data import export and co ordinate conversion powered by GeoTranslate and GeoCalc c 2008 Blue Marble Geographics Inc All Rights Reserved Cover and Chapter Intro maps courtesy of Carta Topografica Del Monte Calisio e Altipiano Argentario Nature Dynamics snc Rovereto Italy e Geologic Map of Washington State Washington State Dept of Natural Resources Olympia WA USA Hawkesbury River Australian Geographic Terreay Hills NSW Australia e Fostering Transit Oriented Development in Boston Boston Redevelopment Authority Boston MA USA Official Map of Louisiana 2000 Louisiana Department of Transportation and Development Baton Rouge LA USA Wandkaart Apeldoorn City of Apeldoorn Apeldoorn The Netherlands Grand Canyon Sky Terrain Boulder CO USA The World Physical XYZ Digital Map Co Ltd Glasgow and Edinburgh Scotland The Long Path South Central Catskills New York New Jersey Trail Conference Mahwah NJ USA Birmingham CityMap Paperback Atlas XYZ Digital Map Co Ltd Glasgow and Edinburgh Scotland Riga Address Atlas Jana Seta Map Publishers Ltd Riga Latvia e Sou
351. pter 15 MAP Web Author MAP Web Author Panel PREREQUISITES In order to use MAP Web Author you must first complete a map using MAPublisher and Adobe Illustrator tools The size set for the Adobe Illustrator document will be the size of the Flash map on the Web browser It is recommended to set the document size before any work is started However at a later stage the document size may be changed in the Adobe Illustrator Document Setup dialog box Using the Pixels unit is the most practical to compare with Web browser sizes To benefit from the Web tagging based on MAP Attributes the MAP layers must have the relevant attributes populated For example to insert links to images using the Multiple method the image file name and path must be set as an attribute value therefore the MAP layer must have a dedicated attribute field e g house jpg NOTES e Not just any map can be made into a Flash Map A print ready map does not necessarily mean that it is a Flash ready map Unneeded art and attributes should be removed lines should be simplified Layers that do not require tagging will still be exported e Only the active artboard will be exported to Flash Adobe Illustrator CS4 only Furthermore the directory containing the images Source Media Folder must be organized The supported image formats are jpeg png and gif To be sure that images can be viewed properly the latest Flash Player version should be installed download from Adobe websi
352. que ID to refer to Adobe Illustrator artwork within the document There will never be two pieces of artwork with the same ID value at the same time This property cannot be set describes the name of the polygon Editing this property will change the name in the Layers panel describes the number of points in the art This property cannot be set describes the Graphic Style in use Editing this property will apply the selected style to the art describes the stroke weight of the path Editing this property will alter the stroke weight of the art describes whether or not the path is closed yes or no Editing this value will open close the path describes the length of the path in world units This property cannot be set describes the scaling of the line stroke Editing this value will scale the stroke weight describes the x coordinate in the document units of the current point describes the y coordinate in the document units of the current point describes the internal unique ID to refer to Adobe Illustrator artwork within the document There will never be two pieces of artwork with the same ID value at the same time This property cannot be set describes the name of the point Editing this property will change the name in the Layers panel describes the horizontal scaling of a point object Editing this value will scale the symbol in the X axis describes the vertical scaling of a point object Editing this value will scale the symbol in the Y ax
353. quent reprojection or rotation PREREQUISITES The MAP Layer on which the art to be converted to a north arrow resides must be a IO Legend layer and be selected This Legend layer must be hosted by the MAP View that you wish to base the alignment of the north arrow on CREATING A NORTH ARROW Select the piece of art that you want to convert to a north arrow The art can be any form of artwork which can normally be converted to an Adobe Illustrator symbol Then select Filter gt MAP Legend gt Create North Arrow or MAPublisher toolbar button IN Upon creation the north arrow will be added to the Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel and the coordinate system of the host MAP View will be used to align the north arrow correctly When the north arrow symbol is repositioned on the map it will be re oriented to the true north at the new location NOTE Sample north arrow designs are included on your MAPublisher CD Go to Window gt Symbol Libraries gt Other Library navigate to the Helpful Styles amp Symbols folder on your CD and load the MAP_NorthArrows ai file Drag the required symbol onto your Legend layer and then execute the Create North Arrow filter In Adobe Illustrator CS4 Create North Arrow is found in the Object gt Filters gt MAP Legend menu Chapter 14 Scale Bars and North Arrows 133 Create North Arrow MAP Web Author Users are expected to have a basic understanding of HTML syntax to use this feature
354. quired to set a secondary column If the first Sort By column contained any similar values you must specify a secondary column Again click a column in the Sort By Available Columns list and then click the Add button to place the column in the Sort Order list Similarly third fourth and fifth Sort By columns can be specified in the same manner if previous columns contain similar values Note that the Sort By columns are a hierarchy with the topmost specified column being used for the primary sort then the second then third etc To move columns up or down the hierarchy after they have been specified simply select the appropriate column in the Sort Order list and click either the Up or Down button To remove any Sort By columns from the hierarchy select the column in the Sort Order list and click the Remove button Note that a maximum of five columns can be used to sort points into a logical order If the columns specified to sort by do not distinguish an ordering between certain points the order of these points in the attribute table will be used to determine the order of the nodes in the generated line string RESULTS When all the options have been set click OK to join the points on the specified layer An A Area or L Line layer will be generated depending on the specified output layer type which will be placed in the same MAP View as the Input Point layer which has been joined 90 Chapter 8 Line Functions J oin Points Simpli
355. r Graphics DRG are scanned images of published topographic maps from the USGS stored in TIF format They can be placed by Adobe Illustrator and registered by the MAPublisher Register Image filter DRG are also usually very large files 30 40 MB or more and will require extremely large amounts of RAM for any manipulation within Adobe Illustrator EPS The Encapsulated Post Script EPS file is used to transfer PostScript language artwork between applications also see PostScript in the glossary section of the User Guide EPS files are easily opened by Adobe Illustrator because the format is widely supported by most graphics programs It is the preferred format for export to most illustration and page layout programs EPS files are by their nature vector based but can contain embedded raster graphics and fonts GIF Graphic Interchange Format GIF is a colour indexed graphics format commonly used for web pages and image file transfer Adobe Illustrator can export 8 bit indexed colour or grayscale gifs JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group JPEG or JPG is a compression technique for raster file formats The Digital Orthophoto Quadrangle geographic images from the USGS are stored in this format which can be imported by Adobe Illustrator and registered by the MAPublisher Register Image filter DOQ are usually very large files 30 40 MB or more and will require extremely large amounts of RAM PDF Portable Document Format PDF is a standardized
356. r Multiple These dialog boxes are meant to design the callout bubbles also known as Web tag that will pop up when clicking objects in the produced Flash map Not all objects in the map need to be associated with a callout users must design their Flash maps to make them readable not too crowded but still containing the information they wish to display NOTE Objects associated with a callout are also called Web Art Only Web Art will be searchable in the resulting Flash map see Export to Web Chapter 15 MAP Web Author 139 Web Tag Dialog PREREQUISITES In the Web Tag Dialog text and image parameters are edited using HTML Tags HTML Tags are key codes written between less than lt and greater than gt signs that indicate how the Web browser should display the text There are opening and closing version for most but not all of the tags and the affected text is contained between two tags Both the opening and closing tags use the same key code but the closing tag is preceded by an initial extra forward slash sign Examples of text formatting Opening Tag Closing Tag Result lt i gt Maps of the Worl d lt i gt t gt Maps of the World Some HTML tags are used to insert links and images Examples e lt a href http www avenza com gt Avenza Web Page lt a gt gt Creates a link to www avenza com accessed when clicking Avenza Web Page text e lt img src Sourcemedia picture pg hspace 0 vspace 0 al
357. r all other state plane calculations use Exact Methods The parameters for these coordinate systems are defined in Publication 62 4 For further information contact the U S Department of Commerce The Guam27 projection does not require any parameters HAMMER AITOFF The Hammer Aitoff or simply Hammer projection is a modified azimuthal projection that is equal area H H Ernst von Hammer developed it in 1892 It is used most often for whole world maps In this projection the central meridian is depicted as a straight line half the length of the Equator Other meridians are depicted as complex curves unequally spaced along the Equator and concave toward the central meridian The Equator is straight Other parallels are depicted as complex curves unequally spaced along the central meridian and concave toward the nearest pole The poles themselves are represented by points This projection is symmetrical about the central meridian and the Equator Scale decreases along the central meridian and the Equator as you move away from the center This projection has moderate distortion with less shearing action on the outer meridians near the poles than may be found in pseudocylindrical projections The HammerAitoff projection has the following parameters e Longitude of Origin e False Easting e False Northing NOTE Only a spherical form of this projection is used The semi major axis of the ellipsoid sphere is used for forward and inverse proj
358. r by clicking the Create New Selection Filter button or panel options menu This will open the New Selection Filter dialog box The Name text box can be edited to describe the selection filter or its intention For example a selection filter could be named Cities or Countries with 80 or higher literacy 110 Chapter 11 Making Selections MAP Selection Filters The Expression field describes the criteria for the selection of feature art Build a valid expression in the Expression field The Expression Validity icon will report Y if the expression entered is valid Otherwise it will report and include additional warning notes Alternatively click the Browse button to enter and edit expressions via the Edit Expression tool see chapter 5 The following are some examples of basic expressions which can be entered for use as selection filters NAME Ontario Result All items with the value Ontario in the NAME column are selected POPULATION lt 1000000 Result All items with values less than one million in the POPULATION column are selected NAME Ontario OR NAME Alberta Result Items with the value Ontario OR Alberta in the NAME column are selected NAME Ontario AND POPULATION lt 1000000 Result Only items containing the value Ontario in the NAME column AND values less than one million in the POPULATION column are selected Click OK to create the filter adding it to the list of
359. r cartographers and geography researchers there are cartographic GIS base map files e g USGS Demos DLGs TIGER thematic data of a geographic nature e g census data and complete GIS data sets e g ESRI Interchange Files These lists are readily available and there is a comprehensive list of free data sites accessible from the MAPublisher Internet home page at http www avenza com support links html FREE MAP DATA The following are just some of the many sites on the Internet that offer free download of GIS data Data is available from these and other Internet sites in a wide variety of formats Please consult the sections in this manual on file formats chapter 2 and A1 2 to A1 12 to ensure that you obtain usable data AUSLING data Australian national mapping agency offering digital map data satellite imagery and elevation data Data obtained here can be used for commercial purposes with permission http www ga gov au CAST data The Center for Advanced Spatial Technologies CAST University of Arkansas Planned free access on the ARKNet statewide network Among its high tech offerings CAST maintains a catalog of Arkansas U S national and global data e g GIS data in areas of archaeology agriculture and population are downloadable as GIF files across the Internet Obtain a map of historical land coverage data Obtain data sets including Environment Prehistoric and Historic Climate Reconstruction Historic Census
360. r click the New button at the base of the panel This will automatically open the MAP View Editor which will be discussed in the MAP View Editor section allowing you to set up a coordinate system and enter values for scale rotation and page anchors After you have created a new MAP View you must use the Specify Anchors option from the MAP Views panel to define the tie in point between Map Anchors and Page Anchors Note that you must enter Map Anchor values that are indicative of the unit of measurement used in the chosen coordinate system therefore these values are in Angular or Linear units Removing MAPublisher Information At the end of the project cycle it may be useful to permanently remove all georeferencing and attribute information in the current document This can now be accomplished by switching your MAP Layer s to the Non MAP layers category in the MAP Views panel via drag and drop or using the Switch Map View button NOTE This function should only be used as a final step as all attributes and georeferencing will be removed leaving a standard Adobe Illustrator file devoid of all map information Be sure to save a copy of your file before performing this operation 48 Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing MAP Views Panel MAP View Editor MAP Views panel gt Edit MAP View New MAP View Advanced Import gt Create New gt Editor Edit Lower 48 Preview Pane Displays the data extents of the MAP View
361. r line and area legends Character Styles for text legends and Symbols for point legends will automatically be generated and added to the respective Adobe Illustrator panels To qualify for legend conversion legend art in legacy documents must contain the following properties 1 Be ofa valid art type i e polygon path symbol or text 2 Have a legend expression assigned via Assign Legend Info or Auto Assign Legend Info 3 Have a target MAP Layer During the conversion process you will be asked to set additional conversion preferences 1 Determine if target MAP Layers should be immediately assigned to the applicable stylesheet Checking this option will immediately apply the new stylesheets to map art on target layers whereas unchecking this option means the new stylesheets will not be applied on document open allowing you to manually drag target layers into the applicable stylesheet later Note auto assignment conversions are slower 2 Determine if you wish to merge similar converted stylesheets i e stylesheets with a matching feature type and original map layer into a single stylesheet Note this option will be disabled if it is not applicable Tables Table information held on table layers i e MPTables layers will be removed on document open Therefore ensure that all tables have been joined to the vector art prior to opening the document in MAPublisher 8 Chapter 1 Getting Started 13 MAPublisher Compatibility Notes A
362. r rulers before opening either Importer in order for MAPublisher to correctly fit the data into the page extents Once your page has been set up you can access the MAPublisher Simple Import function under the File menu at the Import Map Data pullout or from the MAPublisher toolbar button or by using the keyboard shortcut Shift Ctrl i USING SIMPLE IMPORT Overview The dialog box itself is split into two sections The upper section allows you to choose a file format select the file you wish to import and enter any additional settings that may be required The lower section will display the coordinate system of the selected file and allow you to specify this manually if the program has not detected a coordinate system 34 Chapter 3 Importing Map Data Simple Import Adding Files In order to select a file or files for import you can either leave the Format drop down list as lt Auto detect format gt or set the drop down list to the file type you wish to import If this drop down list is left as lt Auto detect format gt when you search for your GIS file all supported files will be displayed It is often easier therefore to set the Format drop down list at the required format to ease navigation When you have chosen the format click the Browse button to select your file s and then click Open Alternatively you can type in the full path of the file s in the Dataset text box NOTES e The import of multiple of Delimited Text files is
363. reate leader lines for labelling congested areas of the map In addition you may specify options such as alignment to lines of latitude minimum font size horizontal scaling and label position to place labels intelligently PREREQUISITES Before using this filter you must create a T Text layer in your MAP Views panel Create a new layer in the Adobe Illustrator Layers panel and in the MAP Views panel drag it to the MAP View holding the features you wish to label Set the feature type to Text when prompted For best results set up a character style for type font size justification and color Adobe Illustrator menu Window gt Type gt Character Style Select the appropriate style in the Character Style panel while using MAP Tagger tool and MAPublisher will generate labels based on these settings Otherwise labels applied will appear in the current default colour font and font size The MAP Tagger Tool can be found towards the bottom of the Adobe Illustrator Toolbar Double click the s tool to create new label settings or to edit settings MAP TAGGER TOOL SETTINGS Source Layer and Column You must first set the options for MAPublisher to determine the attributes that will be converted to text labels The Source Layer list shows all Area Point and or Text layers in the current document For each layer the Column drop down list is populated with the attribute structure of that layer You must choose a column that holds the attribu
364. reate maps using the MAPublisher filters in Adobe Illustrator This manual covers the concepts necessary to build a map and perform fundamental cartographic and GIS tasks A variety of GIS data as well as the MAPublisher 8 tutorial and quick start documents MAPublisher 8 Tutorial Guide pdf and MAPublisher 8 Quick Start Guide pdf have been provided on your MAPublisher 8 CD or with your MAPublisher 8 download for use with this guide however we do encourage you to experiment with your own data to gain additional experience with MAPublisher tools and functions Together MAPublisher and Adobe Illustrator will give you a totally integrated cartographic design software system with graphics tools and geographic functions present in the same work environment So join first class mapping organizations from around the world and experience modern day map making by reading this user guide going through the tutorials and experimenting with MAPublisher 8 Contents Welcome Contents What s New in MAPublisher 8 vili Chapter 1 Getting Started 11 System ReguilemMeNi S seess teu teneeas cpcaue cum teccawee AEAEE 12 MAPublisher Compatibility Notes cc ccc ccc eee e eee eee e en eeeeee 13 Installation Instructions 5 400 03 tagccathoece ries exe eeesan eee nnamedcenteeuaeahe 15 MAPublisher License Management cece cece eee e eee eect eeeeeeees 16 THe MAPUDIisher ICONS wae tn cn aient ass Kren EENE haat EER eee 19 MAPublisher Toolbar 12
365. ribute and no more then two clauses For example Simple Expression AttributeA 1 Simple Expression AttributeB lt 5 AND AttributeB gt 1 Advanced Expression AttributeC gt 1 AND AttributeD gt 10 If the current expression is not a Simple Expression editing it will always result in the Advanced Expression panel Dynamic Style Linkage Once a MAP Stylesheet has been assigned with styles and symbols those styles and symbols are dynamically linked to their attribute values in the MAP Stylesheet if the expression is a simple equality A simple equality expression is when there is only one attribute and only one clause an equality comparison For example AttributeA 1 is a simple equality expression while AttributeA gt 15 is not Applying the style from a style rule with a simple equality expression manually i e changing a style of a polygon directly from the Graphic Styles panel will assign the attribute value of that style rule in the MAP Stylesheet For example in the case above AttributeA on the modified art would be set to 1 Caution should be used with manually editing the styles of artwork after MAP Stylesheets have been applied if any style rules have simple equalities Similarly as styles and symbols which exist in these Adobe Illustrator panels are linked to the related MAP Stylesheet entries using these styles and symbols to create new artwork will automatically assign the related attribute value to these objects when the
366. rowse Allows the user to navigate to the location where the log is located Playback GPS Sentence Log Log File Allows the user to specify the location OK where the log file is located Log File ae Build Route A route will be created from the Playback Action _ Cancel information in the log file using the selected Graphic style in the Adobe Illustrator panel 0 Build Route Auto Plot by Time Settings from the Point Plot iSt ieee lene settings panel will be used to interpret the log Auto Plot by Distance file and plot points at specified times Auto Plot by Distance Settings from the Point Plot settings panel will be used to interpret the log file and plot points at specified distances FUNCTIONALITY The Playback Sentence Log feature allows for information contained in a log file to be re imported into an Adobe Illustrator document The Playback Sentence Log feature is used in conjunction with the MAP GPS Point Plot Settings panel to create a series of points or a route in the document based upon data previously collected using MAP GPS Depending on the applied settings GPS sessions which have been previously recorded can be recreated in a new or existing document This feature may also be used to import raw NMEA files collected from other devices USING THE PLAYBACK SENTENCE LOG DIALOG BOX The Playback Sentence Log feature is used by selecting a previously recorded log file and then selecting one of
367. rs in their default grouped state Manual editing is possible but objects must be first expanded choose Object gt Expand Note that this will negate any opportunity to subsequently edit the art using MAPublisher editing tools If you require a different design to be used for your Grid or Scale Bar or wish to change any parameter without generating a new version simply select the Grid or Scale Bar and choose Object gt Edit Grid or Scale Bar This will re open the Grids and Graticules or Scale Bar dialog box with the current parameters of the object for subsequent editing Editing the style of text text colour font alignment etc used in the Grid or Scale Bar can be achieved by modifying the properties of the style in the Character Styles panel Use the bounding box of the generated grid or scale bar choose View gt Show Bounding Box to resize Resizing scale bars horizontally will add or remove intervals from the bar s Resizing scale bars vertically will adjust the width of the bar s Resizing grids horizontally or vertically will add or remove component cells in the grid EXPORTING GRIDS To export a grid you must first expand the object choose Object gt Expand then move it to an Area layer Alternatively expand your grid move the legend layer to the Non MAP layers category then move it back into the MAP View specifying the feature type as Area MISSING DATA IN GRIDS ON PROJECTED MAP VIEWS Certain projections may cause inc
368. rse Mercator projection A5 12 Appendix 5 Glossary TU UTM Grid A grid system based upon the Transverse Mercator projection The UTM grid extends North South from 80 N to 80 S latitude and starting at the 180 Meridian is divided eastwards into 60 6 degree zones with a half degree overlap with zone one beginning at 180 degrees longitude The UTM grid is often used for topographic maps and for georeferencing satellite images V Vector linework artwork One method of data type used to store spatial data Vector data is comprised of lines defined by beginning and end points which meet at nodes The locations of these nodes and the topological structure are usually stored explicitly Features are defined by their boundaries only and curved lines are represented as a series of connecting arcs Vector storage involves the storage of explicit topology which raises overheads however it only stores those points which define a feature and all space outside these features is non existent Vector data An abstraction of the real world where positional data is represented in the form of coordinates In vector data the basic units of spatial information are points lines and polygons Each of these units is composed simply as a series of one or more coordinate points A line is a collection of related points and a polygon is a collection of related lines Vertex One of a set of ordered X Y coordinates that constitute a line A points repres
369. s are assigned to the different types of features stored within the data set MAPublisher will look for the extension dlg or opt for the input DLG files Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions dlg opt Aggregate No Automated Translation Yes Circles No User Defined Attributes No Circular Arc No Coordinate System Support Yes Elliptical Arc No Generic Colour Support No Ellipses No Spatial Index Never Polygon Yes Schema Required No Donut Polygon Yes Geometry Type Attribute dlg_type Point Yes Line Yes Text No A1 8 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide MAPublisher Import Formats USGS SDTS CATD DDF SDTS is the USGS robust way of transferring Earth referenced spatial data between dissimilar computer systems with the potential for no information loss It is a transfer standard that embraces the philosophy of self contained transfers i e spatial data attribute georeferencing data quality report data dictionary and other supporting metadata all included in the transfer More info can be found at http mcmcweb er usgs gov sdts Files in the SDTS format will have the extension ddf More information on this format can be found at http mcmcweb er usgs gov sdts A group of ddf files is normally identified by the catalog file or CATD DDF file which relates the files of a single SDTS transfer and binds together all the files with a common prefix Always select the SDTS file which ends in CATD i e HPO1CAT
370. s by removing detail M Mac OS Apple Macintosh operating system Map A graphic representation of features of the Earth s surface or other geographically distributed phenomena Map anchor The minimum X and Y coordinates of the data files Map coordinates The X Y representations of ellipsoidal Earth locations on a mapping plane Map extent The geographic extent of a geographic data set specified by the minimum bounding rectangle MAP Layer A MAPublisher term for an Adobe Illustrator layer containing georeferencing information Map projection A map projection is a systematic representation of a round body such as the Earth on a flat plane surface Each map projection has specific properties that make it useful for specific purposes Also see Projection Appendix 5 Glossary AD 7 L M MAP Selection Filter Expression criteria used for making a selection in MAPublisher documents MAP Stylesheet A MAPublisher Stylesheet containing styles based on attribute information MAP View A MAPublisher term for a distinct configuration for the geospatial parameters coordinate system anchor map scale and rotation that are applied to a common grouping of data layers A MAP Layer must reside within a MAP View Marquee A dashed rectangle drawn with a selection tool used to select multiple objects Meridian A line of longitude running vertically from the north pole to the south pole Metadata Data about data typically includ
371. s in either a mif or mid file extension The mif portion contains the vector geometric data and the mid contains the associated attributes Both files are required in order to successfully import a file of this format to Adobe Illustrator using MAPublisher The important things to remember when importing MapInfo files are that the mif file must be the one that is selected through the MAPublisher import filter and that both files must be in the same folder MAPublisher will automatically locate and deal with the mid file Chapter 2 Map Data File Formats 27 Import and Export Supported Data Formats MapInfo Table tab Import and Export The TAB format is a simple non topological format for storing the geometric location and attribute information of geographic features and is an integral part of the MapInfo product The TAB format defines the geometry and attributes of geographically referenced features in several files with specific file extensions that are stored in the same folder on disk They are tab main file table structure in ASCII format map the file that stores the feature geometry id the file that stores the index of the feature geometry dat the dBASE file that stores the attribute information of features ind table field indexes if necessary The geometry of each feature is stored as a shape that comprises a set of vector coordinates The attributes for each feature are stored as a record in a dBASE table dat
372. s the Ctrl or Shift keys Windows or the Command or Shift keys Mac and click the layers in the MAP Views panel and click the option for Merge Layers The layers will then be merged to provide a single layer holding the data and its associated attributes Creating New Layers to Hold Additional Features In order to plot points generate text use legends or plot grids scale bars and north arrows you will first be required to create extra Adobe Illustrator layers to hold this information This is due to the fact that layers cannot contain more than one feature type Therefore prior to generating these additional map features you need to first create a layer in the Adobe Illustrator layers panel on which these features will be held Subsequently in the MAP Views panel you should move these layers into the MAP View which contains the coordinate system you require to plot the extra features The Feature Type you should specify for these features in the Define Layer dialog box are as follows T for Text items Feature Text Label and MAP Tagger chapter 10 require you have a Text layer for output P for Point symbols Point Plot see chapter 6 will not function without a Point layer selected for Legend items Grids and Graticules see chapter 13 Scale Bars and North Arrows see chapter 14 must be placed on Legend layers Assigning Georeferencing Information To Adobe Illustrator Layers Similarly existing Adobe Illustrator layers that do n
373. s to delete and duplicate stylesheets Selected MAP Stylesheets may be deleted by clicking the Delete button at the base of the panel or by selecting Delete Stylesheet in the panel options menu In order to delete a stylesheet you must first drag associated MAP Layer s Chapter 9 MAP Stylesheets 95 MAP Stylesheets Panel out of the stylesheet such as into No MAP Stylesheet or into another stylesheet Only at this stage will the Delete option be activated Note that moving a stylesheet to No MAP Stylesheet will not restore the data to its default symbology it will simply remove the relationship between attribute value and style symbol Duplicate Stylesheet can be used to create copies of existing stylesheets Even though the copy will not contain a MAP Layer at first the style rules which exist between attributes of the original layer and the symbology will be retained Simply by editing the styles that relate to each value in each stylesheet you can drag a MAP Layer from one MAP Stylesheet to another in order to output different versions of a map Creating a MAP Stylesheet Legend A legend can be quickly created using any MAP Stylesheet Any area line point or text MAP Stylesheets can be used for a legend The legend is created by drawing an area line point symbol or displaying the word Style using the character style set by the rule followed by the expression associated with that MAP Stylesheet rule Ontario PROV NAME Ontar
374. sed by clicking the Settings button These file formats are ESRI Interchange File CAD DWG DXF MicroStation DGN MapInfo MIF MID MapInfo TAB KML Delimited Text Datat and GML Select your file s first If the format accepts additional settings the Settings button will be enabled Study the import settings guide page 33 for an overview of the meanings of these options MicroStation Design file import is not supported under PPC Rosetta operating system t Additional Settings are mandatory only for importing Delimited Text Data Delimited Text Data Settings MAPublisher also allows for the import of delimited text files as point data provided they contain coordinate values Delimited text import allows the user to import many different formats including Decimal Degrees Delimited Degrees Minutes Seconds Degrees Minutes Degrees MinutesSeconds Packed DMS with decimals and Packed DMS see chapter 6 page 77 MAPublisher supports the import of delimited text files that contain any of the following delimiters between data values comma return end of line and tab Chapter 3 Importing Map Data 35 Simple Import To import delimited text data you must choose the Columns to use for your latitude longitude or X and Y coordinates from the two drop down lists Note that only numerical columns will be listed to ease the process of determining the columns to use If the first line of the text file you are importing contains column headings check t
375. some time to choose the one relevant to your MAP View The MAP View Editor also offers a check box to enable you to select a coordinate system that already exists in the document The Same as drop down list will allow you to select from a list of existing georeferenced MAP Views This function can be used to set all the MAP Views of a document to a same coordinate system while they keep a different position on the page Again the Preview Pane will display the new data extents for any new coordinate systems specified in the MAP View Editor To match coordinate systems across a number of MAP Views move the Adobe Illustrator layers into the MAP View containing the coordinate system you require as discussed in the MAP Views panel section If you wish to view the parameters of a certain coordinate system click the Info button To edit a coordinate system please refer to appendix A2 Assigning a Coordinate System To set the current coordinate system of the data rather than change coordinate system you can click the Specify button in the Source Coordinate System frame of the MAP View Editor You must use caution as this option will set source coordinate systems only and not serve to reproject your data Therefore data integrity may be lost if you overwrite the current coordinate system of the MAP View via the use of this utility In the Specify Source Coordinate System dialog box coordinate systems are separated into folders to ease the process of ch
376. stem Search NOTE If you do not find an appropriate coordinate system you can edit or create a new one in this interface To do this please refer to appendix A2 Rotation A rotation figure can be applied or edited by specifying an angle in the entry field or by using the clock hand to rotate the MAP View graphically Notice that changes to rotation will be automatically previewed in the Preview Pane with the green rectangle and arrow depicting the new orientation of the data Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing 51 MAP View Editor New MAP Views The MAP View Editor is opened by default when creating a New MAP View This will enable you to quickly specify the name coordinate system and page scaling for your new MAP View This functionality will be discussed in detail in Georeferencing an Adobe Illustrator file on page A1 34 After you have created a new MAP View you must use the Specify Anchors option from the MAP Views panel to define the tie in point between Map Anchors and Page Anchors see page 45 Map Anchor values must be entered in units that are indicative of the unit of measurement used in the chosen coordinate system which may mean that they may not always be in degrees or Lat Long IMPORTANT NOTES FOR ADOBE ILLUSTRATOR CS4 USERS Adobe Illustrator CS4 introduced the concept of multiple artboards up to 100 MAPublisher 8 takes this new feature into account in the MAP View Editor When using Adobe Illustrator CS4 the MA
377. such that the y axis will be parallel to the meridian through the natural origin of the projection the angle used in this case is often referred to in published formula as gamma If the Rotation Angle parameter is anon zero number it will be used in the rectification If the Rotation Angle is zero the default behavior will be to rectify so that the y axis will be parallel to the meridian through the center of the projection If it is desired that the rectification cause the y axis to be parallel to the meridian through the natural origin of the projection the Use Gamma Flag parameter should be set to 1 The ObliqueMercatorTwoPoint projection has the following parameters e Latitude of the Origin of the Projection e False Easting e Latitude of the First Point e False Northing e Longitude of the First Point e Rotation Angle Defaults to 0 e Latitude of the Second Point e Unrectified Flag Defaults to 0 e Longitude of the Second Point e Use Gamma Flag Defaults to 0 ORTHOGRAPHIC The Orthographic projection closely resembles a globe in appearance since it is a perspective projection from infinite distance Only one hemisphere can be shown at a time This projection is used chiefly for pictorial views and is used only in spherical form When Orthographic is selected in the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box you will need to enter the following parameters e Radius of the Sphere e False Northing and False Easting e Longitude of the C
378. surface of the Earth Grid A set of regularly spaced sample points or an exact set of reference lines over the Earth s surface Appendix 5 Glossary A5 5 F G H Header File A file associated with an image that contains georeferencing information for the image File extensions may be TFW or JPW TIFF JPG World Files IRP Image Report Files or TAB Table files Hydrography The science of hydrography is the measurement and description of the waters on the surface of the Earth in the form of a chart and related publications Hypsography Lines or points which depict the relief of the land or contours or spot elevations Icon An image representing a software function or tool Image A graphic representation or description of a scene typically produced by an optical or electronic device Examples include remotely sensed or satellite data scanned data and photographs Import sequence The order of steps required to import data Integer A number without a decimal Integer values can be less than equal to or greater than zero Isoline A line on a surface connecting points of equal value for any of the characteristics used in the representation of the surface Join Lines A function in MAPublisher for joining a set of linear features based on a common value such as street name JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group is a lossy compression technique for raster file formats L Label Text used to identify a map feature
379. swf map_L2 swf one file per selected toggable layer when the option is selected Chapter 15 MAP Web Author 145 Export to Web Web Export Log Export Folder D MAPublisher8 User Guide MAP Web Author Flash Export Set Folder Permissions Set Folder Permissions In order to view your Flash document with an internet browser Permissions must be set to the Layer List List of the Layer List of Vertices SWF File Size exported layers number TTT of vertices and size Major cities 0 1 KE Export Folder see below Canada province 13102 37 Canada land 0 124 KE background Total SWF File Size Indicates the total size of the created swf file Name a Size Type The smaller the better flashviewer File Folder lt sourcemedia File Folder 50 KB afm compressed Ree i t E htaccess 1KB HTACCESS File is ideal Total SWF File Size 184 KB El hedh E RES NETS Te SllayerCheckboxes js cript Script File Tis Shen atte sf toe vote ocr SAE eee E map afm compressed 7KB COMPRESSED File Metadata afm File Size 71 KB E map swf 91KB Shockwave Flash Object This size should be less than 50 KB compressed or 400 KB uncompressed for best performance E map_L 1 swf 3KB Shockwave Flash Object Metadata a fm File Size To reduce the metadata afm file size E map_L2 swf 1KB Shockwave Flash Object 3 map_L3 swf 1KB Shockwave Flash Object Indicates the size of the e Use Simplify
380. symbols manually in Adobe Illustrator 1 Use Adobe Illustrator Tools for the manual creation of artwork that will comprise the new symbol If you wish to use a character that are contained in a font library select the text character instance and click the menu Type gt Create Outlines to convert the text to vector art 2 Open the Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel Window gt Symbols 3 Select the artwork that will comprise the new symbol and drag it into the Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel double click the symbol in this panel to assign a name 4 When MAP Stylesheet Editor is accessed for Point Stylesheets this symbol will be available in the Style column CREATING A STYLESHEET TEMPLATE You can create template files with legends to automate the production of a series of similar maps 1 The procedure when using MAP Stylesheets is as follows 2 Create a prototype map using the MAPublisher Stylesheet function to create the desired look 3 Make a copy of your prototype map file Delete all the layers from the file so that only the designated stylesheets exist 4 Save it to a new template file 5 Use this template file as a base for future maps as follows a Make a copy of the template file b Import all map layers into the template file and do any needed processing c Inthe MAP Stylesheets panel drag your MAP Layers into the desired MAP Stylesheets d Your new layers will be symbolized by the previously defined Stylesheet C
381. systems you can place the image into Adobe Illustrator To do so follow the steps below e In Adobe Illustrator Layers panel create a new layer e In the MAP Views panel switch this new layer from the Non MAP Layers section to the intended MAP View by click and drag or using Switch MAP Views the layer becomes a MAP Layer As this new MAP layer will be holding the Image only you can assign it any feature type e Finally use the Adobe Illustrator Place function File gt Place to select the image and place it onto your new MAP layer NOTE The image can be placed on any existing MAP layer but its recommend using a specific layer dedicated only to the image registration for better layer management and workflow At this point the image is placed on the artboard in a default location and with a default size It still needs to be registered With the image selected go to Filter gt MAP Images gt Register Image or click the MAPublisher toolbar button p to access the function In Adobe Illustrator CS4 Register Image is found in the Object gt Filters gt MAP Images menu 116 Chapter 12 Working With Images Register Image USING REGISTER IMAGE Registration via Reference File To select a reference file click the Load File button and navigate to the folder containing your reference file The reference file will normally be of the same name as your image but will have the extension irp tfw tab lgo or tif If your
382. t data formats during import process A2 6 Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems The Geodetic Datasource GEODETIC DATASOURCE EDITOR MAPublisher includes an extensive geodetic parameter database The contents of the Geodetic Datasource can be browsed or searched by using a search frame Users can extend MAPublisher Geodetic Datasource to support an unlimited number of custom linear and angular units ellipsoids datums datum shifts and coordinate systems MAPublisher Geodetic Datasource Editor is accessed from the MAP Views panel options menu Edit Geodetic Datasource file NOTE Coordinate systems may also be edited created from the Specify Destination Coordinate System dialog box started from Specify button in MAP Views panel and import dialog boxes but the other geodetic objects are only accessible through Edit Geodetic Datasource Individual entries in the Geodetic Datasource are known as Objects There are different types of objects for different types of definition Objects contained in the Geodetic Datasource are Angular Units Type of units for measuring rotation e g degrees or radians e Coordinate Points Point Style A coordinate point is used to define the orientation of axes used and the type of units used in the system e Coordinate Systems Coordinate Reference Systems A coordinate system is a complete definition needed to express the context of a set of map data see page A2 14 Datum Shifts P
383. t geometric data in mif files Each geometric entity present in a mif file has display properties such as pen and brush width pattern and colour Supported MID MIF properties are as follows MAPublisher supports the import of line weights 0 7 colours 24 bit RGB strokes 1 71 It also supports fonts family style justification for text In order to use line patterns and fill patterns you must have opened or accessed the style library equivalents Two library files have been created MIF_LineStyles ai and MIF_AreaStyles ai which provide support for many of the standard Maplnfo pen styles stroke patterns and brush styles fill patterns These files can be found in the Helpful Styles amp Symbols folder on your MAPublisher CD Please refer to your Adobe Illustrator User Guide for details about how to add these libraries to your Adobe Illustrator Graphic Style panel Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Al 5 MAPublisher Import Formats MAPINFO TABLE TAB TAB is a proprietary geospatial vector data format for geographic information systems software used by MapInfo mapping products A minimum of two files are required for the tab format The DAT file which stores the attribute data and the TAB ASCII file which is the link between all other files and holds information about the type of data file The MapInfo TAB importer is closely patterned after the MapInfo MIF MID reader and writer This commonality makes it easy to support both MI
384. t is usually defined in terms of an external polygon or in terms of a set of grid cells A fundamental unit of geographical information See polygon Aspect Individual azimuthal map projections are divided into three aspects the polar aspect which is tangent at the pole the equatorial aspect which is tangent at the Equator and the oblique aspect which is tangent anywhere else The word aspect has replaced the word case in modern cartographic literature Attribute Non graphic alphanumeric textual information associated with a point line or area element in a GIS data set tabular data associated with geographic features Azimuth The angle measured in degrees between a base line radiating from a center point and another line radiating from the same point Normally the base line points north and degrees are measured clockwise from the base line Appendix 5 Glossary A5 1 A A Base data Fundamental cartographic information e g coastlines political boundaries in relation to which additional data of a more specialized nature may be compiled or overlaid Bezier Curve A Bezier curve consists of two anchor points connected by a curved segment with at least one direction point and direction line attached to each anchor point Binary A number system of base 2 Numbers are represented simply as a series of 0 s or 1 s in contrast to base 10 number systems that represent numbers using the characters 0 9 For example the base 10 number
385. t of an area adjustment rule all labels can be resized to the same size by checking the Set all labels to the same minimum font size option If no rules are enabled MAPublisher will not perform any label scaling If none of the rules specified in the panel can be satisfied MAPublisher will default to placing the label centered over the area In situations with area compounds MAPublisher will label the largest area in the compound P Point Labels Click the Point Labels button to assign MAPublisher Point Label Settings If the Labels curve with lines of latitude option is selected MAPublisher creates a path that conforms to local line of latitude and places the text along it If this option is not selected the labels are placed horizontally This option is enabled only for MAP Views set with a projected coordinate system Adjust the Label Position by specifying where you want the label to be positioned relative to the point The nine options in the list allow you to select where the text anchor will be placed FEATURE TEXT LABEL RESULTS When all the Layer Label Options have been set and the Label Settings have been specified click OK to label the selected features Labels applied using Feature Text Label will appear in the current default colour font and font size as set by the selected character style IMPORTANT NOTE FOR CS2 USERS Due to a known bug in the Adobe Illustrator CS2 text engine running Feature Text Label on lines and
386. t the amount of available memory will decrease rapidly and your computer loses speed This is due to the memory management MAPublisher reserves a fairly large amount of memory for each import action which is not properly returned when the import is done or even when it is cancelled The solution is simple save your file close it and open it again It s not even necessary to close Adobe Illustrator itself By closing the file the reserved memory is properly returned RAM SAVINGTIPS Since a percentage of the memory is taken for attribute storage drop any redundant or otherwise unnecessary attribute fields from the map attributes table Many sources of street data include paths vectors that are segmented based on street addressing information You can use the MAPublisher Join Lines filter to join these into single linear features based on a selected attribute field Reducing the number of objects and data records in the map file will free up memory Many GIS data files are large and when a series of such files is imported you may find that the import filter starts to run more slowly This is because scratch and memory allocations are being used up The best solution is to periodically save your work quit out of Adobe Illustrator and then restart This will free up the available scratch memory Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Al 25 Memory Considerations The minimum number of undoes can be reduced since they ALL reside in memor
387. t v Labels curve with lines of latitude For projected layers choose this option C Labels curve with lines of latitude o i to generate curved text on latitude lines 102 Chapter 10 Labeling Functions Labelling Tools Feature Text Label Filter gt MAP Legend gt Feature Text Label or MAP Toolbar FUNCTIONALITY The Feature Text Label filter allows labels to be added to your map based on the attribute data of the features Line Point or Area MAP Layers containing attribute information can be labelled using this filter All selected features on MAP Layers which contain appropriate attribute information can be labelled using this tool Data selected on multiple MAP Layers can be labelled simultaneously In addition you may specify options such as alignment to lines of latitude minimum font size horizontal scaling and label position to place labels intelligently PREREQUISITES Before using this filter you must create a 4 Text layer in the MAP Views panel Create a new Adobe Illustrator layer in the Adobe Illustrator Layers panel and in the MAP Views panel drag it to the MAP View holding the features you wish to label Set the feature type to Text when prompted For best results set up a character style for type font size justification and color Adobe Illustrator menu Window gt Type gt Character Style Select the appropriate style in the Character Style panel before starting the Feature T
388. take place in a single coordinate system Custom MAP Views may be created in order to georeference existing Adobe Illustrator artwork arr i The following pages deal with the creation and management of MAP Views specifying and reprojecting a coordinate system editing scale and data placement on the page merging Adobe Illustrator layers and exporting to GIS formats The topics covered in this section are as follows Georeferencing MAP Views panel MAP View Editor Import MAP View Export MAP Location Tool Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing 41 Georeferencing INTRODUCTION TO GEOREFERENCING Georeferencing a non georeferenced Adobe Illustrator file in MAPublisher can be separated into three steps 1 A Source Coordinate System must be specified The coordinate system gives a method to represent geographic points in relation to a world origin these are also called point map geographic real world or spatial coordinates Appendix A2 provides details on coordinate systems supported in MAPublisher 2 MAPublisher bases its georeferencing on a tie point within an Adobe Illustrator document page A relationship must be defined between Page Anchor and Map Anchor 3 A Scale is necessary to translate measurements on the ground to measurements on the page During the import process the software reads the coordinate system settings from the input file and calculates a scale to best fit the map data on the page The s
389. tated to 45 on the page SELECTION FILTER NAME Ontario Result All items with the value Ontario in the NAME column are selected POPULATION lt 1000000 Result All items with values less than one million in the POPULATION column are selected NAME Ontario OR NAME Alberta Result All items with the value Ontario OR Alberta in the NAME column are selected NAME Ontario AND POPULATION lt 1000000 Result Only the items containing the value Ontario in the NAME column AND values less than one million in the POPULATION column are selected MAP STYLESHEET NAME Ontario Result All items with the value Ontario in the NAME column are assigned the selected style POPULATION lt 1000000 Result All items with values less than one million in the POPULATION column are assigned the selected style NAME Ontario OR NAME Alberta Result All items with the value Ontario OR Alberta in the NAME column are assigned the selected style NAME Ontario AND POPULATION lt 1000000 Result Only items containing the value Ontario in the NAME column AND values less than one million in the POPULATION column are assigned the selected style 70 Chapter 5 MAP Attributes Edit Expression Example Complex Expressions SELECTION FILTER or MAP STYLESHEET LIKE NAME New Result all items with the string of letters New in the N
390. tc selected column invalid If invalid additional information is reported t For Text stylesheets if the Style list does not contain a recently created character style simply return to the Character Style panel double click this style and click OK in the Character Style Options dialog box This forces Adobe Illustrator to re load the list of character styles FUNCTIONALITY Accessing the MAP Stylesheet Editor When you have a MAP Stylesheet created which hosts at least one MAP Layer of the same type click the stylesheet name and go to Options gt Edit Alternatively double click the new MAP Stylesheet The Name of the current MAP Stylesheet will be displayed at the top of this dialog box which is editable Also a feature type icon will be displayed To begin click the Add button to create elements in your MAP Stylesheet Assigning a Style Rule Name The Style Rule Name column will contain the name of each style rule This can be edited to describe the style rule and or its intention For example style rules could be named Roads or Cities with populations over 200 000 Selecting Styles and Symbols The Style field will contain a list of styles that currently exist in the Adobe Illustrator Graphic Styles panel for Area and Line stylesheets in the Symbols panel for Point stylesheets or in the Character Styles panel for Text stylesheets For each rule choose a style or symbol to use Note you can only use a specified sty
391. te system definition When no georeferencing is present on the selected layer the dialog box will display the coordinates in Page Units The dialog box will also display the Map and Page Anchors the Scale Angle of rotation and the Coordinate System and Units of the MAP Layer The MAP Location Tool also enables the X and Y position of the cursor in the current map units WX and WY to be copied to the clipboard An example of a use of this function is that it enables you to build point files in an external text editor files which can then be re imported with MAPublisher Coordinates are copied with the X value first and Y value second and are delimited by a comma For example 79 396527 43 631979 USING THE MAP LOCATION TOOL To use the MAP Location Tool click the button in Adobe Illustrator Tools panel or on the MAP Toolbar or open the panel through Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP Location With the cursor scroll around your map document and note how the map units update with the location of the mouse With the MAP Location Panel open the values will be constantly updated regardless of the tool that is selected When the MAP Location Tool button is enabled in the Adobe Illustrator Tools panel users are able to copy the coordinates of a specific location The appropriate layer must be selected in the MAP Views panel the MAP View containing the layer will determine the MAP Units and coordinate system used to display the positions To copy t
392. te systems change scale edit data positioning in the document change rotation values and rename MAP Views Any or all of these functions can be achieved with a single visit to the MAP View Editor There is also a preview pane where you can see how the edits made to data will affect its extents in the document USING THE MAP VIEW EDITOR Preview Pane By default the Preview Pane displays the data extents with a green rectangle and the MAP View orientation with an arrow pointing north The Previews option allows you to change the preview to None default green rectangle Coloured boxes previews up to 10 MAP views symbolized with rectangles of different colours Thumbnails preview Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing 49 MAP View Editor a reduced image of the document contents including all MAP views and Thumbnails and boxes shows both thumbnails and coloured boxes of up to 10 MAP views in the document You can click inside the green rectangle and drag to move the data to a more suitable position within the page Use the Zoom In Zoom Out and Center buttons to set the magnification of the preview NOTE Due to Adobe Illustrator rasterization limitation thumbnails cannot be displayed when a very large MAP View is present in a file MAP View Name The current name of the MAP View is listed in the Name text box which you can edit if desired Whether the MAP View Editor is accessed via Advanced Import or from the MAP Views panel e
393. te www adobe com When the exported Flash map is viewed without going through a server you will need to set the Global Security Settings as described on page 146 USING MAP WEB AUTHOR Specify the Source Media Folder The Source Media Folder is the directory containing the images that might be displayed in the Web tags callout bubbles The path to this directory must be specified through the MAP Web Author panel options menu Specify Source Media Folder Either an Absolute Path or a Relative Path may be entered An Absolute Path refers to the full folder directory path e g C folder1 folder2 A Relative Path refers to the folder path from the current location of the Adobe Illustrator document Absolute Path example a LOCA Disk c3 Relative Path example L MAPWebAuthor_Tutorial t MAPWebAuthor_Tutorial m Flash_Canada ai fill Flash_Canada ai Imagefiles AB png J Imagefiles AB png H BCpng BC png m Canada png Canada png MB png NB png NF png MB png m NB png m NFpng NS png NS png NV png k NV png Ba NWT png PEI png ON png QC png PElpng M SK png QCpng Won f SK png YK png If the Adobe Illustrator file is to be exchanged between computers it is good practice to use a Relative Path to avoid having to reset the link to Source Media Folder when the files are moved Chapter 15 MAP Web Author 137 MAP Web Author Panel Add and Edit Web Tags The Web Tag
394. ted in the following directory Windows XP C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Avenza MAPublisher 8 Windows Vista C ProgramData Avenza MAPublisher 8 Mac OS Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 MAPublisher Plug In Data Source Files And the default xvw file saved is customview xvw located in the following directory Windows XP C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Avenza MAPublisher 8 Windows Vista C ProgramData Avenza MAPublisher 8 Mac OS X Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 MAPublisher Plug In When using the Save As button the xml and xvw files are saved in a directory chosen by the user These files can then be exchanged between computers Custom xml and xvw files are loaded into MAPublisher through the MAP Views panel options menu Load Geodetic Datasource NOTE Please ensure that where the custom xml is saved there is a copy of the geocalc xsd in the same folder as this will be needed to load the file geocalc xsd is located in the Data Source Files folder as geodata xml WORKING WITH GEODETIC DATASOURCE OBJECTS Creating or editing objects will prompt the object s editor dialog box each editor contains two tabs Identification and Definition tabs The Identification tab of the editor is used to name the object and associate identifying codes with it if applicable First is the Name text box this is where you need to enter the appropriate name for the definition the name entered is the name t
395. ted style to the art describes the x coordinate in the world units of the current point text For text on a path or text in a path this will be the x coordinate of the first vertex on the associated path describes the y coordinate in the world units of the current point For text on a path or text in a path this will be the y coordinate of the first vertex on the associated path Warning ID property is not persistent if you save a document and re open it you will find that the ID has changed The value will usually not change over the life of adocument session but there are Adobe Illustrator operations that can cause the value to change Chapter 5 MAP Attributes 61 Attributes Foreword IMPORTANT ADOBE ILLUSTRATOR COMPATIBILITY NOTES Some Adobe Illustrator functions may cause the link between artwork objects and their attributes to be broken resulting in possible data loss These functions are e Compound path Make e Pathfinder e Live Paint e Blob brush Adobe Illustrator CS4 If required users should first duplicate their working layer in the Adobe Illustrator Layers panel before using these functions The original layer can be kept for labelling see chapter 10 or for information purposes 62 Chapter 5 MAP Attributes Attributes Foreword MAP Attributes Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP Attributes and MAP Toolbar E Click header to sort column values alpha numerically Click and drag separator to resize the c
396. tem the parameters themselves may be customized Every parameter must be set in the following sequence ellipsoid datum envelop unit angular or linear geodetic system and then projected system 5 Press the OK button to create the object 6 Press the Save button to commit your update to the Geodetic Datasource file Changing An Existing Object 1 Select Edit Geodetic Datasource from the options menu from the MAPublisher MAP Views panel 2 Select the object and choose the Edit Object button 3 Enter the modified parameters for the envelope point style geodetic value projection vertical reference angular unit linear unit oe scale factor unit where appropriate 4 Press the OK button to commit your changes 5 Press the Save button to commit your update to the Geodetic Datasource file Deleting An Existing Coordinate System Object Select Edit Geodetic Datasource from the options menu from the MAPublisher MAP Views panel Select the object and choose the Delete Object button Press the OK button to commit your changes Press the Save button to commit your update to the Geodetic Datasource file eS A2 16 Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems The Geodetic Datasource Copying An Existing Object 1 Select Edit Geodetic Datasource from the options menu from the MAPublisher MAP Views panel 2 Select the object and choose the Copy Object button amp 3 Press the OK button to commit your changes 4 Pr
397. ter for image link and charts e Highlight the text e Click the edit buttons see below The HTML tags are added to the text body In the Preview the text is shown in the appropriate format and images links or charts are displayed HTML text E Hyper Graf Ep TT van averea com gt Avenza line lt ul gt lt li gt list l lt li gt List lt li gt list 2 lt li gt lt li gt list 3 lt li gt lt ul gt Chapter 15 MAP Web Author 141 Web Tag Dialog More advanced HTML tags combinations are possible to create more effects For more information and a complete list of HTML tags supported by Adobe Flash click the link on the Web Tag dialog box or go to http livedocs adobe com flash 9 0 main wwhelp wwhimpl common html wwhelp htm context LiveDocs_Parts amp file 00000922 html Aside from the HTML tags the Web Tag Dialog provides a drop down list to pick MAP Attributes name visible attributes only or the Template as set up in the MAP Web Author panel lt insest atribute poe oor Titi gt Oe TEMPLATES e Template Loads the template as set up Qo Restaurant_Nane in the MAP Web Author panel Ob Address SeZip Codety 9oPhone_Number t _ __ MAPAttributes Pick an attribute name aWebSite in the list so that it gets inserted in the eSpeciaiies callout bubble contents Qolmagel Fo Foliage NOTE MAP Attributes column names are case sensitive Auto Size Option When th
398. ter of the Projection QUARTIC AUTHALIC The Quartic Authalic projection is a pseudocylindrical equal area projection that is used primarily for world maps It was first presented by Karl Siemon in 1937 and then later presented independently by Oscar Sherman Adams in 1945 This projection serves as a basis for the McBryde Thomas Flat Polar Quartic projection The central meridian is depicted as a straight line 0 45 as long as the Equator Other meridians are equally spaced curves concave toward the central meridian The parallels are straight parallel lines perpendicular to the central meridian These are spaced farthest apart near the Equator but gradually grow closer spaced when moving toward the poles The poles are represented by points Distortion is significant near the outer meridians at high latitudes but is less than in the Sinusoidal projection There is no distortion and scale is true along the Equator Scale is constant along any given latitude The QuarticAuthalic projection has the following parameters e Longitude of Origin e False Easting e False Northing NOTE Only a spherical form of this projection is used The semi major axis of the ellipsoid sphere is used for forward and inverse projection from grid to geodetic coordinates within the system wherein this projection is incorporated A2 42 Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems MAPublisher Supported Projections ROBINSON The Robinson projection provides a means
399. tered into the MAP Attributes panel the modified art elements will be graphically updated within the map to reflect these changes 64 Chapter 5 MAP Attributes MAP Attributes Find amp Replace Attributes Find Replace Choose to Find variables or to Find amp Replace variables simultaneously Find what Enter a variable on which to perform a search in the current attribute table Note this list will also contain previous criteria Replace with Enter a variable on which to replace found items Note this list will also contain previous criteria Find Replace All Attributes Just in Column Perform the Find or Find amp Replace on all values in the current layer or just in a specified column FUNCTIONALITY Z Find and Replace MAP Attributes panel gt Find amp Replace Find Replace Find what Florida Replace with FL Replace All Replace In All Attributes Just STATE_ABBR Case sensitive C Match whole word only Find Next Move to the next value matching the Find what variable Replace Replace the selected value with the Replace with variable Replace All Replace all occurrences matching the Find what variable Case sensitive If checked only values matching the case of the Find what variable will be found Match whole word only If checked only words matching the Find what variable will be found words containing the variable will be ignored The Find
400. tes you wish to label the data with Target Text Layer In the Text layer drop down lists s you must specify a Text layer that the labels will be output to Note you can only output labels to text layers in the same MAP View as the Source Layer LABEL SETTINGS MAPublisher provides options to specify label preferences such as label position alignment to lines of latitude minimum font sizes and horizontal scaling to best place labels within polygons and paths These Label Settings are common to Feature Text Label and MAP Tagger Tool Please see page 102 for more details 106 Chapter 10 Labeling Functions MAP Tagger Tool TAGGING MAP DATA When you have set all your Layer Label options and specified Label Settings click OK to close the dialog box and confirm your settings With the MAP Tagger Tool selected click the map object to label it The following list of keyboard modifiers may be used for additional labelling options note gt click map object with MAP Tagger Tool selected Labels placed using current Adobe Illustrator Type and MAPublisher settings Line labels are placed at click point and assigned angle of line at click point Al Area labels are placed horizontally at click point Point labels are placed horizontally at click point W Shift Only applicable for Line labels Labels placed using current Adobe Illustrator Type and MAPublisher settings E Line labels are placed horizontally at click point
401. the callout As text and images are inserted the preview gets updated to show the aspect of the callout bubble prior to export 140 Chapter 15 MAP Web Author Web Tag Dialog Insert a Title Callouts may have a title shown at the top of the bubble as shown in example page 139 The title can be typed in as a simple text but it can also be formatted using HTML tags and MAP Attribute values Insert an Image Images can be inserted in the callout bubble on the side of the main contents see example page 139 To insert an image by browsing to the image file with a file navigator select Manually To use an attribute value containing the path to the image file select By Attribute The attribute field name must be entered between percent signs e g lmage_File By default the original image size is maintained It is however possible to change it by using the Width and Height text boxes the width height ratio is maintained This option is not available for Multiple tagging with option By Attribute NOTE The maximum size for a callout is 1000 pixels x 1000 pixels When this limit is reached images are automatically scaled to fit image aspect ratio is maintained Add and Edit Contents As explained in the Prerequisites the callout bubble text and contents can be typed and formatted using HTML tags The Web Tag Dialog also provides a series of tools to create the HTML tags formatting It works as follow e Type the text or parame
402. theast Zeeland Bike Map ANWB The Netherlands Chugach State Park Imus Geographics Eugene OR USA Greater Philadelphia Regional Bicycle Map Steve Spindler Cartography Jenkintown PA USA Tasman Map Tasmanian Government Dept Primary Industries Water and Environment Hobart Tasmania Australia Recreation and Historical Sites on Public Lands of Arizona Arizona Office of Tourism Phoenix AZ USA A Mosaic of Space Time and Order The Portland Oregon Super Region Metro Regional Services Portland OR USA MAPublisher 8 User Guide for Adobe Illustrator V 8 0 Dec 2008 Printed in Canada Avenza Systems Inc When Map Quality Matters User Guide Avenza SYSTEMS INC Welcome Avenza welcomes you to mapmaking in the 21st century Combined with Adobe Illustrator MAPublisher has revolutionized the art of mapmaking by allowing spatial data files to be used to create maps inside a vector graphics program MAPublisher allows all your cartographic tasks to be performed where they should be done in a powerful graphics environment This manual assumes that the user is familiar with Adobe Illustrator and has at least a basic understanding of geographic information systems GIS terminology and concepts Please refer to your Adobe Illustrator user guide for more information on using Adobe Illustrator A glossary of GIS terms is included at the back of this manual By following this manual you will learn how to c
403. ther information contact the U S Department of Commerce The Lambert27 projection does not require any parameters LOXIMUTHAL The Loximuthal projection is a pseudocylindrical projection that is neither conformal nor equal area It was presented by Karl Siemon in 1935 and independently as Loximuthal by Waldo R Tobler This projection has the special feature that loxodromes rhumb lines from the central point the intersection of the central meridian and central latitude are shown straight true to scale and correct in azimuth from the center The azimuths with respect to other points along a rhumb line however are not shown correctly due to angular distortion on the map projection The central meridian in the Loximuthal projection is a straight line generally over half as long as the Equator depending on the central latitude Other meridians are depicted as equally soaced complex curves that are concave toward A2 36 Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems MAPublisher Supported Projections the central meridian and which intersect at the poles The parallels are equally spaced straight parallel lines running perpendicular to the central meridian The poles are represented as points The projection in symmetrical about the central meridian and around the Equator in the case where the central latitude is the Equator Scale is true along the central meridian and is constant along any given latitude Distortion varies from moderate to e
404. tion is incorporated Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems A2 31 MAPublisher Supported Projections GNOMIC The Gnomic projection is used for plotting great circle arcs as straight lines on a map Scale shape and area are badly distorted along these paths but the great circle routes are precise in relation to the sphere When Gnomic is selected in the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box you will need to enter the following parameters e False Northing and False Easting e Latitude of the Center of the Projection e Longitude of the Center of the Projection Radius of the Sphere GOODE HOMOLOSINE The Goode Homolosine projection is a pseudocylindrical composite projection that is equal area It is used primarily for world maps in a number of atlases including Goode Atlas Rand McNally It was developed by J Paul Goode in 1923 as a merging of the Mollweide or Homolographic and Sinusoidal Projections thus giving rise to the name Homolosine Each of the six central meridians is a straight line 0 22 as long as the Equator but not crossing the Equator Other meridians are equally spaced sinusoidal curves between latitudes 40 44 N and S The poles are represented by points Scale is true along every latitude between 40 44 N and S and along the central meridian within the same latitude range The GoodeHomolosine projection has the following parameters e Longitude of Origin e False Northing e False Easting NOTE Only a sph
405. tion Tool MAP Toolbar or Tools gt MAP Location Tool and Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP Location Displays the parameters of the currently selected layer WX WY The X and Y coordinates of the MAP Location x ta Latitude Longitude The latitude and longitude cursor in current map units e_ wx 6735373 081201 WY 4713611 801668 coordinates of the cursor in degrees based on Longitude 79 242434 Latitude 44 180616 the geodetic datum of the coordinate system Scale 1 Scale of the current layer Scale 1 18453568 00000 Angle 0 00000 ____ _ Angle Angle of Rotation Map X 10817148 54308 Page X Opt Map X Y _ Map Anchors Map Y 2666214 06202 Page Y Opt Projection Robinson in METER e ___ Coordinate System Coordinate system of the Units Units of the coordinate system units Meter m layer if specified if specified Shif olick to copy coordinates Page X Y Page Anchors Copy Notification When the MAP location tool is selected on the tool bar you will see this text enabling you to copy the current X and Y coordinates of the mouse cursor FUNCTIONALITY The MAPublisher Location Tool displays the coordinates of the mouse cursor on the selected map layer in current Map Units and in Degrees Latitude and longitude values are in reference to the geodetic datum set in the coordina
406. to draw the shape There are two methods of using the MAP Area tools As with Adobe Illustrator shape tools you can either click and drag to create a shape at an unspecified size Alternatively you can single click in the MAP document to open the Add Area dialog box where you specify exact width and height values for the shape Drawing via Click and Drag To draw shapes at unspecified sizes click and drag over the Map document while holding down the left mouse button until the desired area has been outlined as is done with the standard Adobe Illustrator area drawing tools Use the Alt key Windows or the Option key Mac to draw from the centre and or the Shift key to constrain the proportions When you release the mouse button the area will be created Entering Specific Dimensions To draw shapes at specified sizes single click at a point in your Map document at the location from which you wish to plot the shape The MAPublisher Add Area dialog box will appear into which you can enter specific dimensions for the area to be drawn If you wish to have the area centered over the click point simply check the Center area on click box If you do not check this box an area will be drawn from its upper left corner Click OK to plot the shape RESULTS Plotting a shape using either of these methods will initially select the features that fall inside the area in whole or part Therefore these tools can be also useful for selecting features that are
407. to swap the start and end points of lines if these line strings were not originally digitized in a preferable manner Join Lines can be used to connect line segments into continuous line strings or compound paths based ona specified attribute column Reng orn Ropes 208 Simplify Lines allows for the removal of vertices from selected lines based on mathematical formulae Join Points allows for point symbols to be joined based on attribute values This tool will generate a line string joining common points and is ideal for GPS data Topics covered in this section are Buffer Lines Flip Lines J oin Lines J oin Points Simplify Lines K I RS ANAE aa Chapter 8 Line Functions 85 Buffer Lines Filter gt MAP Lines gt Buffer Lines or MAP Toolbar Static Value If you want to enter a Buffer Lines specific value to buffer the selected lines by click this option and enter the value in the adjacent entry field Width Source Static value 3 53 Page units Millimeter a Units Select a unit to use for the buffer values The default is the current map unit Attribute Value If your line data has Attribute value J Id Page units Millimeter a column in its attribute table that contains buffering values click this option and select the column containing the value Output Layer territory Output Layer Select the Area layer which
408. tor file that was created without the use of MAPublisher and as such does not contain any geographic parameters or attribute data the following steps will enable you to georeference your Adobe Illustrator file and ultimately create an attribute rich and accurate scale and world grid structure for your map Please note that the steps that follow refer to functions that are outlined in more detail in the body of this user guide Please familiarize yourself with the main MAPublisher functions and in particular those under the MAP Views section see chapter 4 before proceeding Before beginning to georeference an Adobe Illustrator file you must be in possession of the following information 1 The real world scale of your data 2 Details of the coordinate system the data is in i e Projection Datum etc 3 The X Y coordinates of one tie in point in the coordinate system of your data When you have this information please use the following guidelines in order to georeferencing data with MAPublisher in Adobe Illustrator 1 Goto View gt Show Rulers Set the 0 0 point to the lower left hand corner of the page by double clicking the cross hairs in the upper right corner 2 If you have a completed Adobe Illustrator vector file go to step 3 Otherwise place and digitize your raster image Identify a registration or tie in point in your document This should be a specific location in your document for which a real world coordinate location is known or can
409. ts and census blocks Some of the geographic areas represented in TIGER are political areas including counties congressional districts school districts and ZIP codes Others are statistical areas including Metropolitan Statistical Areas MSA census tracts census block groups and census block The database contains information about these features such as their location in latitude and longitude the name the type of feature address ranges for most streets the geographic relationship to other features and other related information More information on the TIGER Line file format and data product can be found on the U S Census web page at http www census gov geo www tiger Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Al 7 MAPublisher Import Formats This web site contains a detailed description of the current TIGER Line format with an explanation of field meaning for each feature type A detailed description of the TIGER Line 1998 format with an explanation of field meaning for each feature type is available at http www census gov geo www tiger tiger98 pdf Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions rt1 bw1 Aggregate No Automated Translation Yes Circles No User Defined Attributes Yes Circular Arc No Coordinate System Support Yes Elliptical Arc No Generic Colour Support Yes Ellipses No Spatial Index Never Polygon Yes Schema Required Yes Donut Polygon Yes Transaction Support No Point Yes Geometry Type Attribute t
410. tton User objects can be organized via dragging and dropping within the dialog box Like other databases the columns are re sizable and when column headings are clicked will sort information alphabetically numerically The default objects in black are installed with MAPublisher They are read only and indicated with a lock icon Custom objects are indicated in blue they can be edited and deleted Incomplete objects are indicated in red with an exclamation mark warning icon Particularly some of the default datum shifts are pointing to external grid files gsb that are missing These files cannot be distributed by Avenza due to copyright or government regulations and have be acquired separately To find the required file refer to the value column in the Definition tab of the Datum Shift Viewer For example the file nb7783v2 gsb from the datum shift NAD83 CSRS 1 Canada New Brunswick is A2 8 Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems The Geodetic Datasource provided by Natural Resources Canada can provide the grid NTv2 http www geod nrcan gc ca tools outils ntv2_e php The Search entry box enables you to search for geodetic datasource by specifying a text string The search may be further refined by searching only specific categories found in the adjacent drop down list When using the Save button changes are saved in the custom parameter file and when no custom file has previously been loaded to customsystems xml loca
411. umbers Attributes are usually considered tabular data Geographic Data Since a GIS is a digital map database storing both spatial graphic and descriptive tabular information the integration of this information provides an opportunity for analysis and communication Data is stored using the Cartesian system X Y coordinates as follows e Points are stored as a single X Y location e Lines are stored as a series of ordered X Y coordinates e Areas are stored as a string of X Y coordinates defining the lines that bound the area Labels Symbols and Colour Map attributes can be represented by labels symbols and colour to make them easy to interpret e g rivers may be represented with blue lines of varying widths depending upon their size Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Al 21 GIS Backgrounder Layers Map features can be logically grouped into layers of related information For example a map could be layered by rivers soils mineral deposits and municipality This layering makes it easy to perform analysis that overlay geographic features and combine adjacent areas with similar characteristics Lines A line represents the linear shape of a map element which is too narrow to be an area e g a contour line or road Map Features A GIS stores two types of map information spatial information which describes the location and shape of geographic features and descriptive information about those features A GIS links
412. ur settings for your data Expand Network Links Checking this box will enable the use of network linked KML files LC deport KML croger bes on wible Mbuile Import KML as Visible Attributes When this check box is selected the KML specific attributes will be imported into the attribute table as a visible entities The KML attributes that will be imported are Description and Address which will panel as km Description and kmlAddress The the description of each object and the address column will show the corresponding address for that object When this check box is not selected the attributes will still be imported however they will not be immediately visible in the MAP Attributes table Chapter 3 Importing Map Data 33 Simple Import GML Simple Features 2 0 Settings Settings GML validation C Disable no attribute types You may select this aption if the file fails validation however the attributes wil be read as strings GML validation GML validation must be disabled to import GML files with a missing xsd file or with an invalid attribute structure MAPublisher If not disabled a GML validation error will be A Hint GML validation error displayed during the import of these files SAX Parser Validation Error at line 96913 column 54 of input source Copy your frequenly used XSD files to Slash data MAPublisher GML Know Errors National Hydro GMi Schema folder in MAPubiish
413. ut pair As with the first set you must pick a Comparison and a Value thus completing your expression If you enter an expression with Equal to e g Attribute1 A when you select this rule again and click the Add button the new expression will be automatically written using the same attribute Equal to the next value on the list e g attribute1 B This does not occur with the other operators Advanced Expressions The Advanced Expression panel lets you construct more complex expressions Enter a valid expression in the Expression field The Expression Validity icon will report if the expression entered is valid Otherwise it will report and include additional warning notes Alternatively click on the Browse button to enter and edit expressions via the Edit Expression tool see chapter 5 The following are some examples of basic expressions which can be entered for styling rules NAME Ontario Result All items with the value Ontario in the NAME column are assigned the selected style POPULATION lt 1000000 Result All items with values less than one million in the POPULATION column are assigned the selected style NAME Ontario OR NAME Alberta Result All items with the value Ontario OR Alberta in the NAME column are assigned the selected style NAME Ontario AND POPULATION lt 1000000 Result Only items containing the value Ontario in the NAME column AND values less th
414. ve method of importing map data into Adobe Illustrator Its focus is for the map maker who has a collection of map data that they wish to import into Adobe Illustrator at the same time This function can deal with import of multiple formats and varying coordinate systems with the dialog box providing a list of files flagged for import PREREQUISITES In order to import data via Advanced Import you must first set up your Adobe Illustrator document Please see the guidelines for setting up your page that are included in the Simple Import Prerequisites section page 34 Once your page has been set up you can open MAPublisher Advanced Import This is located under the File menu at the Import Map Data pullout or from the MAPublisher Toolbar button or by using the keyboard shortcut Alt Shift Ctrl A USING ADVANCED IMPORT Dialog Box Overview The dialog box itself is comprised of a list box for the display of currently selected files buttons to Add Remove or Edit files for Import and a section for the specification of an output coordinate system whether this be in one of the files in the list a coordinate system in the current document or a new user specified coordinate system Adding Files In order to select a file or files for import first click the Add button In the Add dialog box the same dialog box as Simple Import you can either leave the Format drop down list as lt Auto detect format gt or set the drop down list to the file type
415. ve the straight meridians and straight parallels of the Mercator projection except for the central meridian the two meridians 90 degrees away and the equator Nor does the Transverse Mercator projection have the straight rhumb lines of the Mercator projection rather it is a conformal projection Scale is true along the central meridian or along two straight lines equidistant from and parallel to the central meridian The Transverse Mercator projection is the projection used in the State Plane Coordinate System for states with predominant north south extent It is also the geometric basis for the UTM Coordinate System The term Gauss Kruger or simply Gauss refers to coordinate systems in parts of the world for example Germany and South America based on the Transverse Mercator projection When Transverse Mercator is selected in the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box you will need to enter the following parameters e False Northing and False Easting e Longitude of the Central Meridian e Latitude of the Origin of the Projection e Scale Reduction Factor at the Central Meridian Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems A2 45 MAPublisher Supported Projections TRANSVERSE MERCATOR EXTENDED This is a variation of the standard Transverse Mercator projection that is provided for the definition of coordinate systems used in specific counties in the U S states of Minnesota and Wisconsin Within a specific county in one of these states t
416. view the Flash map with a Web browser without posting the files on a server users must first set the Global Security Settings see page 146 Users should also download the latest Flash Player version for their Web browser It can be downloaded free of charge from Adobe Web site www adobe com 148 Chapter 15 MAP Web Author MAP Web Author Workflow The MAP GPS feature allows for the collection display and styling of raw GPS data directly in Adobe Illustrator Using the MAP GPS feature you can connect to many NMEA compliant GPS devices collect data points and then use the information to apply it to maps The data can be reprojected styled and scaled automatically when it is received The MAP GPS Panel is covered in this section Chapter 16 MAP GPS 149 MAP GPS Panel Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP GPS Panel or MAP Toolbar EA Start Stop Scanning Begins or ends scanning of the GPS device depending on the current state GPS Fix Displays the status of the GPS MAP GP Panel x fix No Fix 2D or 3D will be displayed Start Scanning Manual Plot Plots a single point at the Satellites In Use Displays the number current location read from the GPS and i GPS Fix No fix Dilution of Precision of satellites which are currently being oe TEE applies the manual plot settings from the tracked by the GPS device STOE UY S e Point Plot Settings dialog box j HDOP n a Tee n a R
417. w ensuring that you set the appropriate Feature Type in the Define Layer dialog box 14 Repeat steps 1 13 for any other coordinate systems which exist in your document such as inset maps for example 15 Your document is now a georeferenced MAPublisher file wherein each feature is also georeferenced and capable of accepting attributes using the MAP Attributes function see chapter 5 You can also use the MAPublisher Export function to create a GIS file from this newly georeferenced Adobe Illustrator map pi a a A1 34 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide General Tips and Hints TIPS ON EXPORTING TO OTHER GIS SOFTWARE WITH MAPUBLISHER These strategies do not focus on how to do the procedures as these are discussed in the Export section page 63 but more on what you need to know and understand for successful export results First and most importantly you need to understand that the MAPublisher export was designed to export MP imported or created data one layer and one feature at a time Why is it important to know this MAPublisher only recognizes objects that have been imported by or created with its filters If a layer was not imported with MAPublisher or is not hosted by a designated MAP View then MAPublisher will not allow you to export the layer If you have an entire layer that was not created by MAPublisher then 1 Ensure that your layer contains only a single feature type Point Area Line or Text 2 Inthe MAP Views
418. wing files may be found in the Helpful Styles amp Symbols files folder on your MAPublisher 8 CD or with your MAPublisher 8 download Windows XP C Documents and Settings All Users Documents Avenza MAPublisher 8 Helpful Styles amp Symbols Windows Vista C Users Public Public Documents Avenza MAPublisher 8 Helpful Styles amp Symbols Mac OS X Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 Helpful Styles amp Symbols Helpful Styles amp Symbols gt QuickMap Styles QuickMap styles are graphic styles and symbol libraries meant to allow users to quickly style their maps by the use of MAP Stylesheets To ease the process areas are classified in land and water styles lines are classified in borders contours roads rails and rivers styles QuickMap Styles Area ai Categorized graphic style library for use in Area Stylesheets QuickMap Styles Line ai Categorized graphic style library for use in Line Stylesheets QuickMap Styles Point ai Symbol library with common map symbols for use in Point Stylesheets Helpful Styles amp Symbols gt S 57 Symbolization The S 57 Symbolization folder contains nautical graphic styles and symbols libraries inspired from the International Hydrographic Office M 4 publication Regulations of the IHO for international INT charts and charts specifications of the IHO Graphic styles and symbol names are mostly based on the S 57 naming conventions The folder also contains templates with a series of MAPublisher St
419. within designated distances away from a central location 82 Chapter 7 Drawing Tools MAP Area Tools MAP Vector Crop Tool Tools gt MAP Vector Crop H FUNCTIONALITY By using the MAP Vector Crop Tool the entire map drawing vector data can be trimmed to a certain area of interest Typically the tool is meant to crop imported vector data that might be covering a larger area than the intended map extents Used on a copy of the full original MAP View MAP Vector Crop can also be utilized to create map insets smaller maps centered on specific areas see example below PREREQUISITES Before using the MAP Vector Crop tool ensure that the layers to be trimmed are visible and unlocked in the Adobe Illustrator Layers panel Similarly layers that are not supposed to be cropped should be locked or invisible The extent of the map that will remain after cropping must be visible on the screen so make sure to zoom out sufficiently prior to starting the vector crop tool NOTE Invisible and locked layers will not be cropped Users should save a copy of the Adobe document prior to performing a crop Due to some Adobe Illlustrator limitations text typed on a path might not return to their prior state after an undo USING THE MAP VECTOR CROP Click the MAP Vector Crop button yi in the Adobe Illustrator Tools panel then click and drag a rectangle over the art board Upon release of the mouse button the crop function is completed If the remai
420. xample a map of Chile may be best displayed in portrait but a map of Indonesia may be best displayed in landscape 3 Select your desired page units The default unit type is Points 4 Ensure the page origin is at 0 0 To do this select View gt Show Rulers Double click the top left corner of the rulers where the vertical and horizontal rulers intersect For more information and details regarding these operations please refer to your Adobe Illustrator User Guide In step 2 the default page size of 8 5 x 11 is for North American versions of Adobe Illustrator Other language versions of Adobe Illustrator may have different default page sizes Consult your Adobe Illustrator User Guide for more information NOTE Due to an Adobe Illustrator limitation the document size should not exceed a limit of 200 inches by 200 inches 200 equals 5080 mm 508 cm 14400 points 1200 picas 14400 pixels Passed this limit some MAPublisher tools may not operate properly shift in positioning Note that the maximum length and width dimension for an Adobe Illustrator document is 227 5416 inches Chapter 1 Getting Started 23 Preparing the Workspace Map Data File Formats MAPublisher 8 will import AND export most of the GIS industry leading vector file formats Import Formats CAD dxf dwg ESRI Interchange File e00 ESRI Arclnfo Generate gen ESRI Shapefile shp GML Simple Features 2 0 MapInfo Interchange m
421. ximately 21 5 km difference between the polar and equatorial radii Ellipsoidal Earth models are required for accurate range and bearing calculations over long distances For example GPS navigation receivers use ellipsoidal Earth models to compute position and waypoint information Ellipsoidal models define an ellipsoid with an equatorial radius and a polar radius The best of these models can represent the shape of the Earth over the smoothed averaged sea surface to within about 100 metres Reference Ellipsoids are usually defined by semi major equatorial radius and flattening the relationship between equatorial and polar radii Other reference ellipsoid parameters such as semi minor polar radius and eccentricity can be computed form these terms A datum is a mathematical model that describes the shape of the ellipsoid and orientation of coordinate systems used to map the Earth A datum is a smoothed mathematical surface of the Earth s mean sea level surface Different nations and agencies use different datums as the basis for coordinate systems in GIS Modern datums range from flat Earth models used for plane surveying to complex models used for international applications which completely describe the size shape orientation gravity field and angular velocity of the Earth A2 2 Appendix 2 All About Coordinate Systems Overview DATUM EXAMPLES e NAD27 For many years the North American Datum of 1927 was the standard in the United
422. xtreme and is absent only at the intersection of the central latitude and central meridian The Loximuthal projection has the following parameters e Longitude of Origin e Latitude of Origin e False Easting e False Northing NOTE Only a spherical form of this projection is used The semi major axis of the ellipsoid sphere is used for forward and inverse projection from grid to geodetic coordinates within the system wherein this projection is incorporated MCBRYDE THOMAS FLAT POLAR QUARTIC The McBryde Thomas Flat Polar Quartic projection is a pseudocylindrical equal area projection It was presented by F Webster McBryde and Paul D Thomas in 1949 It is primarily used for examples in various geography textbooks and is sometimes known simply as the Flat Polar Quartic projection The central meridian is a straight line 0 45 as long as the Equator Other meridians are fourth order quartic curves that are equally spaced and concave toward the central meridian The parallels are unequally spaced straight parallel lines spaced farthest apart near the Equator and running perpendicular to the central meridian The poles are represented by lines one third as long as the Equator Scale is true along latitudes 33 45 N and S and is constant along any given latitude Distortion is severe near the outer meridians at high latitudes This projection is free of distortion only at the intersection of the central meridian with latitudes 33 45 N
423. y Use polylined or pre joined linear feature data sets where available In your GIS application strip out the attributes you won t be using for queries or labelling before importing the data into Adobe Illustrator You can set a primary and secondary scratch disk under the Adobe Illustrator preferences option in order to draw additional storage from a partitioned or multi drive environment Turn off the layer preview icon that appears to the left of each layer name in the Adobe Illustrator layers panel This can be done by clicking the options menu in the layers panel and then selecting small panel rows in the panel option dialog box A1 26 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Memory Considerations Online Links Since the Internet is always changing refer to our web page www avenza com for the most recent list of relevant Internet sites or do a Google or Yahoo search As of the writing of this manual all the following links were active and functional For Geographic Information System GIS users the appeal of graphics is strong and the increasing ability to discover and share GIS across the Internet is fascinating The Internet offers a large number of free access GIS related web sites from which you can access map and information data sets For the general public there s general information about countries states and places simple maps of areas e g GIF PS format lists and maps of Internet resources in an area Fo
424. y clicking the operator buttons or items in the Objects list attributes name and values constants and functions These items are colour coded to ease the identification attribute names in purple string values in orange operators and numerical values in grey constants in green and functions in black Clicking any of the operator buttons or double clicking an item from the Objects list inserts that item into the expression It is recommended to use the interface rather than the keyboard to build expressions because functions are formatted correctly e g with brackets and for attribute values of type strings quotations marks are added 68 Chapter 5 MAP Attributes Edit Expression automatically Besides expressions are case sensitive For string comparison all strings values can be converted to a same case using the appropriate function LOWER string or UPPER string However the keyboard is best used for deletions Validity The validity of the expression will be displayed below the Expression Entry field and will be updated as you build the expression The Expression Validity icon will report if the expression entered is valid Otherwise it will report Q and include additional warning notes Operator Buttons Click to insert an operator at the current cursor position Available operators are as follows Open clause operator Close clause operator AND Logical AND operator OR Logical OR operator Logi
425. y have inadvertently pressed cut or the delete key Check under Edit in the menu bar if the Undo Clear task is available this means that you just deleted something Select Undo Clear and the data should return e Check the order of your layers Try moving the layer in question to the top of the list of layers in the Layers panel so that it is drawn on top of the other layers e Make sure that current layer is available for viewing in the Layers panel by having a dot in the left hand column under the eye visualization and beside the layer name e Check that you have colours for the fill and stroke set in the paint panel e Check the setting for the stroke width and increase if necessary Why are my Shapefile s not imported There are a couple of possible causes of this The two items to check for are 1 Make sure that you have all three required files There should be a triplet for each layer coverage with the extensions dbf shp and shx If you are missing any of these files you will not be able to import your files successfully 2 If you have transferred these files from one operating system to another you must always use binary ftp transfer or the files may be corrupted We have found that you cannot rely on the automatic transfer with all ftp utilities Some do not recognize the files as being binary and will transfer them as ASCII EXPORTING ISSUES How do I strip all the attributes from a MAPublisher file Simply drag your
426. y on the automatic transfer with all ftp utilities Some do not recognize the MID files as being text The mid files may be inadvertently interpreted as binary music files which often carry the same file extension If they are transferred as binary you will have trouble importing them 2 Were the files compressed If the files are compressed using a Windows ZIP format you must be careful when decompressing them If this is the case and the utility you used was Stuffit you need to make sure that it was set for a DOS zip file or the file can be corrupted The shareware utility ZIPIT found at http maczipit com has been found to be quite good for decompressing Windows zip files I am having trouble with importing SDTS files Where am I going wrong Be very careful how you receive a xxx tar gz file off the USGS web site and decompress it These files are in a binary format and if you use Smart TAR CR LF translation it will not import and may cause errors in MAPublisher Make sure that you do all FTP transfers as binary After you receive it use gzip to decompress it and TAR to further decompress it You should have about 20 separate files look for the ones that end in xxxxCATD DDF Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Al 17 Frequently Asked Questions Why does my data sometimes vanish If you imported some data and it appeared when selected but when you deselected the data it seemed to vanish here are a few things to check e You ma
427. yer The Layer drop down list shows all the layers that currently have features selected as well as the number of selected map objects for each layer also reported at the base of the panel The attribute values displayed in columns in the MAP Attributes panel can be sorted in ascending or descending order by clicking the column header The widths of the columns may be changed by clicking the column separator and manually dragging it to resize as desired Chapter 5 MAP Attributes 63 MAP Attributes The type of attribute is indicated by an icon preceding the column name Bi Boolean columns contain True or False values Integer columns contain only whole numbers RI Real columns contain numbers carrying decimal values 5 String columns can contain attributes that are both alpha and numeric Editing Attributes MAPublisher MAP Attributes panel is a fully editable spreadsheet environment All attribute values may be edited except for certain MAPublisher Property attributes see page 60 To change the value of a cell double click within the cell and enter the new value such as you would in a spreadsheet program Keep in mind that you must enter values that correspond with a column s type i e only enter numbers into a column of type Real or Integer The edits will immediately be reflected in the map documents database records Existing attribute records may also be edited or modified by performing a find and replace operation on them
428. ying along a straight line A reduction of the number of points makes for a cleaner and more readable cartographic line As well in cartographic work within Adobe Illustrator the removal of points along a path can significantly improve the speed of file redraws and reduce the overall file size The Douglas Peucker Algorithm was created in Fortran 66 by David H Douglas and Thomas K Peucker at the University of Ottawa in 1970 71 It was extensively tested in 1972 and was publicly communicated in the following article Algorithms for the Reduction of the Number of Points Required to Represent a Digitized Line or Its Caricature Canadian Cartographer Vol 10 No 2 December 1973 There are a number of online resources where more information may be found on the Douglas Peucker algorithm including http everything2 com index p node_id 859282 and http facstaff unca edu mcmcclur GoogleMaps EncodePolyline algorithm html BEZIER CURVES AND OTHER MAPUBLISHER OPERATIONS Bezier curves are defined using four control points Two of these are the end points of the curve while the other two effectively define the gradient at the end points These two points control the shape of the curve The curve is actually a blend of the control points This is a recurring theme of approximation curves defining a curve as a blend of the values of several control points Most GIS formats do not usually support Bezier curves used in graphics packages such as Adobe Illustr
429. ylesheets linking S 57 imported features to appropriate nautical symbols and graphic styles The basic template allow users to quickly apply styles to the imported data The advanced template is more detailed to help users learn the format and make use of the data Nautical_Graphic_Styles ai Graphic style libraries for use with S 57 data Nautical_Symbols ai Symbols library for use with S 57 data main symbols S57_Advanced_Template ait Adobe Illustrator template with detailed MAP Stylesheets for use with S 57 data S57_Basic_Template ait Adobe Illustrator template with simplified MAP Stylesheets for use with S 57data US5FL12M Sample ENC file in S 57 format chart of Tampa Bay courtesy of NOAA Use of the S 57 templates e To create anew document choose File gt New from Template Select 57_Advanced_Template ait Import a S 57 file for example use the sample file e Inthe MAP Stylesheets panel move the layers from No MAP Stylesheet to its corresponding stylesheet when available gt Advance template the corresponding stylesheet has the same name as the layer but not all layers have a stylesheet therefore stay under No MAP Stylesheet gt Basic template all layers have a stylesheet with the same name as the layer or if not the name others The letters A Land P have be added to the names to sort the stylesheets per feature type Area Line or Point Appendix 4 Helpful Styles and Symbols Files A4 1 NOTE This repres
430. yline arc ellipse rectangle rounded rectangle region polygon and text geometric data in tab files Each geometric entity present in a tab file has display properties such as pen and brush width pattern and colour Supported TAB properties match those described for MID MIF files on the previous page A1 6 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide MAPublisher Import Formats MICROSTATION DESIGN DGN DGN are the native files created for Bentley Systems Inc MicroStation product These files consist of a header followed by a series of elements The header contains global information including the transformation equation from design units to user coordinates as well as the dimension of the elements in the file Each element contains standard display information such as its colour level class and style as well as a number of attributes specific to its element type For example a text element has fields for font size and the text string in addition to the standard display attributes Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions dgn Aggregate No Automated Translation Yes Circles Yes User Defined Attributes Yes Circular Arc Yes Coordinate System Support No Elliptical Arc Yes Generic Colour Support Yes Ellipses Yes Spatial Index Never Polygon Yes Schema Required Yes Donut Polygon Yes Geometry Type Attribute igds_type Point Yes 3D Support Yes Line Yes Text Yes Supported Versions Windows V7 V8 Mac OS X V7
431. zoom in and out However once you restore the zoom level to the original extents at which the object was created it will no longer appear as a complete shape The solution to this is to disable the anti aliasing option in the Adobe Illustrator preferences dialog box Are there any sources for free GIS data There are a multitude of web sites which offer free GIS data in several different forms Please see pages A1 27 to A1 29 of this user guide for a list of several free download sites What can cause attribute corruption The most likely cause of attribute corruption other than the files being corrupted before you got them is that you have put layers with differing attribute structures into a single layer As a rule of thumb you should use one layer for each external file that you are importing Also some Adobe Illustrator functions cause the link between artwork objects and their attributes table to be broken and therefore attribute information gets lost These functions are e Compound path Make e Pathfinder Live Paint e Blob brush Adobe Illustrator CS4 If required users should first duplicate their working layer in the Adobe Illustrator Layers panel before using these functions What can I do when a filter does not appear to work e Make sure that you have highlighted the desired Layer in the Layers panel and that it is unlocked and visible e Make sure that what you have asked the filter to do makes sense e

MAPublisher 8.0 User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents